Home

H8S/2612 E6000 Emulator User`s Manual

1. No Command Name Abbreviation Function 33 GENERATE_MAKE_ GM Creates a makefile to be built outside the HEW FILE 34 GO GO Executes user program 35 GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector 36 GO_TILL GT Executes user program until temporary breakpoint 37 HALT HA Halts the user program 38 HELP HE Displays the syntax of a command 39 INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform 40 LOG LO Controls command output logging 41 MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory mapping 42 MAP_SET MS Sets memory mapping 43 MEMORY_COMPARE MC Compares memory contents 44 MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents 45 MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents 46 MEMORY_FILL MF Modifies the content of a memory area by specifying data 47 MEMORY_FIND MI Searches for data within the memory range 48 MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves a block of memory 49 MEMORY_TEST MT Tests a block of memory 50 MODE MO Sets or displays the CPU mode 51 MODULES MU Sets up or displays the on chip peripheral functions 52 MONITOR_CLEAR MOC Deletes a monitor point 53 MONITOR_DISPLAY MOD Displays the content of the monitor 54 MONITOR_REFRESH MOR Controls an automatic update of the content of the monitor 55 MONITOR_SET MOS Sets or displays a monitor point 56 OPEN_WORKSPACE OW Opens a workspace 57 QUIT QU Exits HEW 58 RADIX RA Sets default input radix 59 REFRESH RF Updates windows related to memory 60 REGISTER_DI
2. BR a OxOOffef80 llong 10 H 0000794b 0x0Offef80 llong R I H 000059e2 0x00ffef84 long R 2 H 0000446b 0x0Offef88 llong E H 000041c6 0x0Offef8c llong 4 H 00003f54 Ox00ffef90 long R 6 H 00002781 0x00ffef34 long R 6 H 00001 cfb Ox00ffef98 long ftg H 0000167e 0x00ffef3c llong R 8 H 000015fb 0x00ffefa0 llong R 9 H OOOOOHE Ox0Offefa4 llong i H 000a R4 int SJE Watch A Watch A Watch3 A Watcha 7 Break Stepping Completed Read write 48 69 fi INS NM 4 Figure 6 25 HEW Window Step Over 365 RENESAS 6 13 Forced Breaking of Program Executions The HEW can force a break in the execution of a program e Cancel all the breaks e To execute the remaining sections of the tutorial function select Go from the Debug menu or the Go button on the toolbar Figure 6 26 Go Button e The program goes into an endless loop To force a break in execution select Halt from the Debug menu or the Stop button on the toolbar Figure 6 27 Stop Button 6 14 Resetting the MCU Resetting the MCU initializes the internal I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector To reset the MCU select Reset CPU from the Debug menu or the Reset CPU button on the toolbar Figure 6 28 Reset CPU Button To execute the program from the reset vector select Reset Go from
3. 11 HEW Sample Text Figure 11 6 Format views dialog 166 RENESAS 12 Technical Support The High performance Embedded Workshop has a number of integrated technical support features gt To check for HEW product updates or service packs 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Check website for updates 2 Your default web browser is invoked and defaults to the HEW download page for your region 3 Browse this area for HEW updates to fix bugs or add new features Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with the HEW application If a problem does occur that results in a application crash the HEW bug tracking program will be invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below gt To create and send a HEW bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Create Bug Report 2 Detailed information is generated from your HEW system This may take some time The bug report dialog is then displayed This is shown in figure 12 1 3 It is possible to then add additional information concerning the exact issue you have found in the large edit box 4 Once you are happy with your report you can choose the method of sending the report in the submit drop list You can print it e mail it or save it to a disk 5
4. Figure 4 6 Page Setup Dialog 81 RENESAS gt To set up the page header and footers 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the header and footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect gt To set up print wrapping 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Click the wrap text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything is visible 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 82 RENESAS 4 8 2 Changing Tabs gt Tochange tab size 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Enter into the Tab size field the number of desired tabs 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect Le lex Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Tab size 4 m Spacing V Enable auto indentation m General IV Save files before executing any tools IV Show files in notebook Prompt before saving files JV Enable syntax coloring V Enable Smart edit for C files IV Enable tooltip watch m Exter
5. Version Toolchains 3 6 System Tools Call Walker 1 1 Register H Series Librarian Interface 1 1 I Mapview 1 0 Urrenister E Utility Phases Sear Debugger Components Lee Binary File Object Reader 1 0 Eine ElfDwarf2 object reader 2 0 are Generic Cache View ECX 1 0 Search disk Generic Coverage View ECX 1 0 Generic Event View ECX 1 0 Tool information Generic Image View ECX 1 0 Es f ERRI a LT PAA BOY 10 hal 7 gt Uninstaller I Show all components Current HEW tools database location E Hew Modify i Figure 5 1 Tools Administration Dialog There are five standard types of component e Toolchains a set of build phases e g compiler assembler and linker These components provide the build capability e System Tool an application EXE which can be launched from the Tools menu They are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the Hitachi Debugging Interface HDI or an interactive graphical librarian Utility Phase a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific e Debugger Component a component that supports some specific debugger functionality e g Target platform Object read
6. C PROJECT C PROJECT a PROJECT WORKSPACE Figure 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first We need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything 199 RENESAS 4 2 Method for Activating HEW To activate the HEW follow the procedure listed below 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector of the emulator if you use the user system interface cable This is not necessary when you do not use the user system interface cable 3 Turn on the emulator Be sure to turn on the user system before supplying power to the emulator if you use the user system 4 Activate the HEW from Programs in the Start menu 5 The Welcome dialog box is displayed Welcome pe 9 Cancel Open a recent project workspace Administration g pue n Browse to another project workspace Figure 4 2 Welcome Dialog Box Create a new project workspace radio button Cr
7. i Data Input n 0x00000a2c for i 8 i lt 10 i Ox00000a2e j rand 0x00000a36 if j lt 8X 0x00000a38 j i 0x00000a3a afi j Ox00000a44 printf a d ld n i a i gt 0x00000a62 sort a 0x00000a66 printf Sorting results n 0x00000a72 for i 8 i lt 16 i Ox00000a74 printf a d 1d n i a i ee 7 S Figure 4 16 Editor columns gt To switch off a column in all source files 1 Right click on the editor window Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog is displayed figure 4 17 The Check status shows whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked it is enabled if the check box is gray this means that in some files the column is enabled and in other files it is not 5 Click OK for the new column settings to take effect a gt To switch off a column in one source files 1 Right click on the editor window which you wish to remove a column from and the editor pop up is displayed 2 Click the Columns menu item and a cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it has a tick next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 93 RENESAS Global Editor Column States x Coverage Editor Source Address Cancel lt q lt Figure 4 17
8. Cancel Figure 3 11 Custom Options Options Tab 3 4 2 Output Files Tab The Output Files tab figure 3 12 is where you can specify the output file or files that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless 51 RENESAS Options Output Files Dependent Files Output files CONFIGDIA utilities lib Modify Remove ib Cancel Figure 3 12 Custom Options Output Files Tab gt To add an output file 1 Click Add The Add Output File dialog will be invoked figure 3 13 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu 21x Eile o O Browse Cancel Figure 3 13 Add Output File Dialog gt To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Output File dialog which is the same as figure 3 13 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click
9. 242 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 243 5 5 12 Updating the Window Content 0 0 ccc ese e ese ceeeeeeeseeesseteeeetaeeeseeaeeees 243 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Content 00 00 00 cee cece esceeeeseeeeeseeeseesaeeeeeeeaeeees 244 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File 0 eee cece eeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeees 245 Viewing the VO MeMOr uostres reniris iVENT VEEE SE EE Erer EErEE 246 56 1 Opening the TO Window ncciiseccicccsccsssccsuscsscssiecsnessvecsnscssassnecsvassnedovecsensosaskissseess 246 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display sessssssssesssesesesesesesesesrstsrsesrersesesrsesreeeres 246 5 6 3 Manually loading an IO file secssiiresiireniisnsssieindiiri iieis 247 5 7 5 8 59 5 14 5 6 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents s s sssssssssesesrsesesrsesersssrstsrsestsesisesesrsrsrst 247 5 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents 0 cece cece ceeeeeeeceeeeeeteeeeees 247 Viewing the Current Stats c cssonsccossenoisonssnnsconvaredcorauessenssncedensenesserdsntecenasacccenpsasteonaeesnes 248 Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly 0 00 00 249 5 8 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window cece cece ects eeeeeeteneenes 249 5 8 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed oo eee cece eeces ce ceceeceeeeeseeeseesseeeeetseeeeaes 250 Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime oo eee cee eeececeeceeeeeeecseeeseeeeeesaeeeeaes 251 5 9 1 Opening the Monitor Wind
10. Shows the check results for the internal ROM write protection controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the hardware break control circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the trace controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the run time counter in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the emulation monitor controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for analysis controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the bus monitor controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion 449 18 Testing Parallel Access Shows the check results for the parallel access A Internal ROM Parallel Read Access WORD OK B Internal ROM Parallel Write Access WORD OK controlling circuits in C Internal ROM Parallel Write Access High Byte OK the E6000 normal D Internal ROM Parallel Write Access Low Byte completion E Internal RAM Parallel Read Access WORD F Internal RAM Parallel Write Access WORD G Internal RAM Parallel Write Access High Byte OK H Internal RAM Parallel Write Access Low Byte OK I Option RAM Parallel Read Access WORD J Option RAM Parallel Write Access WORD K Option RAM Parallel Write Access High Byte SKIP L Option RAM Par
11. button see figure 6 46 Trace Acquisition dialog box 9 Click the Range Event combo box to select the event you have registered The event is now enabled Click the OK button to complete the trace setting General Stop Delayed Stop 1 rm Conditions C Disabled Range Event Point to Point Range Figure 6 52 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Setting Completed 10 Make the setting such that the break occurs after the instruction at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO0 a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function 11 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following content PTR Address I Data R W Area S Clock P NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp s 1 Timestamp Ditference 00087 ffef80 00086 ffef82 00085 ffef84 00084 ffef86 00083 ffef88 00082 ffef8a 00081 ffef8c 00080 ffef8e 00079 ffef90 00078 ffef92 00077 ffef94 00076 ffef96 00075 ffef98 00074 ffef9a N0n73_frefac 0000 alc 0000 167e 0000 2781 0000 446b 0000 794b 0000 15fb 0000 59e2 noon EEEEEEEEEEEEEE 0000h000min000s000ms744us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms744u3500ns 0000h000min000s000ms764us875ns 0000h000min000s000ms765us000ns 0000h000min0005000ms785u
12. lt I Navigation Projects lt I Navigation Figure 2 22 Standard Library Includes 2 8 3 Show File Paths Tf Show file paths is selected all of the files in the project window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter figure 2 23 Workspace OF x Demo Assembly source file 2 C AHew2 Demo Demo c0 ste C source file 2 C Hew2 Demo Demohwetg c E C Hew2 Demo Demo inty c 2 C Hew2 Demo Demo main c E C Hew2 Demo Demo sbrk c amp Dependencies en ar Figure 2 23 File Paths Shown 32 RENESAS 2 8 4 Sort files by time order When this option is selected the workspace window is then sorted into file time stamp order If files are updated after selecting this option manually update the order of these files gt To manually update the file order 1 Select Refresh order in the pop up menu on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 9 Setting the Current Project A workspace can contain more than one project but only one of the projects can be active at any time This active project is the one which build actions and debug operations can be performed on It is also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project This active project is shown as bold characters gt To set a project as the current project 1 Select a non active project from the Projects tab of the
13. 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL E2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 A green mark appears in the blank on the left side of the line to indicate the presence of an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark press CTRL EF2 select Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark from the local menu or click the toggle bookmark toolbar button QA 3 The mark will be removed and the line will return to normal text To jump to the next bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark press F2 or select Bookmarks gt Next Bookmark from the local menu or click the next bookmark toolbar button co To jump to the previous bookmark in a file 1 Ensure that the insertion cursor is somewhere within the file to be searched 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark press SHIFT F2 or select Bookmarks gt Previous Bookmark from the local menu or click the previous bookmark toolbar button in To remove all bookmarks in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose bookmarks you want to remove is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks or select Bookmarks gt Clear All Bookmarks from the local menu or cl
14. 414 8 2 3 Access to the Reserved Area cece cseesesecesesesessssceeesesessscssesssseessseesasseees 414 8 2 4 Using the Internal RAM Area as External Addresses 0 0 cececeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 414 8 2 5 Support of Flash Memory ou eee eesceseeeeseesesecseeeeseseesesaeeeesecaseeseeesseeaesaees 414 8 216 Hardwate Standby sivciccsssssessioassessveossacenedavecesaviexsstoseracpsvaes cesoundvsggesueasensvodescsuaeels 414 Appendix A Troubleshooting 0 ce eeeceeeceeceecesceeseecseseesseseseeeeeseeeseeeeeees 415 Appendix B Regular Expressions esccesesesseceeeeeeeeceseseeeaesseeeaeenaeeeeeaeees 417 Appendix Placeholders sisser eriin ei oa EERE EE 419 C i Whats a Placeholder nitne are NEEE EASTA ETERO 419 C2 Ins rting a Placeholder crire ireira E arite a Ri 419 C3 Available PlaceholderS ooie ae a ea E E AR TE 421 GA Placeholder Tipsene oia aeeoa ie arnari EnS TEVA SEn SECES ESES 423 Appendix D T O File Format 0 0 seisoene eneee e EEEE ERES 425 D 1 File format Bit Field Not Supported cee cece eee eeeeeeesesesaeeeesesaeeeeseeseeeeseeeeee 425 D 2 File format Bit Field Supported cecececceseeseceeceeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeseeaeeaeeaeseeseeeeaeeeeeeeees 427 Appendix E Symbol File Format cece cece cee ceeceeceecseceseeceeeeeseeaeeaes 429 Appendix F HMAKE User Guide o oo cee cee eee ceeecececeteeeeaeeaee 431 F 1 1 Basic structure F 1 2 Exit codes F 1 3 Parameters F 2 File syntax ee 432 F 2
15. 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set Up s sesssesssssssssssseeereseserestseseseseseststntntntsenenenenenenenesesesrses 149 9 Using Visual SourceSafe s srerriererresresrenresrserenrsssesrenresereresrssreeree 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace ssssssssssessessssssssisisisrsrsrsrsrsrsrstrsesrenenes 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe 0 eee eee ceee cee ceeseeeeeeeeseeeseeaseessesaseeeseeeeeees 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe 0 cee cess eseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeetaeeeeaees 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands eee eseeceeceeeecseceesseseeesaseeessseceeesesasseseeessseeseeeas 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control eee 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control j 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control eee 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation sssessssssesssesessreeresessrererererererernrerereneseererenes 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File ccc cssscsssccssssseosssscesesescsessasccsessonsessstossnesaoesse 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File cece cececseeeeeeesseesseceeseesecaeeseseeeeeeee 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options eee ce cece cee eeeeeeeeeceesaeeeceecaeeeeseeseeeeeseeees 10 Network Facies i ecsiecescvecevievsctsatessceessss0edissdessteasisaserieerscazenerees 157 MOL OVERVIEW E E E EE PETE E A T E E 157 10 1 1 Enabling network access 158 10 1 2 S
16. Confirmation c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 O she toolchain hrf c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O sample c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 Ohinclude c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 ONlib c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH 451 O bin c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 O hew c Shew T oalchains Hitachi SH 451 O bin dwicny exe c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin she exe c Shew T oalchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shcasm exe c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH51 O bin shcerr msg c hew T oalchains Hitachi SH451 O bin shcerr off c Shew T oolchains Hitachi SH 451 O binshcfrt exe c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH451 O bin shegen exe c hewT oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shchip msg c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shemdl exe c hew T oolchains Hitachi SH 51 O bin shcpep exe Figure 5 10 Confirmation Dialog 102 RENESAS 5 7 Technical Support Issues The Tools Administration dialog is also capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the HEW itself that cannot be unregistered registered manually If you check the Show all components check box on the tools administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see figure 5 11 g x Tools Administration Registered components Version t C Utility Phases H E Debugger Components 4 Extension Components Hes Communication Tools E System Extension Components Unrea
17. Insert Existing project fn Browse Figure 2 24 Insert Project Dialog To insert an existing project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed 2 Set the Existing Project option 3 Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click Browse to search for it graphically 4 Click OK to insert the existing project into the workspace 34 RENESAS 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if another project uses one of the others in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library that is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent i e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug
18. Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build All from the pop up menu 2 6 2 Building Individual Files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually To build an individual file 1 Select the file which you want to build from the project window 2 Select Build gt Build File click the build file toolbar button es or press CTRL F7 or click the right mouse button on a file icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build lt file gt from the pop up menu 26 RENESAS 2 6 3 Stopping a Build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process gt To stop a build 1 Select Build gt Stop Build or click the stop build toolbar button The build will be stop after the current file has been built 2 Wait until the message Compiler Finished appears in the Output window before continuing gt To forcibly terminate a current tool 1 Select Build gt Terminate Current Tool The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build multiple projects and configurations at once 2 To build multiple projects 1 Select Build gt Build Multiple
19. Timestamp Source Label Timestamp Difference Bus status during this cycle DTC operation PROG prefetch Data CPU data access cycle Refresh refresh cycle or DMAC DMAC cycle not available when a time stamp is acquired Number of clock cycles in bus cycle as 1 to 8 To indicate more clock cycles OVR is displayed not available when a time stamp is acquired A 4bit binary number showing the four probe pins in the order of Probe 4 Probe 3 Probe 2 and Probe 1 from the left not available when a time stamp is acquired Status of the NMI input not available when a time stamp is acquired Status of eight IRQ inputs not available when a time stamp is acquired Time stamp of the record Time stamps start from zero each time the user program is executed The timer resolution depends on the time stamp clock rate selected in the trace acquisition only available when a time stamp is acquired Source program Label information that corresponds to the address if defined Displays the difference from the timestamp value shown on the previous line only available when a time stamp is acquired Note Items other than PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Probes Timestamp Source Label and Timestamp Difference vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help It is possible to
20. Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option or 1 Select the project which you want to make active from the Project gt Set Current Project sub menu 33 RENESAS 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into a workspace gt To insert a new project into a workspace 1 Select Project gt Insert Project The Insert Project dialog will be displayed figure 2 24 2 Set the New Project option 3 Click OK The Insert New Project dialog will be invoked 4 Enter the name of the new workspace into the Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character As you enter the project name the HEW will add a subdirectory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired 5 Click the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually 6 The Project type list displays all of the available project types e g application library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list 7 Click OK to create the project and insert it into the workspace Insert Project 2 xi
21. Yes please No thanks View directories to be included Approx size of generator Next gt Einish Cancel Figure 5 15 New project type wizard Step 1 Dialog 5 The edit field is set to the current projects name This will become the name of the new project generator project type that will appear in the new workspace dialog Change the contents of the fields as appropriate 6 At this stage you can choose to include the configuration directories or not In this case it is normal to not include the contents of these directories because normally these are only intermediate files 7 Then click next The following dialog is displayed 106 RENESAS What type of generator would you like No dialog Information dialog with default bitmap Information dialog with bitmap Browse What Icon would you like to be used The default icon An icon contained in the file M ose Image ja Approx size of generator lt Back Newt gt Einish Figure 5 16 New project type wizard Step 2 Dialog 8 At this stage you can change the wizard graphic and the project icon By default no dialog is displayed for this wizard When you wish to display Project information dialog box you should either information dialog with default bitmap or information dialog with bitmap This selection affects to show icon in the Project information dialog 9 You can also deci
22. mark at the left of the expanded module name or pressing the lt key will close the I O register display For a display in the bit level click the mark at the left of the register name or select the register name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the gt key The register display will expand to show the names of register bits and values Clicking the mark at the left of the expanded register name or pressing the lt key will close the register bits display 246 RENESAS 5 6 3 Manually loading an IO file To manually load an IO file right click on the IO window and select the Load IO file menu item on the IO window pop up A standard file browser is invoked Simply select the file you require to load and click OK The IO file will be loaded into the window 5 6 4 Modifying the I O Register Contents To edit the value in an I O register double click or press the Enter key on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 5 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 247 RENESAS 5 7 Viewing the Current Status Choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status
23. 4 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK 138 RENESAS 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands Commands are defined when the Add or Modify buttons are clicked on the dialogs shown in figure 8 3 and figure 8 4 In either case the dialog shown in figure 8 5 is invoked Add Command 2 xi m Command Version control executable vAwss wingais s exe Browse Canal Arguments History CDIR FILENAME Y USERNAME PASS gt Initial directory SiFILEDIR D Browse Executable return code di Retum code of executable is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To E fp Figure 8 5 Add Modify Command Dialog gt To define a command 1 Enter the full path of the command into the Version control executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 2 Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 3 Enter the initial directory in which you would like to run the executable from into the Initial
24. E lt lt Counter All Function Select Function Set Function 2 Functions E Functions E Functions Cancel Figure 5 47 Select Function Dialog Box Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally one function can be selected at one time only for setting breakpoints multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Set Function Name Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Counter All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box Selecting a Function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button Deselecting a Function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt lt button The deselected function will be moved from Set Function Name list box back to the Select
25. Export D Hew3 Export Browse ES Cancel Figure 5 21 Export Custom Project Generator Dialog 111 RENESAS This will export the required files along with a Setup exe file which can be then be executed on another HEW This will ask the location of the new users HEW and when Install is clicked the project generator will be added to their HEW system s Install custom generator What is the location of the HEW executable C AHewS HEW2 exe Browse Cancel Figure 5 22 Install custom generator Dialog Once completed the project type will appear in the new workspace dialog Note A custom project generator can only be used in a HEW which is the same or greater version If you attempt to use the project generator in an old HEW an error message will be reported If your project generator contains a different toolchain to the destination HEW then this will be upgraded when the project is first created 112 RENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the Toolbar The High performance Embedded Workshop provides 2 standard toolbars as detailed in chapter 1 Overview In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars via the Customize dialog figure 6 1 2 x Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Toolbars Editor IV Show Tooltips New Debug Search Reset Templates Bsa Bookmarks Standard Version Control Ma
26. Free Trace m Clock F DIC Cycles Disabled x I Refresh Cycles Trace Events Event 10 R H 1092 address x Add Edit Sequence Delete Del All Cancel Figure 5 69 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box General Page RENESAS Suppress Time Stamp Free Trace Trace Events Notes 296 I Clock Acquires no trace information of the specified types of bus cycle Sets a condition for time stamping Select either from Disabled 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us 16 us or 100 us as the resolution for time stamping A time stamp has a 32 bit counter At 125 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about 9 minutes and at 100 us the maximum time is about 5 days When the counter overflows its content will be cleared to continue counting No time stamp information will be acquired when Disabled is selected Checking this box enables the free trace mode When the free trace mode is enabled Starts acquiring the data immediately after program execution has been started Only the trace halt condition is available The range trace is unavailable and four range trace pages 1 to 4 become disabled When the free trace mode is disabled Sets the start and halt conditions of trace acquisition Event Add Edit Sequence Delete Del All Sets event points to be used as trace acquisition conditions Lists the event poin
27. Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels realtime update Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the popup menu Saving the Watch Window Contents in a File To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the popup menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten Opening a Memory Window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choose Go To Memory from the popup menu the Set Address dialog box opens showing the information start address end address and size of the selected variable as default Clicking OK opens the Memory window 277 RENESAS 5 14 4 Locals Window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window Opening the Locals Window To open the Locals window choose View gt Symbol gt Locals or click the Locals toolbar button f OxOOffef80 long 10 i H OOffef80 ER5 long i H 000a R4 int p sam Ox00ffbOd8 ERE class Sample Figure 5 57 Locals Window If a local variable is not initialized when
28. Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 6 12 Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Spacing mi J Tab size 4 V Enable auto indentation General IV Save files before executing any tools IV Show files in notebook Prompt before saving files IV Enable syntax coloring V Enable Smart edit for C files IV Enable tooltip watch External editor J Use external editor Modify Figure 6 12 Options Dialog Editor Tab 123 RENESAS 2 Check the Use external editor check box The External Editor dialog will be displayed figure 6 13 External Editor 2 xi Command CAwINDOWs Notepad exe Browse OK Arguments to open file Cancel SIFULLFILE gt Arguments to open file at line S FULLFILE gt Figure 6 13 External Editor Dialog 3 Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 4 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into the Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned 6 C
29. RESET Vcc Emulator control O User system circuit interface cable Figure 7 3 User System Interface Circuit for RESET PBO Vcc Emulator User system control PBO interface cable circuit Figure 7 4 User System Interface Circuit for PBO PB1 PB7 Emulator control circuit 470 User system O PB1 PB7 interface cable QS3384 Figure 7 5 User System Interface Circuit for PB1 PB7 397 RENESAS ANO ANI1 AVcc AVss and Vref AVcc Z MCU O ANO AN11 A AVss 0 0224 F O AVcc O Vref O AVss 0 022 uF 0 022 uF User system interface cable User system interface cable Figure 7 6 User System Interface Circuit for AN0 AN11 A Vcc AVss and Vref Signals 7 3 Differences between MCU and Emulator When the emulator is turned on or initialized or the system is reset there are some differences in the initial values in some of the general registers between the MCU and the emulator as shown in table 7 2 Table 7 2 Initial Value Differences between MCU and Emulator Status Register E6000 Emulator MCU Power on PC Reset vector value Reset vector value initialized ERO to ER6 Undefined Undefined ER7 SP H 10 Undefined CCR The I mask is set to 1 and the The mask is set to 1 and the other bits are undefined other bits are undefined Reset command PC Reset vector value Reset vector value ERO to ER6 Undefined Undefined ER7 SP H 10 Undefined CCR The mask is set t
30. ROM 25ke x J Enable Flash memory RAM 16kB bd Pin 120 128PinB m Modules V Enable DTC M Enable IDA r 4D Converter M Enable D A Converter V Enable IICO 2 se IV Enable Refresh Controller M Enable 1101 a M Enable DMAC M Enable WDT1 SCI Select M Enable TPU3 5 M Enable TMR2 3 C sco x C scio 2 IV Enable PWM14 C scio3 M Enable MultiProcesserComunication SCI1 4 Scio 4 Figure 5 2 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Device Page Use this page to specify functions for an MCU not included in the list of MCUs The items are adopted by the device last selected Custom Device page ROM Specify the internal ROM area size RAM Specify the internal RAM area size Pin Specify the product package Modules Check this box to validate on chip peripherals Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use Some emulators may not support the Custom Device function For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 221 RENESAS 5 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected Checking Change driver in start up on the Configuration Properties dialog box allows a selection of the driver next time the emulator is connected E6000 Driver Details Driver S er m Details Interface juse interface x Channel E6000 USB Interface Confi
31. The figure displayed in figure 2 18 2 The build multiple gives you the choice of which projects and configurations should be built To select which projects and configurations need to be built select the check box next to the project configuration combination you want to build For example in figure 2 18 if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the build button and the HEW will then build the projects and configurations you have chosen 4 Ifyou want to build all the projects which you choose you click the build all button 5 Results from the build are displayed in the build window in the same way as the normal build process Build Multiple x jhewtest Debug jhewtest1 Release hewtest2 Debug hewtest2 Release Jhewtest3 Debug hewtest3 Release hewtest4 Debug hewtest4 Release hewtest5 Debug hewtest5 Felease Cancel Figure 2 18 Build Multiple Dialog 27 RENESAS 2 6 5 The Output Window When a tool executes i e compiler assembler linker etc its output is displayed in the Output window If any of the tools produce any errors or warnings then they are displayed along with the source file name and the line number at which the
32. Version control directory mappings list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed 3 Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click OK to confirm the edits gt To remove an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be removed from the Version control directory mappings list and then click the Remove button Once the mappings have been defined you can use the Version control directory placeholder VCDIR to represent the directory in which the project file is stored Consider the scenario shown in figure 8 9 Here are three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive X to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL C Mapped To NETWORK X m XAvc sw app projecti m XAvo sw app sro m X ve sw shared C work application project1 C work application sre C work shared Figure 8 9 Example Mappings Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET VCDIR FILENAME When the HEW executes
33. ifdef __ cplusplus extern C endif void abort void ifdef _ cplusplus endif include sort h of ldo santd ih ha gt tutorial cpp Find in Files A Version Control Read write 1 69 Figure 2 17 HEW Window 193 RENESAS 2 8 Communication Problems The following message box will be displayed when the emulator power is turned off or the PC interface cable is not correctly connected xxxxx 6000 Emulator 5 x 4 verification error has occurred during the transfer of a firmware file This is probably because the emulator has been turned off or another emulator has been connected Figure 2 18 Error Message For information on other errors refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator Refer to section 4 Preparation before Use 2 10 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software For details on uninstallation refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator 194 RENESAS Section 3 E6000 Emulator Functions 3 1 Debugging Features 3 1 1 Breakpoints The emulator provides a comprehensive range of alternative types of breakpoints to give you the maximum flexibility in debugging applications and user system Hardware Break Conditions Up to 12 break conditions can be defined using the event and range channels in the complex event system CES For more information about the hardware break conditions see section 3 2
34. 103 RENESAS If any of the components have problems these can be seen in the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then the icon in figure 5 12 is used to show this If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure 5 13 is used to show this Registered components Component E a Toalchains oo ee TAR TINY SERIES H8 300HN vee W SuperH RISC engine Standard Toz eacce k Cc marh RIGT annna Chandar T Han Figure 5 12 Incompatible component found icon ven H8S H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform 3 0 vee i HMon Embedded Monitor Platform 1 0 feo Intel Hex Record Obiect Reader 1 0 Figure 5 13 Component not found icon Note Tf the tool has one of these errors then it is possible to get more information by the following method gt To get tool error feedback 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Select the tool in the list that has an issue 3 Click Properties 4 Select the information tab and scroll the edit field to the bottom 5 The reason for the problem will be displayed in this area 104 RENESAS 5 8 On Demand components The HEW version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These
35. 8 us or 16 us At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16us the maximum time is about 200 days 3 1 4 Performance Analysis The emulator provides functions for measuring the performance of a program The performance of the specified program range can be displayed either as a histogram or in percentage form A timer resolution of 20 ns 40 ns or 160 ns can be selected In addition the execution count of the specified program range can be measured 1 to 65535 195 RENESAS 3 1 5 Bus Monitoring The emulator incorporates a bus monitoring function that monitors and displays the contents of the accessed area in HEW windows without stopping the program execution Up to eight blocks of 256 bytes can be monitored In addition the emulator can output trigger signals from external probe 2 EXT2 when specified addresses four points max are accessed Note that however some products do not support the bus monitoring function 3 2 Complex Event System CES In most practical debugging applications the program or hardware errors that you are trying to debug occur under a certain restricted set of circumstances For example a hardware error may only occur after a specific area of memory has been accessed Tracking down such problems using simple PC breakpoints can be very time consuming The emulator provides a very sophisticated system for giving a precise description of the conditions you want to examine ca
36. Double click on the control bar of a docked toolbar or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows toolbar 1 2 4 The Workspace Window The Workspace window has three panes The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files figure 1 14 You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its corresponding icon Workspace OF x E Demo B E Demo 3 6 Assembly source file E lowlvl ste C source file dbsct c Demo c E intprg c L lowsre c resetprg c z vecttbl c Dependencies Navigation Tab Templates Tab Project Tab Figure 1 14 Workspace Window Projects Tab RENESAS The Navigation tab provides jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed Figure 1 15 shows ANSI C functions See chapter 2 Build Basics for more information on the Workspace window The Templates tab displays template settings See 4 12 Templates for more information about a template Workspace ioj x i Demo amp sbrk amp _CLOSEALL _INIT_IOLIB change amp close amp Dummy INT_Illegal_code amp lseek amp main Manual_Reset_PC xi
37. Enpty Enpty Enpty Enpty Empty h Event A Trigger Figure 5 60 Event Window Event Sheet Select Add or the event point displayed in this window and then select Edit from the popup menu to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box The conditions for the event point are set on the General Bus Area Signals and Action pages The search condition for the event point is set by multiple conditions set on these pages Notes 1 Channel 8 has the trigger output function When the condition on channel 8 is satisfied the low level signal will be output from the external probe EXT1 for a bus cycle 2 When the event point is used as the condition for acquiring the trace information select Trace Acquisition from the popup menu For the trace function refer to section 5 16 Viewing Trace Information 3 Ifa condition that is unavailable for a range channel is set in editing of the range channels Ch9 to Ch12 the selected channel is automatically replaced by an unused event channel Ch1 to Ch8 Table 5 3 Conditions Unavailable for a Range Channel Condition Related Options Selecting outside the Outside Range on the General page specified address range Selecting the start or Start Timer and Stop Timer on the Action page end of the execution time measurement Specifying the count Required number of event occurrences on the Action page when an event occurs twice or m
38. J Use static sub command files IV Scan dependencies whilst building make file Figure 3 23 Generate Makefile Dialog 63 RENESAS The HEW will create a subdirectory make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it It is named after the selection with a mak extension for example the current project and configuration e g project_debug mak The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by the HEW It is not intended to execute makefiles which have been user modified For further details on HMAKE refer to Appendix F HMAKE User Guide gt To execute a makefile 1 Open a command window and change to the make directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options which include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 64 RENESAS 3 11 Using a makefile inside the HEW system The HEW also allows you to configure the internal build to use a particular make file rather
39. Measurement Start Range To End o o o o Range Measurement Access Count Of o _ o o o Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of oO o o _ o a Specified Range Measurement Note O Available Not available Note Only one point is used in Time Of Specified Range Measurement and Start Point To End Point Measurement while two sequential points are used in Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement and Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement The conditions that have been set will be canceled when switching these modes of different types 337 RENESAS 5 20 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window Choose View gt Performance gt Performance Analysis or click the PA toolbar button to open the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box Performance An Performance Analysis E6000 Performance Analysis Figure 5 105 Select Performance Analysis Type Window Select E6000 Performance Analysis and then click the OK button to open the Performance Analysis window Performance Anal oj x No Name Condition Rate RUN TIME MAX MIN TIME Count l PAL Range H 00001038 H 00001108 9 OOh OOmin 00s 055ms 764us 160ns 1234 2 P 2 PtoP H 00002068 H 000020D4 25 00h OOmin 00s 147ms 682us 880ns OOh OOmin 1234 3 PAS RtoR H 00001038 H 00001108 65 O0h OOmin 00s 38lms 560us 480ns 2468 H 00002068 H 00002138
40. Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp Source Label Timestamp Difference 00004 00105c EXTS L ER4 17 4 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1l 11111111 ali 00003 00105c EXTS L ER4 17f4 RD ROM PROG 1 illl 1 11111111 ali 00002 00105c EXTS L ER4 17 4 RD ROM PROG a TIU 1 11111111 ali 2 00001 00105c EXTS L ER4 17 4 RD ROM PROG l 1111 1l 11111111 ali j 00000 00105c EXTS L ER4 17f4 RD ROM PROG 1 illl 1 11111111 ali j Figure 6 48 Trace Window Displaying the Result If you have trouble viewing a column drag the header vertical bars below the title bar to adjust the width of the column 10 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Click the right hand mouse button on the Event window to display a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all of the event points that have been set Click the right hand mouse button on the Trace window to display a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 379 RENESAS 6 16 2 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is Available The following procedure is for obtaining and displaying with time stamps trace information on cycles of writing to memory locations in the specified address range 1 Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Acquisition from this menu to display the Trace Acquisition dialog box see figure 6 41 Trace Acquisition dialog b
41. Status Bar 1 3 The Help System The help menu is the rightmost menu on the HEW menu bar It contains the menu option Contents which when selected takes you to the main HEW help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click on the context sensitive help button which is located in the top right hand corner of each dialog box as shown in figure 1 21 Context sensitive help a Cancel button Figure 1 21 Help Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog box that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control that you require help for and then press the F1 key RENESAS 1 4 Launching the HEW To run the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the HEW By default the Welcome dialog box shown in figure 1 22 will be displayed Welcome 21x ae J e ES Cancel Qpen a recent project workspace Administration oh C Hew demo demo hws C Browse to another project workspace Figure 1 22 Welcome Dialog To create a new workspace select Create a new project workspace and click OK To open one of recent project workspaces select Open a recent project workspace select a workspace from the dr
42. Then click submit This will send the report by the selected method 167 RENESAS Submit a Bug Report You may submit a Bug Report through e mail or by conventional means The box below contains information gathered from your machine and any additional information about the state of the software if a crash occurred RAM Information Load 26 Total RAM 536 379 392 bytes Free RAM 391 581 696 bytes Page File 1 309 028 352 bytes Page File Free 1 204 985 856 bytes Total Virtual 2 147 352 576 bytes Virtual Free 250 084 864 bytes No project information available Please type a description of the problem you wish to report Print ha How would you like to submit the report 168 Figure 12 1 Submit bug report dialog RENESAS 13 Navigation facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop has a number of integrated navigation facilities The navigation window is located alongside the project and templates window This view is shown below in Figure 13 1 TT lhl LF amp j SF_Init amp INT_OFFSET amp MAMMAL amp ANIMAL Many Cs Classes demo 8 CShark CShark CShark GetClassN ame void s m_nFins E m_nSharpTeeth P E a CCrocodile amp CCrocodile amp CCrocodile GetClassN ame void e m_nLivein Water E m_nSharpTeeth 8 CFish amp CFish amp CFish GetClassN ame void E m_nLivein ater
43. This version of HEW also supports the integration of the generated makefile and tools into the HEW framework This allows you to click build menu or toolbar button and then launch the makefile rather than the normal internal HEW build process For further information refer to the Using a makefile inside the HEW system section later in this chapter gt To generate a makefile 1 Ensure that the project which you want to generate a makefile for is the current project 2 Ensure that the build configuration that you want to build the project with is the current configuration 3 Select Build gt Generate Makefile 4 Select the radio button which is relevant for your makefile See figure 3 23 5 Ensure you have selected the correct makefile format HEW is capable of generating GNUMake HMake and NMake compatible files 6 The use static sub command files check box will generate separate command files in the make destination directory This is different to the normal style where the sub command files are generated by the make tool In the case of the GNUMake file format this must be switched on 7 Checking Scan dependencies whilst building makefile will force a dependency scan to ensure the makefile creation is up to date 8 Click OK Cancel all configurations in the currently active project all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace Makefile format HMake
44. User system interface cable Figure 2 5 Plugging User System Interface Cable Body to Emulator 2 3 3 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Cable Head Plug the cable body into the cable head on the user system 185 RENESAS 2 4 Power Supply 2 4 1 AC Adapter The AC adapter supplied with the emulator must be used at all times 2 4 2 Polarity Figure 2 6 shows the polarity of the power supply plug 5 V outside GND inside Figure 2 6 Polarity of Power Supply Plug 2 4 3 Power Supply Monitor Circuit The emulator incorporates a power supply monitor circuit which only lights the red LED when a voltage higher than 4 75 V is supplied If this LED is not illuminated you should check the emulator voltage level An input voltage less than 4 75 V could indicate that enough current cannot be supplied to the emulator Note Use the provided AC adapter for the emulator 2 5 SIMM Memory Module E6000 emulator s optional SIMM memory modules are available which provide emulation memory for user code without needing a user system The optional SIMM memory modules are available in different memory size but all are partitioned into four equal banks These banks can be relocated on page boundaries anywhere in the user area Note that however some products do not support the SIMM memory module 2 5 1 Optional SIMM Memory Module Configuration The configuration of the optional SIMM memory module is controlled by
45. Y Y coordinate of the cursor Buffer Size Displays the buffer size in decimal notation Width Width of the buffer Height Height of the buffer Image Size Displays the width and height of the display in decimal notation Width Width of the display Height Height of the display 332 RENESAS 5 19 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms Memory contents can be displayed as waveforms in the Waveform View window 5 19 1 Opening the Waveform View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Waveform toolbar button amp to open the Waveform Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 102 Waveform Properties 2 x Data Address H o0000000 v Data Size abit 7 Cancel Channel Mono C Stereo Buffer Size H o0000000 v Figure 5 102 Waveform Properties Dialog Box Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Specifies the start address of data in memory displayed in hexadecimal Data Size Selects 8Bit or 16Bit Channel Selects Mono or Stereo Buffer Size Specifies the buffer size of data displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform View window Even after the Waveform View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup men
46. gt Find press CTRL F select Find from the editor window s local menu or click the find toolbar button 4 The Find dialog box will be displayed figure 4 2 Find Ix Find what sting 7 Find Next I Match whole word only m Direction Cancel I Match case C Up Down I Regular expression Figure 4 2 Find Dialog 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 6 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 7 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to Appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 8 The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from
47. has been checked Note Available area conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 319 RENESAS 6 Status page Select the status of a bus The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter General Address Data RAw Area Status Probes S mazo O REFRESH DMAC DTC OTHER Figure 5 90 Trace Filter Dialog Box Status Page Don t care Detects no bus condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified bus condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available bus conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 320 RENESAS 7 Probes page Select the status of four probe signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter x General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes mgo cD r Setting Probe4 Don t care 7 Probe3 Dont care 7 Probe2 Dont care 7 Probel Dont care x Cancel Apply Figure 5 91 Trace Filter Dialog Box Probes Page Don t care Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified probe signal condition Probe4 to Probe1 Select probe conditions not av
48. lt 886 gt 2 2715 2888 Fax lt 886 gt 2 2713 2999 Renesas Technology Shanghai Co Ltd Unit2607 Ruijing Building No 205 Maoming Road S Shanghai 200020 China Tel lt 86 gt 21 6472 1001 Fax lt 86 gt 21 6415 2952 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte Ltd 1 Harbour Front Avenue 06 10 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel lt 65 gt 6213 0200 Fax lt 65 gt 6278 8001 Colophon 2 0 H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator User s Manual tENESAS Renesas Technology Corp 2 6 2 Ote machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan
49. menu to display the Trace window Generic Trace PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ 7 0 Timestamp Source Label Timestamp Difference i Figure 6 40 Trace Window When trace information is displayed in the Trace window clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information The following sections give an overview of the trace functions and methods for setting them 373 RENESAS 6 16 1 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is not Available The method used to specify an address as an event condition for the tracing of read write cycles and display the trace is described below 1 Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Acquisition from this menu to display the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Figure 6 41 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box 374 RENESAS 2 Register an address as an event condition for trace acquisition Click the Add button in the Trace Events group box on the General page to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties 2 x General Bus Area Signals Action m Type Address C PCBreak Don tCare Address Range ee b Address Lo C Evi H coo00000 Kecsesenveestte
50. processing of functions Start Range To End Range Measurement Measures the execution time from a specified range to another specified range Measurement of execution time spent from calling of any of sequential subroutines to calling of any of another sequential subroutines in a program that includes subroutines in sequence such as an assembly program Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range is accessed from another specified range Measurement of the number of times a global variable is accessed from a specific function Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range has called another specified range Measurement of the number of times a function is called from a specific function Use eight performance channels installed on the circuit for measurement of hardware performance in the emulator for setting of conditions for measurement Up to eight points can be set Note however that up to four points can be set in Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement or Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement because two sequential points are used for setting a condition in these modes 336 RENESAS Table 5 8 Mode Settings for Measurement Point Page Time Of Specified Range o o o 0 oO 0 oO 0 Measurement Start Point To End Point o o o o oO oO 0 oO
51. toolbar button to open the Status window and see the current status of the debugging platform Target Device Configuration 00000000 OOOLFFFF Internal ROM OOFFBOOO OOFFEFBF Internal RAM OOFFFS800 OOFFFF3F Internal IO OOFFFF60 OOFFFFBF Internal IO OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF Internal RAM System Memory Resources SIMM Module 1MB SIMM fitted Ram Bases 0 not used l not used Z2 not used 3 not used Program Name Memory Loaded Area ator_cp Tutorial abs H oooo0000 H o0000003 H 00000400 H o0000425 H o00001000 H OOOO1SFS H 00002000 H 00002139 Figure 5 30 Status Window The Status window has three sheets e Memory sheet Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file e Platform sheet Contains information about the current status of the debugging platform typically including CPU type and mode and run status e Events sheet Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 248 RENESAS 5 8 Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly Use the Extended Monitor window to know the changing information on the emulator no matter the
52. 1 Variable declarations 432 F 3 Description blocks 433 F 3 1 Basic outline 433 F 3 2 Special commands F 3 3 Sub command files F 4 Comments 435 Fao Messaze commands rnin ea E EEA SA AV ES 435 Appendix G MENUSiisesccsseiicesesassesasettbadssesdsedesattiedasesdsadsseddbadesaddsedaseddbadsseddsedesads 437 Appendix H Command Lines seesserereseseereresesersesesesessersseserseresesessssssesersesesese 441 Appendix I Diagnostic Test Procedure cccccccceeseeeseesseeesseseesseessseeeeeeees 445 I 1 System Set Up for Test Program Execution cece cece eeeseesecescseeecssseseesseeeeneeas 445 I 2 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using Test Prograim cccceceeeseescseceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 446 xii RENESAS HEW Part RENESAS RENESAS 1 Overview The functions for HEW version V 3 01 04 are explained in this manual This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop It is intended to give users who are new to Windows applications filling in the details that are required by later chapters 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project cont
53. 1 mi i nunu set_ 05544 000408 JSR _INI Se00 RD ROM PROG 1 iio o aii Ea 05543 00040a 1l0e RD ROM PROG 1 iuro i ii 05542 00110e MOV W R2 Q ER7 6df2 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 11111111 MI 05541 ffefbc 0000 WR R DATA L llll 1 11111111 05540 ffefbe 040c WR R DATA 1 llll X 11111111 05539 001110 STM L ER4 E 0120 RD ROM PROG 1 ul aiii 05538 ffefba 5770 WR R DATA 1 uuo 1 nuun 05537 001112 6df4 RD ROM PROG 1 i e dann 05536 001114 MOV L H 000 7a00 RD ROM PROG 1 uut 1i m m 05535 _ffefb6 5770 UR R DATA 1 dii i AMN gt Figure 5 68 Trace Window This window displays the following trace information items PTR Cycle number in the trace buffer When the most recent record is record 0 earlier record numbers go backwards 1 2 If a delay count has been set the cycle number where the trace stop condition has been satisfied is record 0 For the cycle during delay executed until the trace has stopped earlier record numbers go forward 1 2 the most recent record Address Address 6 digit hexadecimal Instruction Disassembled code of the executed instruction Data Data bus value displayed as 2 digit or 4 digit hexadecimal R W Whether access was read RD or write WR Area Memory area being accessed ROM RAM 8 or 16 bit I O 8 or 16 bit EXT external or DTC RAM not available when a time stamp is acquired 293 RENESAS Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0
54. 105C address count D 10 P 3 E H 10F6 address count D 2 I 4 E H 10FC address F undefined or unavailable undefined or ur J undefined or ur Figure 5 65 Event Sequencing Dialog Box Event Selects an event point to be set Is Armed By Arms the selected event Is Reset By Resets the selected event No occurrence of Arms an event when the set of events being selected does not occur only available when Is Armed By has been selected The test of conditions on event points is started with the execution of the user program The conditions on event points have not been satisfied immediately after the execution of the user program is started Satisfaction of the condition on an event point allows a transition of the state to that where the condition is satisfied 289 RENESAS The state where the condition is satisfied is retained until the user program is stopped or the event point is reset When the condition on the event point is satisfied no action will be taken even if the condition is satisfied again If you want the action to be taken again reset the event point so that the state transits to that where no condition is satisfied When the user program is stopped the states of all the event points transit to that where no condition is satisfied When an event point must be in the state where its condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of is selected as the satisfaction condition of anothe
55. 11 2 Ensure the compare with file on drive radio button is enabled 3 Enter the first and second file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 4 Clicking the advanced button displays the dialog in figure 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 5 Click compare The difference view is displayed The two files being compared are loaded into each side of the split view Their names are at the top of each window gt To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in SourceSafe 1 Ensure the SourceSafe component is enabled Also note that the file must be have been added into the version control system 2 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 11 2 3 Ensure the compare with version control radio button is enabled 163 RENESAS 4 Enter the first file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 5 Clicking the advanced button displays the dialog in figure 11 3 This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 6 Click Compare 7 The difference view is displayed as shown in figure 11 1 Compare files E x Reference
56. 170 x 54 mm Mass Approximately 1 000 g RENESAS 181 182 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Emulator Preparation Unpack the emulator and prepare it for use as follows 4 WARNING READ the reference sections shaded in figure 2 1 before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Component list Unpack the emulator Check the components against the component list Setup Section 3 Set up the emulator Insert the optional board Install the HEW Connect the interface cable Section 4 Turn on the user system Only when the user system is connected Turn on the emulator Start the HEW Activation Figure 2 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart 2 2 Installing Emulator s Software To install the HEW refer to the Setup Guide for the E6000 Emulator supplied together with the emulator RENESAS 183 2 3 Connecting to the User System To connect the emulator to a user system proceed as follows e Connect the user system interface cable head to the user system e Plug the cable body into the emulator e Plug the cable body into the cable head For details of these steps refer to the User System Interface Cable User s Manual Figure 2 2 gives details of the connectors provided on the emulator lt PC interface cable connector User syste
57. Address Hi r Data Compare Direction Tl Compare F Use Mask C Read Value g pu White Cc Byte Sj Word Either Mask H O Figure 6 42 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box 3 Use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box of the Address group box on the General page of the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box In this example enter H 0000105c This address has thus been set Click the OK button to close the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action Type Address C PCBreak DontCare Address Range Address Lo Event JH 00001 05C r Data Compare Direction I Compare F Use Mask C Read C Write Bute Word Mask H O Figure 6 43 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box after Setting an Event 375 RENESAS 4 The event that has been set is now displayed in the Event combo box of the Trace Events group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Add est Figure 6 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Adding an Event 376 RENESAS 5 To enable the event condition that has been set uncheck the Free Trace check box on the General page This will add pages 1 to 4 t
58. All project settings can only be viewed not modified e Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above gt To add a new user to the system 1 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above 2 Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed 3 Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 4 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed 5 Click the add button The log in dialog is displayed This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK 6 Once OK is clicked the user is added with read only rights To change the access level select the user you wish to modify and then click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes gt To remove an existing user to the system 1 Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Se
59. BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency The dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or longword default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if
60. Clicking the OK button will replace the memory content with the new instruction and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing the Esc key will close the dialog box without modifying the memory contents Note The assembly language code being displayed is the current memory content If the memory contents are changed the Assembler dialog box and the Disassembly window will show the new assembly language code but the source file displayed in the Editor window will be unchanged This is the same even if the source file contains an assembler 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address When you are viewing your program in the Disassembly window you may wish to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select Set Address from the popup menu and the dialog box shown in figure 5 10 is displayed Set Address e main Cancel Figure 5 10 Set Address Dialog Box Enter the address in the Address edit box and either click on the OK button or press the Enter key A label name can also be specified as the address The Disassembly window will be updated to show the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 2 6 Viewing the Current P
61. Complex Event System CES Program Breakpoints PC Breakpoints Up to 256 program breakpoints can be defined These program breakpoints are set by replacing the user instruction by a BREAK instruction In target ROM only one breakpoint on chip break can be set 3 1 2 Trace The emulator incorporates a powerful realtime trace facility which allows you to examine MCU activity in detail The realtime trace buffer holds up to 32768 bus cycles and it is continuously updated during execution The buffer is configured as a rolling buffer which can be stopped during execution and read back by the host computer without halting emulation The data stored in the trace buffer is displayed in both source program and assembly languages for ease of debugging However if trace filtering is used only assembly language can be displayed The buffer can be set up to store all bus cycles or just selected cycles This is called trace acquisition and uses the complex event system CES to select the parts of the program you are interested in It is also possible to store all bus cycles and then just look at selected cycles This is called trace filtering 3 1 3 Execution Time Measurements The emulator allows you to measure the total execution time or to measure the time of execution between specified events in the complex event system You can set the resolution of the timer to any of the following values 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us
62. Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list and the Reset button in figure 6 1 changes to the Delete button Then click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips check box as desired To modify the toolbar name of a toolbar created by a user 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 In the Toolbars list select a toolbar which has been created by a user and whose name you want to modify 3 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar name filed 115 RENESAS 6 2 Customizing the Tools Menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options gt To add a new menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 The first thing for you to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool Application wide tools which will be available to all of your workspaces Or whether
63. Dialog When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name which has one of the above extensions To disable enable syntax coloring 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable syntax coloring check box as necessary and then click OK 88 RENESAS 4 12 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually 4 12 1 Defining a Template gt To define a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu or click on the define template toolbar button ole The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed Define Templates User Input Shortcuts z Figure 4 14 Define Template Dialog 2 Click Add A dialog i
64. Enable is selected only the cycles that include function calls are extracted for display from the acquired trace information The content of the trace buffer is not changed by extraction of function calls Using this function for the result of the free trace or the trace information that includes function calls allows the user to know the order of function calls 326 RENESAS 5 17 Viewing the Function Call History The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 5 17 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button 3 fl Stack Trace Kind Name Value F func3 short Ox00000094 P param 3 Ox00003ffa 0x00003fd8 short L local_3 D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long F fune2 short 0x00000072 P param Z 0x00003 ffa Ox00003fe4 short L local_2 D 2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long F funci short 0x0000003e P param 1 Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0 short L local 1 Dti Ox00003fec unsigned long F main Ox00000012 L start D103 Ox00003ffa short Figure 5 97 Stack Trace Window The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol 5 17 2 Viewing the Source Program Select a function and choose Go t
65. Figure 5 106 Performance Analysis Window This window displays the rate of execution time in the area selected by the user during the last program run in percentages histogram or numerical values It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Performance Analysis window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again 338 RENESAS 5 20 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement Conditions for measurement can be displayed and changed in the Performance Analysis window Select a point where a condition is to be set and then select Set from the popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Select either from the following five modes as the condition by the Measurement Method option Table 5 9 Conditions for Measurement Measurement Method Measurement Method Option Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Point To End Point Measurement Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Set a condition for measurement according to the mode being selected The parameters to be set depend on the modes The Performance Analysis window has a support function to enter the address range of a function automatically if the na
66. Global column state Dialog 4 14 Enable tooltip watch Select Tools gt Options and then select the Editor tab figure 4 7 By checking Enable tooltip watch you can use the Tooltip Watch feature the quickest way to look at a variable in the source program To view a tooltip watch on the Editor window 1 Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the Editor window figure 4 18 2 Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine a tooltip will appear near the variable showing a value of that variable 0x00002054 0x0000205a 0x00002066 0x0000206e sort a print Sorting re for i O i lt 10 i j printf a da 1ld mip a l mrad0x05000000 a min 0 max 0 change a min a 9 max a O X gt Figure 4 18 Viewing a tooltip watch 0x00002090 0x00002092 0x00002094 0x00002096 0x00002098 0x0000209e 0x000020a0 94 RENESAS 5 Tools Administration You control the components which can be used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 which is invoked via Tools gt Administration Modification of the Tools Administration dialog box is only possible when no workspace is open while only reference is possible when a workspace is open Tools Administration 21x Registered components r tL
67. In this window the following items are shown on the left as information on lines e First column Source address column Displays the address information for the source line e Second column Event column Event information break e Third column EXT 2 Trigger column EXT 2 Trigger information e Fourth column Editor column PC bookmark and breakpoint information The Editor window is displayed in the right part of the Source window 226 RENESAS Source address column When a program is downloaded an address for the current source file is displayed on the Source address column These addresses are helpful when setting the PC value or a breakpoint Event column The Event column displays the following items Address condition break by an event or a range channel Starts time measurement by an event channel Ends time measurement by an event channel I Starts a point to point range trace SS Ends a point to point range trace Halts trace These are also set by using the popup menu EXT 2 Trigger column The EXT 2 Trigger column displays the following items ha EXT 2 1 trigger condition im EXT 2 2 trigger condition ta EXT 2 3 trigger condition hs EXT 2 4 trigger condition H Two or more EXT 2 trigger conditions It is also possible to set them by using the popup menu Editor column Editor column displays the following items E A bookmark is set A PC Break is set 5 gt PC location 227 RENESAS
68. Internal 10 OOFFFF60 OOFFFFBF Internal 10 OOFFFFCO OOFFFFFF Internal RAM Figure 5 4 Memory Mapping Dialog Box This dialog box displays the current memory map The E6000 H8S or H8 300 series supports four blocks of user memory These can be 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte each depending on the SIMM fitted Each block can be placed in the address space on a 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte boundary The memory mapping has a granularity of H 40 D 64 byte Each 64 byte block can be set to the internal emulation or external memory and can be guarded access prohibited write protected or read write The H8 300 series E6000 generally incorporates an emulation memory In the memory map the memory can be set as an internal emulation or external guarded access prohibited write protected or read write in a byte unit Add Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Modify Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Reset Resets the map memory to its default settings Close Closes the dialog box The memory configuration of the device being emulated is displayed by the Memory sheet in the Status window Note Some emulators may not support the emulation memory or the memory mapping function For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific t
69. Monitor Function Selecting View gt CPU gt Extended Monitor or clicking the Extended Monitor toolbar button displays the Extended Monitor window This emulator displays the following items Table 8 6 Extended Monitor Window Items Item Column Value Column User Standby Displays the status of the standby pin User NMI Displays the status of the NMI pin User Reset Displays the status of the reset pin User System Voltage Displays whether or not the user VCC PVCC when the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 debugging platform is selected is equal to or exceeds the value set in User VCC Threshold on the General page of the Configuration Properties dialog box User Cable Displays whether or not the user cable is connected Running status Displays the address bus value in the MCU and the status of the CPU while the user program is running and the cause of a break while the user program is halted Break lt Cause of break gt Displays the cause of a break Address lt Address bus value gt Displays the address bus value during the user program execution Status lt Status of the CPU gt Displays the status of the CPU PREFETCH CPU instruction prefetch cycles DATA CPU data access cycles DMAC Operation of DMAC DTC Operation of DTC SLEEP Sleep mode STANDBY Standby mode REFRESH Refresh cycles ROM Write Displays whether or not the ROM has been written to during the user
70. OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR THE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT tENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Renesas shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Renesas prior written consent or any problems caused by the user system All Rights Reserved This user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Renesas No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means available without Renesas prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Renesas semiconductor products Renesas assumes no responsibility for any
71. SS Set As Cancel whole Register 7 Figure 6 6 Register Dialog Box PC 352 RENESAS 6 6 Executing the Program Execute the program as described in the following e To execute the program select Go from the Debug menu or click the Go button on the toolbar ee Figure 6 7 Go Button While the program is executing the current address bus value and the operating state of the MCU are displayed on the status bar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been inserted and an arrow will appear on the Editor column in the Source window to show the position that the program has halted with the message Break PC Break in the status bar Note When the source file is displayed after a break a path of the source file may be inquired The location of the source file is as follows HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2633 Tutorial source The file path differs according to products If necessary replace 2633 with another name 0x00001038 void tutorial void Ox00001044 long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_sam 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i J 0x00001050 j rand 0x00001058 34 lt O94 0x00001054 j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a Ox0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 Pp_sam
72. Save File Saves the active source file Gil Save All Files Saves all of the files in the editor amp Print File To print the contents of the current window click this button amp Cut Clicking this button will remove the current text selection and place a copy of it onto the Windows clipboard it can be pasted back to a file with a paste operation Copy This button allows you to copy the current text selection into the Windows clipboard Paste The paste button copies the contents of the clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Match Braces The match braces button highlights text between braces of type and This is particularly useful when attempting to find out the structure of C C code blocks which are opened with and closed with To use it select the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it and then click this button For further information on brace matching refer to the Brace Matching section later in this chapter Al Insert Template To insert a pre defined template at the current cursor position click this toolbar button The Insert Template dialog box will be invoked Select a template name and then click OK For further information on templates refer to the Templates section later in this chapter mm Toggle Bookmark The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides standard bookmark capabilities To set a bo
73. Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to save 3 Click the Save as button to display the Save Session dialog box figure 4 19 4 5 If you want to export the session file to another location leave the Maintain link check box unchecked Specify the location to save the new file If you would like the HEW to use this location instead of the current session location check the Maintain link check box Click the OK button 2x a Sessionxxxx_E6000_Emulator_CP hsf Debug_yyyy_E6000_Emulator_cP L Debug_soo _E6000_Emulator_CP _ Release fa DefaultSession hsf Sessionyyyy _E6000_Emulator_CP hsf Save as type Sessions hsf x Cancel Maintain link W 4 4 3 Figure 4 19 Save Session Dialog Box Saving Session Information e To save a session Select File gt Save Session 215 RENESAS 4 5 Connecting the Emulator Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator a Connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation Select Debug Settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box It is possible to register the download module or the command chain that is automatically executed at activation For details on the Debug Settings dialog box refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation When the dia
74. Select Time Of Specified Range Measurement from the Measurement Method PA1 combo box 5 The parameter settings are as follows e Enter sort in the Range Name edit box Click the button to the right of the Start Address edit box to display the Input Function Range dialog box Enter the function name Sample sort long in the Function edit box of this dialog box and then click the OK button The corresponding addresses for the function Sample sort long will now be set in the Start Address and End Address edit boxes Input Function Range Function Sample sort lone Cancel Figure 6 65 Input Function Range Dialog Box Note The addresses figured out in the Input Function Range dialog box are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be different Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered 390 RENESAS 6 Click the Settings button in the Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 group box to display the Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 dialog box Select PC from the Address Control Mode combo box and then click the OK button PC is
75. Setting Completed 393 RENESAS 3 Click the OK button to open the Monitor window monitor monitor H OOFFE Address OxOOFFEFSO OxOOFFEFSO OxOOFFEFAO OxOOFFEFBO OxOOFFEFCO Figure 6 71 Monitor Window 4 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu When the content of the address range changes with execution the updated values are red i e the color that was selected in the Foreground and Background combo boxes Values will be displayed in black if they have not been updated or a certain period of time has elapsed since the last update monitor monitor1 H OOFFEFSO Address OxOOFFEFS8O 00 OO 02 8B 00 OO 18 OS 00 00 2D 69 00 00 36 73 OxOOFFEF90 00 OO 3A ES 00 OO 3B D3 00 OO 41 FC OO OO SB B9 OxOOFFEFAO 00 OO 64 02 00 00 6F 44h 00 O2 12 24 00 OO AA AA OxOOFFEFBO 57 70 00 OO OO O1 80 74 00 OO 10 36 OO OO 04 IE OxOOFFEFCO 6A 18 6A 18 6A 18 GA 18 GA 18 6A 18 6A 18 6A 18 Figure 6 72 Monitor Window during Execution 5 After you have finished checking the states in the Monitor window select Halt Program from the Debug menu to halt the program s execution 6 20 What Next This tutorial has described the major features of the emulator and the use of the HEW Sophisticated debugging can be carried out by using the emulation functions that the emulator offers This provides for effective investigation of hardware and software problems by accurately isolating and identi
76. Status Column Displays emulator name driver used CPU Displays the target MCU name Mode Displays the selected mode Clock source Displays the selected clock Run status Displays the execution status Break The user program breaks Running The user program is running Cause of last break Displays the cause of the emulator stopped at a break Ready User program not executed immediately after starting the HEW User Break Break by the user PC Break Break by program breakpoint On Chip Break A Break by hardware PC Break Complex Event System Break by complex event system Stepping Completed Break by stepping completed Stepping Aborted Break by stepping aborted ROM Write Access Break Break by writing to ROM Write protect Access Break Break by writing to a read only memory Unused Area Access Break Break by accessing to a guarded memory Performance Break Break by Performance Analysis Invalid breakpoint Break by a break instruction without PC Break Event Time Count Displays the measured result of the timer between events Run Time Count Displays the total execution time of the program 3 Events Sheet Selecting the Events tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 5 Events Sheet Item Item Column Resources Status Column Displays the resource information and the information on events such as the breakpoint 407 RENESAS 8 1 7 Extended
77. T Generate log for projects Figure 6 16 Tools customize log tab 6 9 Using the virtual desktop HEW has implemented the concept of the virtual desktop This allows window configurations to be defined that can be switched with the click of a button When a particular button is clicked the windows are hidden or displayed depending on the current settings of that window configuration It is possible to have a maximum of 4 desktop configurations in use When the session is saved the window positions for each configuration are saved to the session file You can then switch simply between each configuration to gain access to the other windows The toolbars and windows are dependent on the virtual desktop configuration Source files are independent of the virtual desktop system and will remain in view 127 RENESAS To rename your configuration to a more meaningful name Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu Select the Desktop Manager dialog Select the window configuration you wish to change the name for Click the rename button Enter the new meaningful name in the edit field and click OK Click OK to keep the changes and revert to the HEW main window Oy Be oe E gt To switch desktop configurations There are a number of ways to switch desktop configuration The first and easiest method is using the virtual desktop buttons located on the status bar These are shown in figure 6 17 0x00
78. Voltage Pollowert Circuit sci isctscssssesstscestocevecssonesecadecossencetesootensssaseeseonesdeneonssiones 189 Do fe Sy Stern CHECK 55 ek ces css aes san yccesebesvass N E A E E E O E E E E 190 2 8 Communication Problems seserinis riese irori rissani iesenii 194 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator s sssseessessesesestsrsrseeessrsrsrsssrsesesesesesrsrsesene 194 2 10 Uninstalling the Emulator s Software cee eceecseeseeesseeeseesseeessetsesesaeteseeeaeeess 194 Section 3 E6000 Emulator Functions eee eeeeseesesseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeneeeaeeens 195 Bile WDEDUS PING FEATS aoc ccss cs cscsxeasvusstesVacsiessvuechossvassrccsvasssutsvosuncdosesdsaveesibesnpseviesstedecsstesceed 195 IIL Break POMS 55 renni ronne aiea E EEEE Ooo a ENEAS EEES 195 E E E h i E E E E seeds 195 3 1 3 Execution Time Measurement ssssccssssssscsscessscsssesssssssessessseeesessseseees 195 SLA Performance Analysis cs ccesssisescessscas ceaies sapastaascadeeccesgneesetostsaisupzeeececdsaccrayseaes 195 II BUS MONONEN EN TATE 196 3 2 Complex Event System CES csssssccssescssesacsseesseossssovessceanvtenscbosessusconesseacsuessonsonendeastessdes 196 Al Even Channels ccsisicecistens sssssnnessenzccenteveccsssvearensvaswesessssecersesessecgesunsvaseseveacsssurbves 196 3 2 2 Ram ge Channels 2 ives ccsssess ccsssvzssestbeccndeessts iu reeni ata EE EEEN Caere i ESE 196 2 3 BVCAKS soveszccontenvcsossenccconsenscsousunductneunsteovadeduauavesdueisas
79. Windows explorer to modify the options for more than one selection On the right hand side are the 3 options tabs This is where you set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configuration information is being viewed from the configuration list on the upper left of the dialog box Each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select multiple configurations then a dialog is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 50 RENESAS 3 4 1 Options Tab The Options tab figure 3 11 allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command which was entered when you defined the phase figure 3 3d Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list box and then click the Insert button For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders Options l Output Files Dependent Files Command E Hew T oolchains Hitachi S H451 O4BINSLbr exe Options sub CONFIGDIR buildlib sub Placeholder er Insert button Configuration directory 7 Insert for placeholder
80. a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character An example is shown below 427 RENESAS Comment Module Module definition Register name Example H8S 2655 Series I O Register Definitions File Modules FileVersion 2 BaseAddress 0 Module1 Power_Down_Mode_Registers Module2 DMA_Channel_Common Module3 DMA_Channel_0 Module42 Bus_Controller Module43 System_Control Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common reg0 regDMAWER regi regDMATCR reg2 regDMACROA reg3 regDMACROB reg4 regDMACR1A reg5 regDMACR1B reg6 regDMABCRH reg7 regDMABCRL dep ici iia 70 Bit Value Register definition Register name regDMAWER id DMAWER Oxffff00 B A H dmawer_bitfields Address Size Absolute address flag Format Bit field dmawer_bitfields Bit field bit3 WE1B definition bit2 WE1A biti1 WE0B bit0 WE0A 428 RENESAS Appendix E Symbol File Format To
81. a time by using the Step Program dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing Debug gt Step The Step Program dialog box is displayed Step Program Steps JH 00000001 Delay 25 seconds x Cancel I Step over calls I Source level step Figure 5 45 Step Program Dialog Box Steps Number of steps to be executed Delay seconds Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped 0 to 3 seconds can be selected in 0 5 second units Step Over Calls Selecting this box steps over function calls Source Level Step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level Clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key starts step execution 264 RENESAS 5 12 Stopping Your Program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Stop button and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 5 12 1 Stopping the Program by the Stop Toolbar Button When your program is running the Stop toolbar button is enabled a red STOP sign and when the program has stopped it is disabled the STOP sign is grayed out Click on the Stop toolbar button or choose Debug gt Halt Program When the program has been stopped by Stop User Break is displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window 5 12 2
82. all Files 4 3 4 Opening a File 4 3 5 Closing Files 74 Editing a Bile isc ersada 75 Searching and Navigating through Files 76 4 5 1 Finding Text 76 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files 4 5 3 Replacing Text 78 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line 79 Bookmarks eects 80 Printing a File 80 Configuring Text Layout 81 438 1 Pape Setup EA A E E T cieobesnensepestosgesentenes pestecstbent 81 4 8 2 Changing Tabs vecccsscsesstssivseeseovesatiecdosseceercbelecsteesedondutcesovees eE ee Ees eiS En reeni 83 49 3 Auto Indentation x ccerssecccerssesccecsnensceenrentsceseonsdeonedtsseonearsncessasoscusnengeevaanesconnenis 84 Sphtins a Wido Weires iae a aE E EAEE ER EE 85 COMMUN NEMEC ysescccssssscxsavessexieney EE TEETE A E 86 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Fonts cccisssveceicssesssessessseastesisrccusassssencespesuscsegsossessecesvends 86 Syntax COLOTING Asierisesecvesslecseveezocssporesteatbeostenevtessehhs vesdeesehesbeesbevscieshteatdedtexssucdsnen tose 87 Templates ssar oA ETE EAE NE EEEE 89 RENESAS 4 13 4 14 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 8 2 8 3 4 12 1 Defining a Template 4 12 2 Deleting a Template s cciccccszoissssssescssezes vesarevevescexessssassvateneesesasssezeneotesssassveczeteiens 4 12 3 Inserting a Template ANQA Brace Matching cscssisscccscisacssssdieccoscisvcsesssasceisciescetesian ceversisc
83. an instruction address 10 BREAKPOINT_CLEAR BC Deletes breakpoints 11 BREAKPOINT_ BD Displays a list of breakpoints DISPLAY 12 BREAKPOINT_ENABLE BE Enables or disables a breakpoint 13 BREAKPOINT_ BS Sets sequential breakpoints SEQUENCE 14 BUILD BU Starts a build operation on the current project 15 BUILD_ALL BL Starts a build all operation on the current project 16 CHANGE_ cc Sets the current configuration CONFIGURATION 17 CHANGE_PROJECT CP Sets the current project 18 CHANGE_SESSION cs Changes the session of the current project 19 CLOCK CK Set the CPU clock rate in the emulator 20 CONFIGURE_ CPF Sets the debugging environment for the emulator PLATFORM 21 DEFAULT_OBJECT_ DO Sets the default object program format FORMAT 22 DEVICE_TYPE DE Selects a device type to emulate 23 DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles memory contents 24 ERASE ER Clears the Command Line window 25 EVALUATE EV Evaluates an expression 26 EXMONITOR_DISPLAY EXMD Displays the content of the expansion monitor 27 EXMONITOR_SET EXMS Selects whether or not to display the items in the expansion monitor 28 EXMONITOR_ EXMSR Sets the time to update the expansion monitor during SETRATE emulation or a break 29 FILE_LOAD FL Loads an object program file 30 FILE_SAVE FS Saves memory to a file 31 FILE_UNLOAD FU Unloads a file 32 FILE_VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory 441 RENESAS Table H 1 HEW Commands cont
84. appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Of those files which are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe some will be checked in and others will be checked out i e being edited by a user The status command displays the current status of a file or file s gt To view the status of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose status you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 Ifa file has a blue tick next to it a user different to you has checked it out 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project To view the history of a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose history you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Show History menu option 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting Tools gt Version Control gt Co
85. are listed below To emulate an MCU with a description in the Expansion Hardware column connect the correct expansion hardware Table 8 2 Environment for the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 Debugging Platform Device Option Mode Option Clock Option Expansion Hardware Custom The MCU previously selected H8S 2616 7 advanced mode single chip Main 10 MHz None H8S 2614 Target Main 20 MHz H8S 2612 Main Target H8S 261 1 Main Target 2 Notes 1 Target in Mode is only available when the target system is connected 2 Target and Target 2 in Clock are only available when the target system is connected 402 RENESAS 8 1 4 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Page Items that can be set in this dialog box are listed below 612 E6000 Configuration Properties General Custom Device ROM J Enable Flash memory RAM Pin 100PinB v r Modules V Enable DTC J Enable DA 4 D Converter J Enable D A Converter J Enable ICO reg C Sree J Enable Refresh Controller J Enable IC1 J Enable DMAG J Enable WDT1 SCI Select C S5CD 1 TMR2 JV Enable TPU3 5 JV Enable TMR2 3 eani J Enable PWM14 C scn 3 JV Enable MultiProcessorComunication SCII 4 C Scll 4 Figure 8 2 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Device Page 403 RENESAS Custom Device page ROM Specify the internal ROM area size None 64kB Sets the internal ROM ar
86. bit Other J Extemal bit I DTC RAM M Don t Care Figure 5 62 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Bus Area Page Bus State Sets the bus status as the condition When the Don t care check box is checked the event will be satisfied with any bus status Area Specifies the area for searching When the Don t care check box is checked the event will be satisfied in any area Note Items set for the bus state and memory access area vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 286 RENESAS 3 Signals page Use this page to set external signals Breakpoint Event Properties 21x General Bus Area Signals Action m Probe 4 m Probe 3 High High C Low C Low 2 Don t Care m Probe 2 m Probe 1 High High C Low C Low Don t Care Don t Care Figure 5 63 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Signals Page Probe4 Detects the status of the input probe signal 4 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected Probe3 Detects the status of the input probe signal 3 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal
87. button beside it Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable back to the list To remove an environment variable select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list and then click the Remove button beside it 144 RENESAS 8 3 3 Specifying Comments If a command contains the placeholder COMMENT then the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the dialog as shown in figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment 27 xi File c hew demo demo sbrk c Cancel Comment Lance T Apply comment to all files Figure 8 12 Please Enter Comment Dialog You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files check box before clicking OK 145 RENESAS 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password Most version control tools will require you to pass a user name and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users The custom version control support provides two placeholders User login name USERNAMEB and User login password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13
88. configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project gt To make projects depend upon another 1 Select Project gt Dependent Projects The Dependent Projects dialog will be displayed figure 2 25 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents to When you do this the Dependent projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent projects list has a check box for each project listed Set the associated check boxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click OK to confirm the new project dependencies Dependent Projects BEI main_project Cancel Dependent projects Mdepend01 C depend02 Figure 2 25 Dependent Projects dialog 35 RENESAS 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace gt To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu N Select the Remove Project option we Dialog box is displayed You confirm to remove the project In the Options dialog box of the Tools menu you can select this confirmation is performed or not Note You cannot remove the current project from the workspace 2 13 Loading unloading a Project into from
89. decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol_name_1l 11FCH Symbol_name_2 11FEH Symbol_name_3 1200H Symbol_name_4 END 429 RENESAS 430 RENESAS Appendix F HMAKE User Guide F 1 Command line The following section describes the command line that should be used to execute the hmake program on a file using none or more of the available options F 1 1 Basic structure The command line must be of the following syntax hmake lt make file you wish to execute gt lt parameter list gt If a file is specified without an extension then mak will be appended to it The parameter list may include none or more of the parameters listed in the following section The parameters list may appear before the make file name if you wish Each parameter must be separated by at least one white space character Parameters are not case sensitive If no parameters are given and no file is given then help information will be displayed F 1 2 Exit codes If there are any syntax errors in the make file being executed or if any process executed whilst running the make file returns an invalid error code
90. dialog select the component from the Registered components list and then click the Unregister button A dialog will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to confirm the action Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation from hard disk It simply removes the information which the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at anytime by registering the tool see above If you want to remove a component from the hard disk i e uninstall a component then refer to the section Uninstalling Components later in this chapter 98 RENESAS 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Registered components list and then click the Properties button The properties dialog will be displayed with the General tab selected figure 5 4 This tab displays the name version and location of the selected component None of the information on this tab is editable SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 8 0 1 0 Properties 2 x General Information Environment Name SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain Version 8 0 1 0 Location D Hew3 Tools Renesas Sh 8_0_1 Cancel Figure 5 4 Properties Dialog General Tab Select the Information tab to view any information about the component figure 5 5 This may include copyrig
91. displayed figure 4 4 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find what field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find what field 5 Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with into the Replace with field or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box 2x Find what fetr ing x Replace with fru meric x Replace I Match whole word only 5 Replace eH PAREA I Match case Selection J Regular expression Whole file Cancel C All open files Figure 4 4 Replace Dialog 6 If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match whole word only check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string 7 If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box 8 If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular expressions check box Refer to appendix B Regular Expressions for further information 9 If you clicked Find Next the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click Replace if you want to replace it Click Replace All to replace
92. ee ceceeceeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeaes 370 6 16 Trace PUNCH ONS 3 sc cceaiesvscschcasonsstens encdicssuucseestvacdiestvasdees EEEE e A E E E a 373 6 16 1 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is not Available 374 6 16 2 Displaying a Trace when Time Stamping is Available 0 eee 380 6163 Statistics ccccvescccesnasccesstcncsersnsnecaonsansscvnatcseounntedersnacevevsencstesdoasscoussasdeqsosadnceroseeses 383 6164 Funcion CaS rrenen A eSEE Ere E EAE EAEE EKSTE EAS VESTENS 387 617 Stack Trace FUNGUO ai i ES EErEE A AAAS Iais 388 6 18 Performance Measurement Function 0 cece eee eeeeecesceecsceecseeseeetseeeseeteseesseteeseeaeeees 389 6 18 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement 0 0 0 eee esse eee ceeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeee 389 6 19 Monitor RURCEH ON ceaiorie coavsves bosedvstoessteenessevesteniosestsesueestenvoucns iacddosseseusenedientebens 392 620 Wat NERC oersetter eterea EEEREN AE EERE Ea iiae ENA EEEN 394 Section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product 0 0 395 7 1 H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator Specifications 00 0 cece eee cee ceeeeseeeeeseeteesetseeeeseeaeees 395 7 1 1 Supported MCUs and User System Interface Cables 0 0 ieee eee 395 7 1 2 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications 00 0 0 ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 395 7 2 User System Interface c scssscosssnsscossnceserssecssevseacssovsearsres 396 7 2 1 Signal Protection 396 7 2 2 User System Interface Circuits 396 7 3 Differences betw
93. ersion Control Setup A 2 x Commands Projects General r Execution IV Prompt before executing command J Run in DOS Window IV Close DOS window on exit I Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter rm User details User JHARK Password pocorn m Configuration file Current version control configuration file C Hew Project Project hye OK Cancel Esport Import Figure 8 13 Version Control Setup Dialog General Tab 146 RENESAS In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed gt To login i e specify a user name and password 1 Click the Log in button The dialog shown in figure 8 14 will be displayed 2 Enter your user name into the User name field 3 Enter your password into the Password field 4 5 Click OK to set the new user name and password If there is any inconsistency between the two Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field versions of the password which you entered then you will be requested to type your password again Log in 2 x ee iil Cancel Password Confirm password by retyping it below _ Fig
94. figure 3 3c Select Groups Assembly source file Binary file C header file C list file C source file C header file C list file CPU information file Expanded assembly source file Figure 3 3c Modify multiple input file groups Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file groups name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog 42 RENESAS The third step figure 3 3d requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run from i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 Figure 3
95. file _ Compare KSH EW20 HEW 3 0 EXE Win Release Browse Cancel C Compare with file on drive aa 7 vanced Target file v Browse Figure 11 2 Difference compare files dialog Compare Files Advanced Options x m Advanced OK ok Mi Cancel Figure 11 3 Difference advanced options dialog The difference view functionality can be accessed in two different ways The difference view has its own toolbar this is shown in figure 11 4 This functionality can also be accessed via the difference window right mouse button pop up This is shown in figure 11 5 Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference m a a ATF SL Figure 11 4 Difference toolbar 164 RENESAS Pi Compare Export results to file Ignore whitespace Oh Find B Find previous amp Find next T Previous difference Next difference Refresh comparison Figure 11 5 Difference popup menu The functionality for each menu item is described below e Compare This opens a new compare window so that some new files can be comapred and the differences displayed e Export results to file This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format e Ignore white space The ignore white space option which is on the advanced option
96. for project Project m Details Version control directory mappings Source Director c work application project x we swapp project1 c Wwork application src x vo swiapp sre Modify c work shared Wwe swishared Environment Figure 8 7 Version Control Setup Dialog Projects Tab gt To define a new mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab and the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed Click the Add button that is next to the Version control directory mappings list The dialog shown in figure 8 8 will be displayed Enter the source i e working directory into the Source directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Enter the version control directory i e controlled directory into the Version control directory 142 Version Control Directory Mapping 24 x Source directory Ka fe work shared gt Browse ancel Version control directory x we swishared Figure 8 8 Version Control Directory Mapping Dialog RENESAS gt To modify an existing mapping 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed Select the Projects tab the dialog shown in figure 8 7 will be displayed 2 Select the mapping to be modified from the
97. for searching Address Sets an address condition Data Sets a data condition R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Selects the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the status of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ7 0 Selects the status of eight probe input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired Note Items other than General Address Data R W Area Status Probes and Timestamp vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Clicking the OK button after setting conditions in those pages stores the settings and starts searching Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting of conditions When a trace record that matches the search conditions is found the line for the trace record will be highlighted When no matching trace record is found a message dialog box will appear Only the trace information that satisfies all the conditions set in above pages will be searched Tf a find operation is successful selecting Find Next from the popup menu will move to the next found item 303 RENESAS 1 Gene
98. function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user defined e Stack Trace 5 13 1 C C Operators The C C language operators are available t amp 1 gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt amp amp ll Buffer_start 0x1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFF0000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 5 13 2 C C Expressions Expression Examples Object value p_Object gt value Class value value amp value array 0 Object value g_value Class function short struct STR value Specifies direct reference of a member C C Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Specifies reference of a member with class C Specifies a pointer C C Specifies a reference C C Specifies an array C C Specifies reference of a member with pointer C Specifies reference of a global variable C C Specifies a member function C Specifies cast operation C C 267 RENESAS 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels In some languages for example C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address When such a label name is entered in a dialog box the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions Function 2 x Select Function Name Set Function Name Sample sort long Sample sort long short
99. gt f Breakpoint A Event A Trigger Figure 6 10 Event Window The popup menu opened by clicking the Event window with the right hand mouse button allows the user to set or change breakpoints define new breakpoints and delete enable or disable breakpoints 355 RENESAS 6 8 Referring to Symbols The Label window can be used to display the information on symbols in modules Select Label from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Label window is displayed so that the user can refer to the addresses of symbols in modules BP Address Name H 00000400 PowerON_Reset H 00001000 _sbrk H 00001034 main H 00001038 tutorial H o0000110A _abort H 0000110C __INITSCT H o00001122 loopl H 0000112C loopZ H oooo112E next_loopZ H 00001132 next_loopl H o0001144 loop3 H 00001152 loop4 H 00001158 next_loop4 H oooo115C next_loop3 H o00001168 operator newlunsigned long H OOOO11BE __CALL INIT H 000011E0 __CALL_ END H oooo11E4 operator delete void H OOOO1LEE _rand H o00001226 _srand H 00001232 DIVLF3 H 0000123C not_negX H 00001244 not_negY H 0000124E not_negZ Figure 6 11 Label Window 356 RENESAS 6 9 Viewing Memory When the label name is specified the user can view the memory contents that the label has been registered in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to __main in byte size Select Memory from the CPU submenu of the View m
100. gt sl a 1 000001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010e8 p_san gt s9 a 9 Ox000010 6 delete p_san 0x000010fc Figure 6 3 Source Window Displaying the Source Program e Select a font and size that are legible if necessary For details refer to section 4 Using the Editor in the HEW part Initially the Source window shows the start of the user program but the user can use the scroll bar to scroll through the user program and look at the other statements 350 RENESAS 6 4 Setting a PC Breakpoint A PC breakpoint is a simple debugging function The Source window provides a very simple way of setting a PC breakpoint at any point in a program For example to set a PC breakpoint at the sort function call e Select by double clicking the Editor column on the line containing the sort function call aA Lame EESE S S E E 0x00001038 void tutorial void EG Tutorial Ox00001044 3 Tutorial long a 10 Ely C source file long j L dbsct c int i E Tke class Sample p_sam C source file 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 12 resetpra cpp Ox0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i Baz une e Bf tutorial cpp x 1f lt z tutorial cpp 0x0000105a j j 3 4 Download modules LH Tutorial ab
101. import a custom phase from 2 Choose the location of the project you wish to import a custom phase from Once selected a dialog is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and then click OK The phase will then be added to the build phases dialog at the bottom of the build order 46 RENESAS gt To modify a custom phase 1 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The modify phase dialog will be invoked with the Command tab selected figure 3 7 3 Change the contents of the fields as appropriate 4 Set the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box if you don t want the HEW to abort the execution of the phase if any of the input files don t exist Set the Read Output On Fly check box if you want to display the command output to stdout during command execution Modify MyPhase C tools mptool exe a a Figure 3 7 Modify Phase Dialog Command Tab 5 Select the Environment tab figure 3 8 to edit the environment settings for the phase 6 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables The operation is the same as discussed in the previous section 7 Click OK when all modifications have been made 47 RENESAS Modify MyPhase PAT
102. in sequence horizontally so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows in sequence vertically so that they occupy the entire editor window with no overlapping edges e Window gt Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the editor window e Window gt Close All Close all open editor windows The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files gt To show files in notebook 1 Select Tools gt Options The Tools Options dialog box will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Show files in notebook check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 2 1 The Editor Toolbars The editor has four related toolbars Editor Search Bookmarks and Templates They provide a shortcut to the functions of the editor which you will use most often The following sections describe each buttons function 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons O New File The new file button creates a new source file window with a default name When you save the file you can specify your own filename z Open File Click this button if you want to open a file It invokes a standard file chooser select the file which you want to open and then click Open 70 RENESAS m
103. lines are allowed and must start with a character An example is shown below 425 RENESAS Example H8S 2655 Series I O Register Definitions File Modules BaseAddress 0 Module Module1 Power_Down_Mode_Registers definition Module2 DMA_Channel_Common Module3 DMA_Channel_0 Comment Module42 Bus_ Controller Module43 System_Control Module44 Interrupt_Controller DMA_Channel_Common DMAWER Oxffff00 B A DMATCR Oxffff01 B A DMACROA Oxffff02 B A DMACROB Oxffff03 B A DMACR1A 0xffff04 B A DMACR1B 0xffff05 B A DMABCRH Oxffff06 B A DMABCRL 0Xffff07 B A Register definition DMA_Channel_0 MAROAH OxfffeeO W A MAROAL Oxfffee2 W A IOAROA Oxfffee4 W A ETCROA Oxfffee6 W A MAROBH Oxfffee8 W A MAROBL Oxfffeea W A IOAROB Oxfffeec W A Register name cae ci WA Address Size Absolute address flag 426 RENESAS D 2 File format Bit Field Supported Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The user must define FileVersion 2 at the start of the section It means that this I O register file is described with the version that supports the bit field The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the
104. long t int i J ks gap 0x00002072 gap 5 0200002076 while gap gt 0 0x00002078 for k O k lt gap k 0x0000207c for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap 0x00002080 for j i gap j gt k j j gap Ox00002084 Ed if a j gt al j gap t alj 0x000020a4 a j aljtgap 0x000020a8 a j gap t else break 0x000020c0 gap gap 2 0x000020cc Figure 6 60 Source Window PC Breakpoint Setting e Select Reset Go from the Debug menu e After the break in program execution select Stack Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu to open the Stack Trace window StackTrace Kind Name Value _ F Sample sort long Ox00002084 F tutorial 000001078 F main 0x00001036 F PowerON_Reset Ox0000041e Figure 6 61 Stack Trace Window Figure 6 61 shows that the position of the program counter is currently at the selected line of the sort function and that the sort function is called from the tutorial function To remove the PC breakpoint double click the Editor column in the sort function again 388 RENESAS 6 18 Performance Measurement Function Performance measurement by the emulator is in the following modes e Time Of Specified Range Measurement e Start Point To End Point Measurement e Start Range To End Range Measurement e Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement e Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement In this tut
105. mask specification e Bus state e Area e The value of four external probe signals e The number of delay cycles after the event has occurred 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas In the event detection system signals indicating the MCU s bus states and the accessed areas can be specified as the event detection condition These signals are output from the MCU on the emulator the signals to be acquired will vary according to the emulator in use The signals to indicate bus states and areas are used to set the Bus Area condition of the event point They can also be acquired as the trace information The bus state signals are also used to set the condition not to acquire the trace Suppress option and in the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement mode for measuring the hardware performance Access Type option For the trace function refer to section 5 16 Viewing the Trace Information For the hardware performance function refer to section 5 20 Analyzing Performance The following tables show examples of signals to indicate the bus states and areas that can be acquired by the emulator Table 5 1 Bus State Signals Acquired by the Emulator Bus State Trace Display Status Description CPU Prefetch PROG CPU prefetch cycles CPU Data DATA CPU data access cycles Refresh REFRESH Refresh cycles DMAC DMAC DMAC cycles DTC DTC DTC cycles Other OTHER Others 280 RENESAS Table 5 2 Area Sign
106. menu The following dialog box will be displayed CI zx Variable or expression fo o Figure 6 16 Add Watch Dialog Box e Input variable i to Variable or expression edit box and click the OK button The Watch window will now also show the int type variable i Ox00ffef80 lona 10 i H 000a R4 fint Watch A Watch3 A Watch4 Figure 6 17 Watch Window Displaying the Variable 359 RENESAS The user can click mark at the left side of array a in the Watch window to watch all the elements w Watch Roa OxO0ffef80 lona 1O R 0 H 000041c6 0x00ffef80 long R H 0000167e Ox0Offef84 long R 2 H 00002781 0x00ffef88 long R 3 H 0000446b Ox00ffefSc long R 4 H 0000794b OxO00ffef90 long R 6 H 000015tb Ox00ffef94 long R E H 000059e2 0x00ffef98 long R 7 H 00001 cfb Ox00ffefSc long R 8 H 00003f54 Ox00ffefad long R 9 H OOOOOFG Ox0Offefa4 long i H 000a R4 fint Watch2 A Watch3 A Watch4 Figure 6 18 Watch Window Displaying Array Elements 360 RENESAS 6 11 Displaying Local Variables The user can display local variables in a function using the Locals window For example we will examine the local variables in the tutorial function which declares four local variables a j i and p_sam e Select Locals from the Symbol submenu of the View me
107. of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Specifies the height of the image unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Displays the size of the buffer required for image display as obtained from the width and height in hexadecimal notation Specifies the location size and data start location of the part to be displayed among the entire image Specifies whether display is on all or part of the screen Full Size Part Size Top Bottom The image is displayed on the whole screen The image is displayed on part of the screen Display of data starts at the upper left position Display of data starts at the lower left position Specifies the position on the screen from which image display is to start valid when Part Size is selected X Position Y Position Specifies the X coordinate of the start position unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Specifies the Y coordinate of the start location unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers RENESAS Width Height Size Specifies the height and width of an image to be displayed on part of the screen Width Pixel Specifies the width of the display unless a prefix is included values are treated as decimal numbers Height Pixel Specifies the height of the display unless a prefix is included values are treated as d
108. phase referred to as the destination phase Such intermediate files are passed in addition to the project files gt To add a file mapping 1 2 Click Add The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 Select the file group which you want to pass between the phases from the File group drop down list box Select the source phase i e which phase generates the files from the Source phase drop down list box Select the destination phase i e which phase takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list box Click OK to create the new mapping Define File Mapping Fie group Object file ha Cancel Source phase SH Assembler 7 Destination phase i Figure 3 17 Define File Mapping Dialog gt To modify a file mapping Ie 56 Select the mapping to be modified 2 Click Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked figure 3 17 3 4 Click OK to commit the changes Modify the options as necessary RENESAS 3 6 Controlling the Build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error is encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog figure 3 18 Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network r Errors and
109. pressing return when auto indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i of the previous line Now when the line int z 20 is typed it is automatically aligned i e automatically indented void myfunction void void myfunction void int x 5 int x 5 int y 10 int y 10 int y o int y oF int z 20 int z 20 i Auto Indentation Disabled ii Auto Indentation Enabled Figure 4 8 Effect of Auto Indentation gt To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Enable auto indentation check box accordingly 3 Click OK for the setting of the auto indentation check box to take effect 84 RENESAS 4 9 Splitting a Window The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to split a text window into two Figure 4 9 shows the split bar button which is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any text window Figure 4 9 Split Bar Button gt To split a window Double click on the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed move the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window gt To adjust the position of the split bar Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then mo
110. program execution Once the ROM has been written to the state is retained until the Configure Platform is set again Target Mode Displays the mode to be input from the user system Target Clock Displays whether or not there is a clock signal to be input from the user system Note In this emulator the update interval in the Extended Monitor window cannot be selected or changed 408 RENESAS 8 1 8 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas The following tables show examples of signals to indicate the bus states and areas that can be acquired by the emulator Table 8 7 Bus State Signals Acquired by the Emulator Bus State Trace Display Status Description CPU Prefetch PROG CPU prefetch cycles CPU Data DATA CPU data access cycles Refresh REFRESH Refresh cycles DMAC DMAC DMAC cycles DTC DTC DTC cycles Other OTHER Others Table 8 8 Area Signals Acquired by the Emulator Area Trace Display Area Description On chip ROM ROM ROM On chip RAM RAM RAM On chip I O 16bit 0 16 16 bit I O On chip I O 8bit 0 8 8 bit I O External 16bit EXT 16 16 bit EXT external External 8bit EXT 8 8 bit EXT external DTC RAM RAM DTC DTCRAM Note The signals to indicate bus states and areas are used to set the Bus Area condition of the event point They can also be acquired as the trace information The bus state signals are also used to set the condition not to acquire the trace Suppress op
111. rate of execution time according to the conditions that have been set Stopping the user program displays the result of measurement in the Performance Analysis window 5 20 5 Deleting a Measurement Condition Select Reset from the popup menu with a measurement condition selected to delete the condition 5 20 6 Deleting All Measurement Conditions Choose Reset All from the popup menu to delete all the conditions that have been set 346 RENESAS Section 6 Tutorial 6 1 Introduction The following describes the main functions of the emulator by using a tutorial program The tutorial program is based on the C program that sorts ten random data items in ascending or descending order The tutorial program performs the following actions e The main function repeatedly calls the tutorial function to repeat sorting e The tutorial function generates random data to be sorted and calls the sort and tutorial functions in order e The sort function enters the array where the random data generated by the tutorial function are stored and sorts them in ascending order e The change function then sorts the array which was sorted in ascending order by the sort function in descending order The file tutorial cpp contains source code for the tutorial program The file Tutorial abs isa compiled load module in the Dwarf2 format Notes 1 After recompilation the addresses may differ from those given in this section 2 This s
112. right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu and then choose the Open lt file gt menu option where lt file gt is the name of the file selected 4 3 5 Closing Files gt To close individual files select one of the following methods 1 Double click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized 2 Click on the editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window when not maximized and select the Close menu option 3 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 4 Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select File gt Close 5 Click on the close button located at the top right of each window when not maximized gt To close all windows at once Select Window gt Close All 74 RENESAS 4 4 Editing a File The High performance Embedded Workshop editor supports standard editing functionality This is available through the usual methods i e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu or local menu that is local to each editor window To invoke it place the pointer in an open window and click the right mouse button Table 4 1 outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Table 4 1 Basic Editing Operations Operation Effect Action Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Click the cut
113. specified data If the data is found it is highlighted Tf the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found is displayed If Search Next is selected from the popup menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address 240 RENESAS 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value A value can be set as the contents of a memory address range using the memory fill function To fill a memory range with the same value select Fill from the popup menu of the Memory window or from the Memory drop down menu The Fill Memory dialog box is shown in figure 5 23 Format Byte x1 ba I Verity Figure 5 23 Fill Memory Dialog Box If an address range has been selected in the Memory window the specified start and end addresses will be displayed Select a format from the Format combo box and enter the data value in the Data field On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the memory range 5 5 9 Copying a Memory Area You can copy a memory area using the memory copy function Select Copy from the popup menu of the Memory window or from the Memory drop down menu The Copy Memory dialog box is opened figure 5 24 Destination Format Byte amp 1 z P Verify Figure 5 24 Copy Memory Dialo
114. stage it is worth taking a few moments to familiarize yourself with the options that each menu provides RENESAS 1 2 3 The Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options which you will use the most often There are ten default toolbars Bookmarks Debug Debug Run Editor Search Standard Templates Version Control Difference and Map as shown in figure 1 3 to 1 12 Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools gt Customize menu option see chapter 6 Customizing the Environment for further information Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Toggle Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks pase Figure 1 3 Bookmarks Toolbar TCL Toolkit View Disassembly Command Line Print the Disassembly window Enable Disable Breakpoint Radix Connect to debue platform Disconnect debue platform om ew Toggle Breakpoint if Figure 1 4 Debug Toolbar Reset CPU Step Over Go to Cursor Step Out Reset Go Set PC to Cursor Step Halt sid ee I ra P P B Toc Mec w fn me Figure 1 5 Debug Run Toolbar Save File Copy Match Braces Open File Save All Cut Paste Insert Template New File Print Togele Bookmark agaS6 s ea ra Figure 1 6 Editor Toolbar Find in Files Find Next peach String Find Find Previous Figure 1 7 Search Toolbar RENESAS Build Build All Current Congifuration Current Session Launeh Slave Hew View Work
115. standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop gt To change a projects relative path flag 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select properties 3 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch on or off the relative file path feature figure 2 26 4 Click OK Location C Hew Demo Demo Demo hwp Cancel Last modified 10 19 42 Thursday June 12 2003 CPU family SuperH RISC engine Tool chain Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain Version TALFAN I Project relative file path Figure 2 26 Properties Dialog 37 RENESAS 2 15 User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to your workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog gt To add a user folder 1 Select the project on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then add folder 3 Enter the name and click OK 4 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically gt To remove a user folder 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Remove folder Note that the folder must be empty and that the delete key can also be used instead of the pop up gt To modify a user folder name 1 Select
116. the Debug menu or the Reset Go button on the toolbar Figure 6 29 Reset Go Button Note This tutorial program is executable from the reset vector 366 RENESAS 6 15 Break Function The emulator s break functions are of two types PC breaks and breaks at event points PC breakpoints and event points are set in the HEW s Event window An overview and setting of the break function are described below 6 15 1 PC Break Function The emulator can set up to 256 PC breakpoints e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Event window is displayed e Select the Breakpoint sheet 2101 xi A gt f Breakpoint A Event A Trigger Figure 6 30 Event Window Before Setting a PC Breakpoint e Click the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Add from the popup menu e The Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is displayed 367 RENESAS Breakpoint Eve 2 x General Type Address PC Break Dont Care Address Range Address Lo Homos OC PRE H 00001082 Address Hi Eo aaae F Outside Range r Data Compare Direction F Compare F Use Mask Read Value mooo H O write O Byte i Word Mask fo Either Figure 6 31 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box e Check the PC Break radio button in the Type group box e Use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that ha
117. the Stack Trace Window s sesssssessesssssesssesesesesestsesrsesrsrereresereseseres 327 5 17 2 Viewing the Source Program 35 17 3 Specifying the VIS W vesciscvieccsa eects leecsiswewcontedssstuscrdvasnsslandsvonvenesseocsssivouessoscseluecdees Displaying Memory Contents as an Image 0 c cece eee e eee ceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeetseeeeeees 329 5 18 1 Opening the Image View Window uu cece cece eeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeecseeeeeetseeeeaees 329 5 18 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ccc eeeee rete eteeeeees 331 5 18 3 Updating the Window Content 0 cece cee eeeeceecseeeesesseeesseteeesaeeeseneeenes 332 5 18 4 Displaying the Pixel Information ee cece eee cece eeeeeeceeeeceeseeetseeeteees 332 Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms 0 c cece eeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeecsetaeeeeseeeeeees 333 5 19 1 Opening the Waveform View Window cc cece eeeeeseeeeseeeeeecseeeeeeteeeeeees 333 5 19 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ccc eects eeeeeeeeeeees 334 5 19 3 Updating the Window Content 0 cece ese ceescseeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeesaeeeseeaeaees 334 5 19 4 Zoom In Display 5 19 5 Zoom Out Display 5 19 6 Resetting the Zoom Display cece eee cece cseeecseeseeeeseeeseseeeecetaeeesseeeeeee 334 5 19 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification 0 cee cece eee cseeeceeeeeseeeecsesaeeesseeeeaees 334 5 19 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale eee eeesesecsessessescseessscsssessessseeesecesescseeesases 334 5 19 9 Non Display Of
118. the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Modify folder name 3 Enter the new name in the dialog 4 Click OK 38 RENESAS 3 Advanced Build Features This chapter explains the advanced build concepts 3 1 The Build Process Revisited Chapter 2 Build Basics began by describing the build process in terms of a compiler an assembler and a linker figure 2 1 This will be the case for most installations of the High performance Embedded Workshop However if you want to begin changing the build process e g adding and removing phases then it is important to understand more about the way in which a build functions 3 1 1 What is a Build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files Figure 3 1 presents another view of the build process E A gt PHASE 1 gt Phase 1 Input Files Phase 1 Output Files PHASE 2 gt Loo Phase 2 Input Files l Phase 2 Output Files gt gt gt PHASE 3 Phase 3 Input Files Phase 3 Outp
119. the insertion cursor towards the top of the file 9 Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click Cancel to stop the find action The High performance Embedded Workshop editor also allows you to search for a string across many files 76 RENESAS 4 5 2 Finding Text in Multiple Files gt To search for text in many files Ie Select Edit gt Find in Files select Find in Files from the editor window s local menu or click the find in files toolbar button ih The Find in Files dialog box will be displayed figure 4 3 Find In Files 24 xi Find MyStruct Eind Cancel In files types 1 c cpp exp fsy h hpp inc lis p Directory fe hew demo demo X Browse I Match case IV Search sub directories T Regular expressions Figure 4 3 Find in Files Dialog Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In files types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a semicolon e g c h Enter the directory in which you would like to search files into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphica
120. the line selected on the Trace window is displayed by default Second PTR Specifies the second pointer to measure the difference Timestamp Difference Displays the results of calculation Get Difference Calculates the difference between the specified two points and display its result in the Timestamp Difference list Clear Clears all the results in the Timestamp Difference list OK Closes the dialog box All the results in the Timestamp Difference list are cleared 324 RENESAS 5 16 14 Analyzing Statistical Information Choose Statistic from the popup menu to open the Statistic dialog box and analyze statistical information under the specified conditions Statist m Statistic Analysis Figure 5 95 Statistic Dialog Box Statistic Analysis Setting required for analysis of statistical information Default Sets a single input value or character string Range Sets the input value or character string as a range Item Sets the item for analysis Start Sets the input value or character string To set a range the start value must be specified here End Specify the end value if a range has been set only available when Range has been selected Set Adds a new condition to the current one New Creates a new condition Result Obtains the result of statistical information analysis Clear Clears all conditions and results of statistical information analys
121. the mapping RAM Opening the Memory sheet of the System Status window allows you to check which optional SIMM memory module if any is installed and also allows the four banks to be relocated to the required addresses from the Memory Mapping dialog box 186 RENESAS 2 6 Hardware Interface All signals are directly connected to the MCU in the emulator with no buffering with the exception of those listed in section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product 2 6 1 Signal Protection on the emulator All signals are over under voltage protected by use of diode arrays The only exceptions being the AV and Vref All ports have pull up resistors except for analog port All V lt pins on the cable head assembly are connected together with the exception of the AV_ pin and are then monitored by the emulator to detect powered user system presence 2 6 2 User System Interface Circuits The interface circuit between the MCU in the emulator and the user system has a signal delay of about 8 ns due to the user system interface cable and it includes pull up resistors Therefore high impedance signals will be pulled up to the high level When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system to compensate for propagation delays The following diagrams show the equivalent circuit examples of the interface signals The interface circuits depend on the MCU type For details refer to section 7 Hardware Specifications Speci
122. the new keyword group Add Category Category Title peeo 1x cmn Cancel Figure 4 11 Add Category Dialog gt To create new keywords 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the source view icon in the tree you wish to modify the syntax highlighting for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Keywords tab figure 4 12 87 RENESAS Format Views 21x A Colour Font Keywords Comments D Selected Text D Text Source D Selected Text D Text C list file C source file C header file C source file D Comments D Control D Declaration D Operator D PreProcessor C header file C list file Preprocessed C source file HEU Sample Text Expanded assembly source file x Add Modify Remove OK Cancel OAOA DAOAUAL Figure 4 12 Format Views Dialog Keywords Tab 4 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog figure 4 13 will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click OK to close the dialog To remove a keyword select the keyword and click the Remove button Add Keyword Komot a Cancel Figure 4 13 Add Keyword
123. the start address Start Compare of the destination memory area If the memory block is already highlighted in the Memory window the start and end addresses will be automatically filled in when the Compare Memory dialog box is opened If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box 244 RENESAS 5 5 14 Loading a Memory Area from a File A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Select Load from the popup menu of the Memory window to open the Load Program dialog box Load Program Binary v tile name a Offset address H o0000000 Access size fi x Cancel Format __ Cancel D Perform memory verify during download Figure 5 28 Load Program Dialog Box Enter the file format Format and the file name File name If the load address value is to be changed enter the offset value in the offset field Offset address otherwise enter zero 245 RENESAS 5 6 Viewing the I O Memory A microcomputer contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but the typical modules are a DMA controller serial communications interface A D converter integrated timer unit bus state controller and watchdog timer Registers that are mapped to the microcomputer s address space controls the on chip peripheral modules The Memory window enables you to look at data in continuous m
124. the workspace is re opened a dialog is displayed which asks you to log back into the system Once you have logged in a dialog is displayed which shows your current access rights For example if you are the admin user the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the HEW server window is opened and the network facilities are enabled 158 RENESAS options 6x Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network T Enable network data access Network database access Log in User Password Password Access rights Select server Figure 10 2 Initial setup of Network tab Change password Exi Password meoo Confirm password by retyping below Figure 10 3 Change password dialog 159 RENESAS 10 1 3 Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the HEW system e Administrator Full access to every aspect of HEW The user can add and remove users from the projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files e Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the source files But it is not possible to change user access rights from this access level e Read write file access Only the source files can be modified
125. toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut local menu Press CTRL X Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Click the copy toolbar button Windows clipboard Select Edit gt Copy Select Copy local menu Press CTRL C Paste Copies the contents of the Windows Click the paste toolbar button clipboard into the active window at the Select Edit gt Paste position of the insertion cursor Select Paste local menu Press CTRL V Delete Removes highlighted text it is not copied to Select Edit gt Clear the Windows clipboard Select Clear local menu Press Delete Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of Select Edit gt Select All the active window Select Select All local menu Undo Reverses the last editing operation Select Edit gt Undo Select Undo local menu Press CTRL Z Redo Repeats the last undone editing operation Select Edit gt Redo Select Redo local menu Press CTRL Y 75 RENESAS 4 5 Searching and Navigating through Files The High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides find replace and file navigation functionality The following three sections detail how to use these features 4 5 1 Finding Text gt To search for text in the current file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit
126. until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product RENESAS LIMITED WARRANTY Renesas warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Renesas at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Renesas upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Renesas warranty See the Renesas warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Renesas is not liable for any claim made by a third party or made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER RENESAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL RENESAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT
127. user program is running or halted Note The Extended Monitor function does not affect the execution of the user program since it monitors the user system or the signal output from the MCU in the emulator by using the emulator s hardware circuit 5 8 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window Selecting View gt CPU gt Extended Monitor or clicking the Extended Monitor toolbar button displays this window The interval of updating the display is approximately 100 ms during user program execution or 1 000 ms while breaking respectively xtended Monitor Item Value User Standby Inactive User NMI Inactive User Reset Inactive User Wait Inactive User System Voltage OK User System Voltage Dow User Cable Not Connected Running status Break Ready ROM Write No Target Mode Target Clock No Clock Target Sub Clock No Clock Figure 5 31 Extended Monitor Window 249 RENESAS 5 8 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed Selecting Properties from the popup menu displays the Extended Monitor Configuration dialog box Extended Monitor Configuration Update millsecond Bunning 100 Break 1000 Cancel Settings Value User Standby Inactive User NMI Inactive User Reset Inactive User Wait Inactive User System Voltage OK User System Voltage2 Down User Cable Not Connected Running status Break Ready Figure 5 32 Extended Monitor Configuration Dialog B
128. when Enable has been selected 297 RENESAS 3 Delayed Stop page Sets trace stop conditions It is possible to set trace stop conditions with and without delay with both allowed simultaneously 2 E gi Ts f my ELE EE Figure 5 71 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Delayed Stop Page Stop With Delay Defines a trace stop condition Enable Checking this box enables a trace stop Delay Count Sets the delay count in bus cycles range 1 to 65535 This function allows you to acquire a number of trace records after any of the specified events occur Events Lists the event points where trace acquisition conditions have been set If the box that corresponds to an event point is checked trace acquisition will be stopped when that event is satisfied only available when Enable has been selected 298 RENESAS 4 1 to 4 pages Sets a range trace This is only available when the free trace mode is disabled Select either of the following four modes Disabled Point to Point Range and Event e Disabled Disables a range trace Figure 5 72 Range Trace Setting Disabled 299 RENESAS e Point to Point Acquires trace information in the specified range cquisition 21x General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 r Conditions C Disabled Point to Point C Range C Event Start Address H 00001 07E Stop ddress F o0001 084 M Cycli
129. yy form Date year month day DATE_YMD Current date in yy mm dd form User name USER Current windows user Cursor position CURSOR Insertion cursor Positions the cursor in this position after template has been inserted 7 Enter the CURSOR character to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be placed after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation User Input When defining a template it is possible to define a user input field Using the following placeholder specifies this USERINPUT lt n 1 10 gt lt some text gt The n is a number which identifies the user input identifier These placeholders can be added manually but the user input button on the define templates dialog adds these placeholders in an automated manner When the template is inserted into a file a dialog is displayed which allows you to enter some custom text for each of these fields This text is then inserted instead of the placeholder You can define ten of these user input fields Figure 4 15 shows a list of templates which is located on the Templates tab of the Workspace window 90 RENESAS E Templates le FF oolChain Templates Project Templates Figure 4 15 Templates view Any new templates which have been added to the HEW are displayed
130. 0 i jf j rand H 0003 TECI A O04 n Mii ir ali j Figure 5 51 Tooltip Watch 5 14 2 Instant Watch Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the popup menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch str Ox cO00088 struct strB Figure 5 52 Instant Watch Dialog Box shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the information may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 271 RENESAS 5 14 3 Watch Window You can view any value in the Watch window Opening a Watch Window To open a Watch window choose View gt Symbol gt Watch or click on the Watch toolbar button if it is visible A Watch window opens Initially the contents of the window will be blank lolx Name Value Type JR a 0x7c000024 inthO R 0 H 00000000 0x7c000024 int R i H o0000000 0x7c000028 fint R B H00000000 0x7c00002c fint R 3 H00000000 0x c000030 fint R 4 H 00000000 Ox c000034 fint R 6 H00000000 0x7c000038 fint R 6 H 000
131. 00000 Ox c00003c iint R D H00000000 0x7c000040 int R 8 H 00000000 0x7c000044 dint R B H o0000000 0x7c000048 int R max H00000000 Ox c00004c int Figure 5 53 Watch Window This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable Value Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable 272 RENESAS The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution For updating of the content of the variable that has been registered in the Watch window there are the following three methods 1 Use the Monitor function without halting the user program The read write signal of the MCU is set as a trigger and holds the address bus and data bus values to update the value of the variable Note Although the realtime operation is retained the size and number points to be monitored are limited For the Monitor function refer to section 5 9 Dis
132. 002012 for i O i lt 10 i f 0x0000201a j rand 0x00002022 if j lt Of ynnnnene A 4 ie of gt e demo c Version Control Build desktop Read write 29 86 4 Figure 6 17 Desktop button In this example the selected desktop is number This has been given the name Build by the user Its description is seen in the edit box to the right on the buttons Clicking a different desktop selects that button and changes the description control Once clicked HEW then loads the windows in the new configurations style Another method of changing the desktop configuration is as follows 1 Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu 2 Then select the desktop configuration you wish to view on this menu The selected item is ticked 3 Select the menu item and the setup is altered automatically Note If the configuration has never been used then HEW will copy the current window configuration to the new configuration You can then modify this setup When you save the session it will store the positions of your windows for each window configuration 128 RENESAS 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to a version control tool Some of the reasons why version control tools are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a proj
133. 02 a 3 s 3 oap 0x00002 106 atjegap t else break Eh Soia Debug A Fod rrie j vernon Corral FE om Delma d Readvete 6287 g ms NM Figure 1 2 HEW Main Window There are three main windows the workspace window the editor window and the output window The workspace window shows the projects and files which are currently in the workspace the editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on 1 2 1 The Title Bar The title bar displays the name of current activate project and file It also contains the standard minimize maximize and close buttons Click the minimize button to minimize the HEW on the Windows task bar Click the maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting File gt Exit or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 The Menu Bar The menu bar contains eleven menus File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you wanted to open a file then the file menu is where you will find the right menu option if you wanted to set up a tool then the tools menu is the correct selection The following sections will cover the functions of the various menu options as they become relevant However at this
134. 100 RD ROM PROG 1 mii i lu _sbrk 03369 001000 STM L ER2 ER3 SP 0110 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 qu Sample sort long 01667 002068 TM L ER2 ER3 3P 0110 RD ROM PROG 1 yiii 1 qu Sample change long 00469 0020d6 MOV L ER3 Q ER 0100 RD ROM PROG 1 1l 1 qui gt l Figure 6 59 Trace Window Function Calls 5 To return the display in the Trace window to its previous state follow the procedure in 3 to display the Function Call Display dialog box Click the Disable button and then the OK button 6 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Breakpoints window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 387 RENESAS 6 17 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the information on the stack to display the function call history Notes 1 This function can be used only when the load module that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded Such load module is supported in H8S H8 300 C C compiler V4 0 or later 2 For details on the stack trace function refer to the online help e Double click the Editor column in the sort function and set a PC breakpoint 0x00002068 void Sample sort long a 0x00002070
135. 13 2 is shown 2 Select the Configure view menu item The dialog in figure 13 6 is displayed Decide what items you wish to modify and click OK to accept the changes Configure iew f x J Jump to definition on double click Cancel Figure 13 6 C Configure view dialog The following items are available on the configure view dialog e Group by access This option groups the display of public protected and private member variables and functions together in the Navigation view 172 RENESAS Jump to definition on double click By default this option is checked If this option is switched off then a dialog is displayed which asks you where you wish to jump You rather than HEW resolve the ambiguity This dialog is shown in figure 13 7 Select Query Location x Select the query to jump to Go to Declaration animal h line 12 Go to Definition animal h line 12 Figure 13 7 Select Query Location dialog Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection 2 To view the Base or derived classes 1 2 3 Select the class that interests you in the Navigation view Right click and view the pop up menu To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu item To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu item Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed
136. 30 RENESAS 2 7 File Dependencies A typical project will contain dependencies between files for example one C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the project window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies gt To update a project s dependencies Select Build gt Update All Dependencies or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Update All Dependencies from the pop up menu Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder figure 2 21 i 2 8 Configuring the Workspace Window Tf you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in which information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File If you select Show dependencies under each file the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders f
137. 3d New Build Phase Dialog Step 3 43 RENESAS The fourth and final step figure 3 3e allows you to specify any environment variables which the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 BEI W Does the command require any environment variables to be set If so enter them into the list below T Read Output On Fly lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 3 3e New Build Phase Dialog Step 4 To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 3 4 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the list of the fourth step To modify an environment variables select the variable in the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable 24 x Variable ooo Cancel Value Placeholder c dos c mptools c windows c temp popup menu Figure 3 4 Environment Variable Dialog If the tool you are adding can display its output as the tool is running then use the Read Output On Fly option This will display the tool output as e
138. 8 CGreatwhite amp CGreatWhite amp CGreatwhitef FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood FeedTheShark char pszOtherT ype FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonFood Project Templates Navigation entries Navigation category Project Class name Class members Navigation Figure 13 1 Navigation view The navigation view contains categories for all supported navigation types In HEW 3 0 the following navigation components are supported as standard C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed C Classes All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files Each category is displayed in the top level of the view Underneath each category each project in the workspace is displayed Then the items belonging to that particular project are displayed below the project icon 169 RENESAS It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information gt To switch off a navigation category 1 Right click on the Navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure 13 2 is shown Select the Select Categories menu item The dialog in figure 13 3 is displayed Uncheck any cat
139. 9 Selecting a Version Control System cece cece ces cess eeeesceesaeeecseceeessessseesseeesseeanegs 130 Using the Custom Version Control System eee 133 Defining Version Control Menu Options 0 cece eee eecee ce eeeeecseeeeeeeesesaeeeeeesaeeeeaes 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons i 8 1 2 User Ment OPUS esye eiere EErEE NEKED KEST STENET E AETI NEKET Defining Version Control Commands sesssessesssesssisesrststsestetststtsesessrensrsrsreesinesrsenesent B21 Executable retuin Code ann icssynctsssssncarscsscsnrsecssonesnoursdestodeouentbesnessenseveosoanseseayeesset Specifying ArPuMeENts sec essencccosvencccousensscoaeancseonasdeseousuredeasnsescerdoacssovdoansanssaasdensdasensorncanes 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations 0 eee cseeececeeeecseeeesseeesesaeeesseeeeesaeeeeaae 141 8 3 2 Specifying BNViroMnMenl ssrin sscesessdesacswssscaess lusecvsdsdeecasyadvecssvaes depaisvageonsab ees 144 8 3 3 Specifying Comments crsiseicssessicsscasersen ciasscessvisecetoseseconeedsaccsedosacenseaeaseosasbecaveedes 145 8 3 4 Specifying a User Name and Password eseeceeeeesesecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeas 146 84 Controlling Executions ccecioiye ced asyescasessessesossavckcosvontscssnssaasdaasdiestonssvesdnasssessuesduessenseessvenys 148 8 4 1 Prompt before executing ComMANG 0 ee eee cece ee eee tects eeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee 148 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter
140. AA e eo 2 aT mlae palm a ai7 les alla e e m E a an aate a rl At SEE 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i Ox00001050 j randt Ox00001058 if j lt O 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 e P_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a gt P_sam gt change a Ox00001082 p_san gt s0 a 0 0x0000108a p_san gt s1 a 1 0x00001096 p_san gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_san gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_san gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_san gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_san gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_san gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_san gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_san gt s9 a 9 0x000010f6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Tutorial S Tutorial Ey C source file E dbset c sbtk c C source file resetprg cpp sort cpp BR a OxO0ffef80 flongf1 0 0 H QOOOOHE Ox00ffef80 llong R i H 000015fb 0x0Offef84 flong R 2 H 0000167e 0x0Offef88 llong 3 H 00001 cfb 0x0Offef8c llong 4 H 00002781 0x0Offef90 long R B H 00003f54 Ox00ffef34 llong R 6 H 000041 c6 0x0Offef98 long ftg H 0000446b 0x00ffef3c llong R 8 H 000059e2 0x00ffefa0 long R 9 H 0000794b 0x0Offefa4 llong i H 000a R4 int Se Watch A Watch A Watcha A Watcha 7 Break Stepping Completed Read write 48 69 i7 Ns NUM 4 Figure 6 23 HEW Window Step Out The data of variable a displayed in the Watch windo
141. Bar of Docking Window gt To dock the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to dock the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to dock the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a floating window or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating window changes gt To float the Workspace window or the Output window Allow Docking must be checked on the pop up menu of the window to float the Workspace window or the Output window The pop up menu will be displayed when you click the right mouse button anywhere inside the window Then you have two ways to float the window 1 Double click on the control bar of a docking window or 2 Drag the control bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar gt To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window Or push the right mouse button anywhere inside a floating window and select Hide on the p
142. Block register 1 EBR1 H FFAA e Block register 2 EBR2 H FFAB When Motor Management Timer MMT is used in the emulator the MMT output cannot be monitored by port B Note The addresses indicate the lower 16 bits 8 2 3 Access to the Reserved Area When accessing the reserved area note the following If the reserved area is used the operation in the actual MCU cannot be guaranteed If the user program extends to the reserved area during debugging select the MCU having the largest ROM capacity for example debug the H8S 2611 program in the H8S 2612 mode 8 2 4 Using the Internal RAM Area as External Addresses When the RAME bit in SYSCR is 0 the internal RAM area can be used external addresses Note that however the only memory that can be accessed is User external not Emulator emulation memory In this case the On Chip Read write Internal RAM setting is applied for memory mapping 8 2 5 Support of Flash Memory This emulator does not emulate the flash memory in the MCU 8 2 6 Hardware Standby This emulator does not support the hardware standby function Therefore checking User Standby enable in the Configuration Properties dialog box is invalid 414 RENESAS Appendix A Troubleshooting I have clicked the Stop Build button or selected Build gt Stop Build to abort a build but the build process has not stopped The HEW will stop the build after it has built the current file or executed the c
143. Box after Setting an Event 380 RENESAS 5 The event that has been set in the Event combo box of the Trace Events group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box is displayed Trace Acquisition General Stop Delayed Stop m Suppress p Time Stamp IV Free Trace IT DMAC Cycles Clock I DIC Cycles Disabled hd J Refresh Cycles r Trace Events Event s R H FFEF80 range to H FFEFA write ha Edit Delete Del All Sequence OK Cancel Figure 6 50 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Adding an Event 6 To enable time stamping select 125ns from the Clock combo box of the Time Stamp group box Trace Acquisition General Stop Delayed Stop Suppress _ Time Stamp IV Free Trace Tl DMAC Cycles Clock T DIC Cycles id J Refresh Cycles r Trace Events Event E R H FFEF80 range to H FFEFA write Re Add Edit Delete Del All Sequence Cancel Figure 6 51 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Time Stamping is Available 381 RENESAS 7 To enable the event condition that has been set uncheck the Free Trace check box on the General page This will add pages 1 to 4 see figure 6 45 Trace Acquisition dialog box 8 Select page 1 and click the Range radio button in the Conditions group box This will display the Range Event combo box and the Edit
144. Connect toolbar button The emulator is connected Note Before reconnecting the emulator a load module must be registered to the HEW For registration refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 4 7 Ending the Emulator When using the toolchain the emulator can be exited by using the following two methods e Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated e Exiting the HEW 1 Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated Select Disconnect from the Debug menu or click the Disconnect toolbar button 2 Exiting the HEW Select Exit from the File menu A message box is displayed If necessary click the Yes button to save a session After saving a session the HEW exits If not necessary click the No button to exit the HEW High performance Embedded Workshop x A Session has been modified do you want to save it Yes No Cancel Figure 4 21 Session has been modified Message Box 217 RENESAS 218 RENESAS Section 5 Debugging This section describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes 5 1 Setting the Environment for Emulation 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog Box Selecting Options gt Emulator gt System or clicking the Emulator System toolbar button i opens the Configuration Properties dialog box 2x General m User Signals IV User Reset enable Mode 7 advanced mo
145. Ctrl P Opens the Performance Analysis window Options Debug Sessions Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Radix Hexadecimal Uses a hexadecimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Decimal IS Uses a decimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Octal Uses an octal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Binary Uses a binary for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Emu System lator z Opens the Configuration dialog box allowing the user to modify the debugging platform settings Memory Resource 438 RENESAS Opens the Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to view and edit the debugging platform s current memory map Table G 1 GUI Menus cont Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks Debug Reset CPU Resets the target hardware and sets the PC to the reset vector address wat A Go F5 Starts executing the user program at the current PC m Reset Go Shift F5 Resets the target hardware and executes the
146. CunsOr viscisiscscsissacsss sicucsvnadecesvates EER eet sideadsteates 335 5 19 10 Displaying the Sampling Information ow eee eeee cee ceeeeeeecaeeetseeeeeees 335 Analyzing Performance rsono onnee aia aE E EEE EAE 336 5 20 1 Opening the Performance Analysis WindowW esssesssessssssseisrsssrsrsrsrsrsesssesses 338 5 20 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement 5 20 3 Selecting the Address Detection Mode and Resolution 5 20 4 Starting Performance Data Acquisition Fe 5 20 5 Deleting a Measurement Condition cece cee ee ce eeeeeeeeteeeeceetseeeeeteeeees 346 5 20 6 Deleting All Measurement Conditions cee cece ese cess eseeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 346 RENESAS Section 6 Tutorial ccccceccccccccccsssssscsccccessssssecccceesesseeeeeceesessueeeeeeeceeesteeeess 347 o R Baiano LOCEn TO n PAPAE AET EE 347 6 2 Running the HEW sccccessosscerssesecosssecdersvnessonnnesdcavsaescenaseencenosdencedosecconpaetdconpnesiebnbunnssavsanases 348 6 3 Downloading the Tutorial Program sssessesssesssssssrsrsrststststststsesensrensrstsrsrsreestsesesesrsrsrstnt 349 6 3 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program sssssssesesisisessrssrstsesesesrrsrrerrrrsseseresssesesesese 349 6 3 2 Displaying the Source Program esssesessssrersrsrsrssesstsrserserererirnrsrnrsrnrsrersrsrsrerse 350 6 4 Set ng a PC Breakpomnts suoccs ssevecsciwescoscexetssseacctaessrestestvnestesssdeddessgacsuedeedesdessetessoceatesentontseen 351 6 3 Set
147. Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders this means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open Customize Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy Add Mo dify x Remove Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Directoy Add Modify Remove rl Figure 6 14 Customize Dialog Placeholder Tab 125 RENESAS To add a custom placeholder 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab figure 6 14 2 Choose whether you need to use an Application wide custom placeholder or Workspace wide custom placeholder Click Add on the adjacent button to the list you require 3 The dialog add New Custom Placeholder dialog is displayed figure 6 15 In the fields provided choose a su
148. Ex m File extension Be Jasm m File group Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file aa Extension belongs to a new group meee 0 jated application Open group with Editor 7 Add Modify Remove Figure 2 10 Add File Extension Dialog Existing Group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace then the appropriate application is launched with the file Figure 2 11 shows the association between a word processor and the extension DOC 19 RENESAS File Extensions C list file C source file Text editor CPU information file Word processor Documents Expanded assembly source file Librarian Ii Library file Library list file Library section list file Linkage map file Linkage symbol file No application obj Object file Figure 2 11 File Groups and Applications gt To associate an application with a file group 1 Select the file group to be associated from the File Extensions dialog figure 2 11 2 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 12 Modify File Extension None Windows default Madii aes Remove Figure 2 12 Modify File Exte
149. Function Name list box 268 RENESAS Setting a Function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without setting the functions 5 13 4 Debugging an Overlay Program This section explains the settings for using the overlay functions Displaying Section Group When the overlay mode is used that is when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing Memory gt Configure Overlay Section Name Figure 5 48 Overlay Dialog Box at Opening This dialog box has two areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box 269 RENESAS The Address list box displays the address ranges used in the overlay mode Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box 2x Address OOFFBS00 OOFFBS Section Name DB OK ue ence Cancel Figure 5 49 Overlay Dialog Box Address Range Selected The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range gt Setting section group When using the overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate
150. H c dos c Stools SHOWALL FALSE ENV 1024 Moapa INON Figure 3 8 Modify Phase Dialog Environment Tab 48 RENESAS 3 3 2 Build File Phase Order If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or press amp you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 9 Build Phases 21x Build Order Build File Order File Mappings File group Phase order Compiler V MyPhase C source file Figure 3 9 Build Phases Dialog Build File Order Tab The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure 3 9 the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of p
151. HS2612EPI61SR supplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer move the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag with a command prompt and enter one of the following commands according to the PC interface board used to initiate the test program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EICO2H gt TM2612 PCI RET 2 PCMCIA interface card HS6000EIPO1H gt TM2612 PCCD RET The HEW must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the test program from lt Drive gt Diag Do not initiate it from a directory other than lt Drive gt Diag such as gt lt Drive gt Diag TM2612 PCI RET If the test program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag the test program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line such as gt TM2612 PCI S RET steps 1 to 18 will be repeatedly executed To stop the execution enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is a drive name for the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during test program execution 446 RENESAS The following messages are displayed during test This test consists of steps 1 to 18 Message E6000 H8S 2612 Emulator Tests Vx x Option memory board fitted 1 None 2 1MB 3 4MB 1 MOAGiI NG BLiver 24465000 5ReRRAAEAEAACAAARAAD EES OK Use PCI INDEDAlI ZING Griver 2450entsennranenr anes nneas OK Searching for interface card 02 ee eee OK Checki
152. IRQO Dont care 7 ilu Cancel Apply Figure 5 83 Trace Find Dialog Box IRQ7 0 Page Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQO Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 311 RENESAS 9 Timestamp page Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles The specification is not available when a time stamp is acquired mem x General Address Data RAW Timestamp l Setting ee h i min m m P us E ns Cancel Figure 5 84 Trace Find Dialog Box Timestamp Page Don t care Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified time stamp value Every field must be filled in Value Enter the time stamp value The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Not available when Don t care has been checked 5 16 5 Clearing the Trace Information Select Clear from the popup menu to empty the trace buffer that stores the trace information If several Trace windows are open all Trace windows will be cleared as they all access the same buffer 5 16 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File S
153. MPOIR LP Browse Select from existing system tools Hitachi Mapview version 1 Figure 6 5 Add Tool Dialog New menu options are added to the bottom of the list i e bottom of the tools menu The order of menu options in the Tools menu can also be modified gt To modify a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button 3 Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog figure 6 6 and then click OK ModifyT ool 21x Command StWINDIR explorer exe gt Browse Arguments gt Initial directory S TEMPDIR D Browse Figure 6 6 Modify Tool Dialog gt To remove a menu option 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Menu tab see figure 6 4 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button 117 RENESAS 6 3 Configuring the Help System The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the editor window In other words if you select some text in the editor window and then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files which will be searched are liste
154. Monitor Setting Dialog Box 392 RENESAS 2 Set the items in the Monitor Setting dialog box as follows Enter monitor in the Name edit box Set the parameters in the Options group box as follows a Use the Locals window to refer to the address on the line where variable a which is defined within the tutorial function is allocated and enter this address in the Address edit box In this example enter H OOFFEF80 Enter H 50 in the Size edit box Select BYTE HEX from the Access combo box d Check the Auto refresh at rate check box and enter D 00500 e Check the Reading the Initial Value check box e Set the parameters in the Color group box as follows a Select Change from the Change Indicator combo box b c b Select red and white in the Foreground and Background combo boxes respectively c Check the Mayfly check box Note Depending on the operating system in use the foreground and background colors may not be selectable Monitor Setting 21 xi Monitor Setting Name monitor Options Address Hooe Size byte po O YS Access Format BYTE HEX bd D 00500 JV Auto Refresh at rate ms JV Reading the Initial Value Change i Foreground Background JV Mayfly rm Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED r Color Change Indicator History Figure 6 70 Monitor Setting Dialog Box
155. NE E EEEE TEE ances aerials 8 127 Mhe StU SB ate tates ss cos ahs ca cevesdeca cosessy cess ss EENES EEEE S EE E 9 1 3 The Help System 1 4 Launching the HEW 13 Ati BUS EW ceirnin en cosgaesersvodeensssedeonesnsvestesty EEE ENEE I EEE EEEE 1 6 Component System Overview cece cess ceeseseeseeesseeeseeseeecaeeessesassesaceesseteeseeseeaeeees 10 2 Build Basics n ee ace 11 21 Whe Build Process ci ssestesccsvcssiessuecisessvcctiesssactnecesassncss sastendosectentosetbusconcsduscgusssoacshsstoerseasdes 11 2 2 Project Files 2 2 1 Adding Files toa ProjeGtssic scccciecscsscvseseuts scccdstonevssuselssssesersvoseessescesonesnsncedesrsieeecs 13 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project cscicsecssscssscscsessesossesseacstovseassacsaessennsensnsonsesenss 15 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build eee cece eeeeeeneseeeeeneteeeeeaes 16 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups 0 ccossesssssssesssssecsscnsoscasoseossssesesssecssevsesestossessoasetes 24 Specifying How to Build a File ce eceseesscseceeceeceseeseeeceeceeceaecsecseceeseeeeseeaeeeseeeeeeeees 29 Build Configuration Sease eie eeina enS E oven deeanoneseauesdestasodsestanstecsanneveassorstedayensittes 25 Selecting a Comfi uration suc sseseceossscccereavescarpnocdcsssececevseacssovsscearssaassanssengdeonecvedes 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations 00 0 0 cece cece ce eeeseeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeee 25 260 Buildins a PROpECt ssc ssss cccssas
156. NESAS e Event Acquires trace information controlling the start and end of trace acquisition with the specified condition Trace Acquisition 2 x General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 r Conditions C Disabled Point to Point C Range Event Start Event Edit 7 E H 07E address v Stop Event Edit 8 E H 1084 address X M Cyclic Figure 5 75 Range Trace Setting Event Start Event Selects the event point for which the condition to start trace acquisition has been set Stop Event Selects the event point for which the condition to stop trace acquisition has been set Edit Changes the setting for the selected event point Cyclic When this box is checked the event sequencing is configured so that the events reset themselves which causes tracing to be restarted when the start event occurs after the stop event Starts and stops trace acquisition when the conditions for starting and ending are satisfied respectively Selecting Cyclic allows a continuous acquisition of trace information that can be acquired with the specified condition 302 RENESAS 5 16 4 Searching for a Trace Record Use the Trace Find dialog box to search for a trace record To open this dialog box choose Find from the popup menu The Trace Find dialog box has the following options Table 5 5 Trace Find Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Sets the range
157. NGE BAC aaa arrere arer EEE ARHAN Point to Point Trace 46 4 6 5 446 446449 46544964945 DI Start and Stop Event Trace s ss6se5s0s06s55 2 E Trace memory Overflow lt 55 s4icis scsi sigisisiciciccicigige F Time STAMP Trace 20MHz 0 220e2 G Time STAMP Trace 10MHz 220 eee 14 Testing Runtime Counter A Runtime Counter 20MHz By Runtime Counter LOMEz 4c466iiiisisieeeiseeeses 15 Testing Emulation Monitor A EMA23 EMA0 7 BI ACSTA ACSTO 5 5 sisisicerse si sri oroe 91 EA C ASEST3 ASESTO eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee D ASEBRKACK MONITOR 0ss0scsncscsncsess Be CONN aaah AARAA ERARA gc UA AAA PAAR AAG aE EI NOGLE gryigiqtaieia orgie pie aig oo aa ogg S 16 Testing PERFM G A A Time Measurement Unit 20ns B Time Measurement Unit Target C Subroutine Count Measurement 6 D Timeout Furiction TIMOT Bait 466 9 9 999994 Ej Timeout Function TIMOP Bit 17 Testing Bus Monitor A REQUSter 4 3 4 4 5 5A SAE AADAHAAEDHADERRADE RASS BI Parallel RAM 5 405455554445555 544564640605 558 CG SPRSEL2 birbi pepe se pos ee boepobreeoes ooo EESE DI SRN MGS pittt eae ceca cae bs s or Spe Shows the check results for the forced break controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the illegal access break controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion
158. REJ1 0B0062 0200 Everywhere you imagine amp E N ESAS H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator User s Manual Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System H8S Family H8S 2600 Series H8S 2612 E6000 HS2612EPI61HE U2 Rev 2 00 A a Revision Date May 24 2005 enesas Technology www renesas com Keep safety first in your circuit designs Renesas Technology Corp puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corp or a third party Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contain
159. SPLAY RD Displays CPU register values 61 REGISTER_SET RS Sets CPU register contents 62 RESET RE Resets CPU 63 REMOVE FILE REM Deletes the specified file from the current project 64 SLEEP Delays command execution 65 SAVE_ SESSION SE Saves the session of the current project 66 STEP ST Steps program by instructions or source lines 67 STEP_MODE SM Sets the step mode 68 STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function 69 STEP_OVER SO Steps program not stepping into functions 70 STEP_RATE SR Sets or displays rate of stepping 442 RENESAS Table H 1 HEW Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 71 SUBMIT SU Executes a command file 72 SYMBOL_ADD SA Defines a symbol 73 SYMBOL_CLEAR SC Deletes a symbol 74 SYMBOL LOAD SL Loads a symbol information file 75 SYMBOL_SAVE SS Saves a symbol information file 76 SYMBOL VIEW SV Displays symbols 77 TCL Enables or disables the TCL 78 TIMER TI Sets or displays the timer resolution 79 TOOL INFORMATION TO The information on the tool registered is outputted by the file 80 TRACE TR Displays trace information 81 TRACE ACQUISITION TA Sets or displays trace acquisition parameters 82 TRACE_BINARY_ TBC Compares a trace binary file with the current trace COMPARE information 83 TRACE_BINARY_SAVE TBV Outputs trace information into a binary file 84 TRACE FILTER TF Filter the trace information 85 TRACE_STATISTIC TST Analyzes st
160. Searching Drives for Components In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly gt To search for components 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 The Search Disk for Components dialog will be displayed figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Cl Select the directory in which to begin the search Z DH ew3 Browse IV Include subfolders Located components Fa Register Component HRF Location Generic TCL Toolkit View ECX D Hew3 Systen HewT argetServer 1 0 D Hew3 Systerr SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 8 0 1 0 D Hew3 Tools Mapview 1 0 D Hew3 Tools H Series Librarian Interface Ti D Hew3S Toolsi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 6 0 1 0 D SHew3 Tools Call Walker D Hew3 Tools I w gt Version ih BEE Register All Search Status 51 file s found Figure 5 3 Search Disk for Components Dialog 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search th
161. Show Differences lv Allow Docking Hide Properties Figure 2 5 Projects Tab Pop up Menu Remove Project Files Project files Cancel demo c initsct c demo demo intprg sre c hew demo demo Remove fesetprg stc c hew demo demo sbrk c c hew demo demo stacksct stc c hew demo demo Remove alll Mai vecttbl src c S hew demo demo Figure 2 6 Remove Project Files Dialog 15 RENESAS 2 Select the file or files which you want to remove from the Project files list 3 Click the Remove button to remove the selected files or click Remove All to remove all project files 4 Click OK to remove the files from the project gt To remove selected files from a project 1 Select the files which you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press the DEL key The files will be removed 2 2 3 Excluding a Project File from Build A file in a project can be individually excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis To exclude a file in a project from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which you want to be excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Exclude Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu figure 2 5 Then a red cross wil
162. Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches a specific point or points in your code You can do this by setting a PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint operation is required use the Event window which can be opened by clicking the B button or choosing View gt Code gt Eventpoints For details refer to section 5 15 Using the Event Points e To set a PC breakpoint in the Source window 1 Make sure that the Disassemble or a Source window is open at the place you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Choose Toggle Breakpoint from the popup menu or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop 3 You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 The current breakpoint set can be enabled or disabled by using Enable Disable Breakpoint in the popup menu Now when you run your program and it reaches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message PC Break displayed in the Debug sheet of the Output window and the Source or Disassembly window is updated with the PC breakpoint line marked with an arrow in the gutter Note When a break occurs the prog
163. Step In button in the toolbar Figure 6 20 Step In Button 362 RENESAS 0x00002000 0x00002006 Ox0000201c 0x00002026 Ox0000202c 0x00002032 0200002038 0x0000203e Ox00002044 Ox0000204a 0x00002050 0x00002056 0x00002060 0x00002068 0200002070 Ox00002072 0x00002076 0x00002078 O0x0000207c 0x00002080 0x00002084 0x000020a4 0x000020a8 0x000020c0 0x000020cc Sample Sample sO0 0 s1 0 s2 0 s3 0 s4 0 s5 0 s6 0 s7 0 s8 0 s9 0 void Sample sort long a long t int i j K gap gap 5 while gap gt 0 f for k 0 k lt gap k for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap for j i gap j gt k j j gap f if a li gt alitgap t afi a j alj gap a j gap t else break gap gap 2 Figure 6 21 Source Window Step In e The highlighted line moves to the first statement of the sort function in the Source window 363 RENESAS 6 12 2 Executing the Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next statement of the calling statement in the main function e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Debug menu or click the Step Out button in the toolbar Figure 6 22 Step Out Button File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help aap Osa Sls ealoTrallmip s aslens 2 Pm mn E iia TARRA naate e etua Eoss 227 Sesiones Hes 2207
164. To switch off a column in all source files Right click on the Editor window or select the Edit menu Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog box is displayed A check box indicates whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked the column is enabled If the check box is gray the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others Deselect the check box of a column you want to switch off Oe ia 5 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect Global Editor Column States EXT 2 Trigger Event Editor Cancel Source Address K K K K Figure 5 7 Global Editor Column States Dialog Box gt To switch off a column in one source file 1 Click the right hand mouse button on the Editor window which contains the column you want to remove to display the popup menu 2 Click the Columns menu item to display a cascaded menu item The columns are displayed in this popup menu If a column is enabled it has a tick mark next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 228 RENESAS 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code If there is an address at the cursor position in the Editor window selecting Go to Disassembly in the pop up menu opens the Disassembly window The first address displayed in the Disassembly window is the address where the cursor is placed in the Edit
165. Trigger2 H 00FFD404 M Trigger3 Hro00011 40 M Triggers HOOFFEFEC Figure 5 67 Set Address For Trigger Dialog Box This dialog box allows the user to specify the address to be accessed as the trigger output condition during the user program execution Enable or disable the trigger output point by checking the check box on the left in the screen Trigger Enables the output of trigger channel 1 Trigger2 Enables the output of trigger channel 2 Trigger3 Enables the output of trigger channel 3 Trigger4 Enables the output of trigger channel 4 Address Sets the address condition of the channel 291 RENESAS Notes 1 When the condition set for the trigger output 1 to 4 is satisfied the high level signal will be output from the corresponding pin 1 to 4 of the external probe 2 EXT2 during reading or writing 2 Some emulators may not support the trigger point For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 5 15 9 Editing Event Points Handlings for settings other than PC breakpoints event points and trigger points are common The following describes examples of such handling 5 15 10 Modifying Event Points Select an event point to be modified and choose Edit from the popup menu to open the dialog box that corresponds the event which allows the user to modify the event conditions The Edit menu is only available when one event point i
166. U 2000 Configuration name Debue_yyyy E6000_Emu lator_CP Detail options Item Value Modify Figure 4 6 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platforms were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 4 5 set the name of a configuration file for each of them each time pressing the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Click the Finish button to display the Summary dialog box Pressing the OK button activates the HEW 5 After the HEW has been activated the emulator is automatically connected The message Connected is displayed on the Debug tab in the Output window to indicate the completion of connection 204 RENESAS 4 2 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button fe Open a recent project work Figure 4 7 Welcome Dialog Box 205 RENESAS 2 Creation of a new workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed New Project Workspace Projects Workspace Name E Assembly Application sample we wel oe Project Name D Empty Application AEN Import Makefile sample Library Directory D Hew3 sample Browse CPU family H85 H87300 Tool ch
167. Use local machine Use network machine Cancel Bose Access Computer name Browse Figure 10 5 Select machine name If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine This dialog is displayed in figure 10 6 Clicking OK then connects your machine to the new location High Performance Embedded Workshop x N Workspace is registered to be shared on computer PA00552 you are registered to run server locally do you want to change your server registration cuss fee Figure 10 6 Select machine name Note If the network is running multiple HEW workspaces with the network service enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is serving all of the network workspaces 162 RENESAS 11 Difference View The High performance Embedded Workshop has an integrated difference view This view allows detailed difference comparisons to be made with local files on the drive and also with files in the version control system In the HEW version 3 0 onwards the Visual SourceSafe component has this facility The difference window can be invoked two ways The first is from the show differences menu item on the tools menu The second is via the workspace window pop up with the same name When using the pop up menu the current file selecti
168. X MIN TIME Count 0 10 20 30 l sort Range H 00002068 H 000020D4 18 00h OOmin 00s 000ms 352us 480ns EEEE EEELEEES 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SSS E Figure 6 68 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Displaying the Result 10 Delete the setting for performance analysis and remove the event point Click the right hand mouse button on the Performance Analysis window to display a popup menu Select Reset All from this popup menu to delete all of the settings Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window also displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this popup menu to remove all the event points that have been set 391 RENESAS 6 19 Monitor Function The emulator allows monitoring of the content of specified addresses in memory during execution of the user program In this example we monitor the content of the address range where variable a of the tutorial function is stored 1 Select the CPU submenu from the View menu Then selecting Monitor Setting from the Monitor submenu displays the Monitor Setting dialog box Monitor Setting Monitor Setting Name monitori m Options Address H oo000000 Size byte H 20 E Access Format BYTE ASCII 7 IV Auto Refresh at rate ms D 00500 JV Reading the Initial Value r Color Change Indicator Change m Foreground ME M Background n M Mayfly m Detail Figure 6 69
169. a Workspace gt To load a project into a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Load Project option gt To unload a project from a workspace 1 Select a non active project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window and click the right mouse button to invoke a pop up menu 2 Select the Unload Project option Note You can load or unload plural projects at a time 36 RENESAS 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project to the workspace you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a project above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relative location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of the HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original project path The older version of the HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a subdirectory of the workspace directory This is still the
170. a2 P_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt s5S a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 Pp_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea pP_sam gt s9 a 9 Ox000010f6 delete p_san 0x000010fc Figure 6 33 Source Window at Execution Stop PC Break The Status window displays the following contents H8S 2237 E6000 Emulator CPU Z000 Emulator PCI Card Driver CPU H8572237 Mode Clock source Main 10MHz Sub 32kHz Run status Break Cause of last break PC Break Event Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms O00us 000ns Run Time Count 00h OOmin 00s OOlms O9Zus 500ns Figure 6 34 Displayed Contents of the Status Window PC Break Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 369 RENESAS 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points Setting up of an event point on event channel 1 Ch1 such that a break is triggered when the event point s conditions have been satisfied five times is explained as an example of the use of event points Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Event window is displayed The breakpoint that has been previously set must be deleted Click the Breakpoints window with the right hand mouse button and select Delete All fr
171. ace and saved it He or she saved the workspace after me I opened the workspace again and found that the settings of the workspace differed from what I had set before The settings saved last are enforced Once HEW opens a workspace it is updated inside the memory HEW does not save the settings into a file until a user saves the workspace intentionally 415 RENESAS ITwant HEW to automatically specify default options to a file which is newly added to a project You can specify default options to a phase if the phase is a multiple build phase Select a phase from the Options menu If the phase is a multiple build phase a file list is displayed on the left hand side of the options dialog figure A 1 In the file list open a folder of a file group to which you want to specify your default options You will find a Default Options icon in the folder Select the icon specify options on the right hand side of the options dialog and click OK The options specified here will be given to any new file of that file group when it is first added to the project 4 C C source file H E C source file 4 C source file ME Default Options Figure A 1 Options Dialog File List I selected Build gt Build All but the dependencies in the Projects tab of the Workspace window is not updated while selecting Build gt Build updates the dependencies Build gt Build All does not update the dependenci
172. ach line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output which is being displayed by the tool and display it in the output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output On Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then uncheck the Read Output On Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase is added to the bottom of the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog Figure 3 2 44 RENESAS 3 3 Ordering Build Phases In a standard build shown in figure 3 5 you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler before the assembler before the linker or after the linker You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build is to behave as intended COMPILE ASSEMBLE LINK lt 0 Figure 3 5 Typical Build Process The build phase dialog provides facilities for ordering buil
173. ach type of memory is as follows Table 3 1 Memory Types Memory Type Description On chip Uses the MCU on chip memory User Accesses the user system memory Emulator Accesses the emulator SIMM memory module The contents of a specified block of memory can be displayed using the memory function The contents of memory can be modified at any time even during program execution and the results are immediately reflected in all other appropriate windows Note that modifying memory contents during program execution has the following time requirements 1 MCU on chip ROM or RAM or emulator SIMM memory module The emulator modifies the memory contents by temporarily switching the memory bus to the emulator side without stopping the user program execution Therefore the emulator uses the memory bus for up to 80 us in reading of 256 bytes 25 MHz on chip ROM 2 MCU on chip I O DTCRAM or user system memory The emulator stops the user program execution then modifies the memory contents Therefore the user program stops for a maximum of 2 ms in reading 256 bytes 25 MHz emulation memory 197 RENESAS 3 3 2 Clocks The clock can be specified as emulator internal clock or target clock The frequencies that can be specified as the emulator internal clock depend on the MCU For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product 3 3 3 Probes External probes 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 can be connected to the e
174. ad only Modify the settings as desired and then click OK 4 Click OK to set the application for the selected file group 21 RENESAS 2 4 Specifying How to Build a File Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Options menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using gt To set options for a build phase 1 Select the options menu and find the phase whose options you would like to modify Select this option 2 A dialog will be invoked which allows you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click OK to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and then press F1 22 RENESAS 2 5 Build Configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration figure 2 14 This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on you can select that configuration and all of the options for all of the build phases will be restored These build configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform See Emulator Debugger Part in this manual for further information Figure 2 14 shows three
175. age 80 84Pin Enables ports 1 4 7 PAO to PAS B to D and PF3 to PF7 100PinA Enables ports 1 4 P70 to P73 PAO to PAS and B to G 120 128PinA Enables ports 1 to 4 7 PAO to PA3 and B to G 144PinA Enables ports 1 to 8 and A to G 100PinB Enables ports 1 4 9 and A to F 120 128PinB Enables ports 1 3 4 7 9 PAO to PAS and B to G 144PinB Enables ports 1 to 5 and 7 to G 404 RENESAS Custom Device page cont Modules Check this box to validate on chip peripherals Enable DTC Uses a part of the internal RAM as DTCRAM Enable D A Converter Displays registers of the D A converter in the IO window The D A converter is always available Enable Refresh Controller Enables the refresh controller Enable DMAC Enables DMAC Enable TPU3 5 Enables TPU3 to TPU5 TPUO to TPU2 are always available Enable PWM14 Enables the 14 bit PWM Enable MultiProcessor Communication SCI1 4 Uses all SCI channels to support the multiprocessor communication and the smart card interface SCI2 is always used for this support Enable IrDA Enables IrDA Enable IICO Enables IICO Enable IIC1 Enables IIC1 Enable WDT1 Enables WDT1 Enable TMR2 3 Enables TMR2 and TMR3 TMRO and TMR1 are always available A D Converter Selects the specifications of the A D converter 4reg 10 bit resolution four data registers and conversion time in 134 state cycles 8reg 10 bit resolution eight data registers and conversi
176. ailable when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The status of the probe signal is low 321 RENESAS 8 IRQ7 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter General Address Data RAw Area Status Probes IRQ7 0 IRQ Dontcare Ings Dontcare z IRQ5 Don t care IRQ4 Don t care IRG3 Don t care IRG2 Don t care IRQ1 Don t care IRQO Dont care 7 ilu Cancel Apply Figure 5 92 Trace Filter Dialog Box IRQ7 0 Page Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ7 to IRQO Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 322 RENESAS 9 Timestamp page Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles The specification is not available when a time stamp is acquired General site Data R w Timestamp Setting Point Range Figure 5 93 Trace Filter Dialog Box Timestamp Page Don t care Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified time stamp value Point Speci
177. ain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard z Properties Figure 4 8 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Here enter test it needs not be entered Directory edit box Displays the directory in which a workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory or enter the name of a directory in the Directory edit box CPU family combo box Select the target CPU family Tool chain combo box Select the target toolchain name when using the toolchain Otherwise select None Project type list box Select the project type to be used Notes 1 When Demonstration is selected in the emulator note the followings The Demonstration is a program for the simulator attached to the H8S H8 300 compiler package To use the generated source file delete the Printf statement in the source file 206 RENESAS Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed 2x Mi yyyy E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Micox E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 Target type fal Targets x lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 4 9 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target for the session file used when the HEW is activated must be selected here Check the box against the target platfo
178. ains one or more files Figure 1 1 illustrates this graphically PROJECT PROJECT A PROJECT WORKSPACE Figure 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project is built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything RENESAS 1 2 The Main Window The HEW main window appears as shown in figure 1 2 lt lo x De Eat Mew Project Qstore Mad bug Memory Toos Window tep i x jOSOG St beloTroal se io sesle oe 2 Ea Jaga TI z m2 g S ES i E otu Hlg SH3 dA e TA SS s ia CEEE PS CC a jamjal BOR SBR Ta 0x000020ac rosa sort long a F EE Assembly soace fie u ei E mpane int 1 J k gap 15 vests 0x000020b2 gap 5 D vherder ve 0x000020b4 while gap gt D S Couce tte 0x000020b8 for k O kegap k D deete 0x000020be for i ktgap i lt 10 i i gap 0x000020ca tor 3 1 gap j gt k j J gap i SE 0x00002042 itll j gap i PHAR 0x0000202a t oxoo002
179. al Conditions e The temperature or humidity changes greatly e There is a lot of dust e There is a lot of vibration For details refer to section 1 3 Environmental Conditions Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Only supply the specified voltage and power supply frequency When moving the emulator take care not to vibrate or damage it After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 2 Preparation before Use Supply power to the connected equipment after connecting all cables For the supplying procedures refer to section 2 7 System Check Cables must not be connected or disconnected while the power is on 180 RENESAS 1 3 Environmental Conditions CAUTION Observe the conditions listed in table 1 1 when using the emulator Failure to do so will cause illegal operation in the user system the emulator product and the user program Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 C to 35 C Storage 10 C to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 RH to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 RH to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max Ambient gases No corrosive gases may be present 1 4 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Table 1 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Item Specifications Dimensions 219 x
180. all occurrences or click Cancel to stop the replace action If you select Selection in Replace In selected range of the text is replaced If you select whole file the whole files are replaced If you select all open files all files that are currently open in the editor have the replace operation carried out on them 78 RENESAS 4 5 4 Jumping to a Specified Line gt To jump to a line ina file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Select Edit gt Goto Line press CTRL G or select Goto Line from the editor window s local menu A goto line dialog box will be displayed figure 4 5 3 Enter into the dialog box the number of the line that you want to go to and then click OK 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified Goto 21x Line number fi onee Figure 4 5 Goto Dialog 79 RENESAS 4 6 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines that you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its use is in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed gt 4 7 gt 80 To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark
181. allel Write Access Low Byte SKIP Tests run for xH xM xS Shows the check time Tests passed emulator functioning correctly Shows that the E6000 is correctly operating 450 RENESAS Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System User s Manual H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator Publication Date Rev 2 00 May 24 2005 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Technical Documentation amp Information Department Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co Ltd 2005 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan Renesas Technology Corp Sales Strategic Planning Div Nippon Bldg 2 6 2 Ohte machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan CENESAS RENESAS SALES OFFICES http Awww renesas com Refer to http www renesas com en network for the latest and detailed information Renesas Technology America Inc 450 Holger Way San Jose CA 95134 1368 U S A Tel lt 1 gt 408 382 7500 Fax lt 1 gt 408 382 7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel lt 44 gt 1628 585 100 Fax lt 44 gt 1628 585 900 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd 7th Floor North Tower World Finance Centre Harbour City 1 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel lt 852 gt 2265 6688 Fax lt 852 gt 2730 6071 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co Ltd 10th Floor No 99 Fushing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel
182. als Acquired by the Emulator Area Trace Display Status Description On chip ROM ROM ROM On chip RAM RAM RAM On chip I O 16bit 0 16 16 bit I O On chip I O 8bit 0 8 8 bit I O External I O 16bit EXT 16 16 bit EXT external External I O 8bit EXT 8 8 bit EXT external DTC RAM RAM DTC DTCRAM Note The signals to indicate the bus states and areas vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 5 15 5 Opening the Event Window Select View gt Code gt Eventpoints or click the Eventpoints toolbar button to open the Event window The Event window has the following three sheets Breakpoint sheet Displays the settings made for PC breakpoints It is also possible to set modify and cancel PC breakpoints Event sheet Displays or sets event points Trigger sheet Displays or sets trigger points 5 15 6 Setting PC Breakpoints It is possible to display modify and add PC breakpoints on the Breakpoint sheet Program Enable PC H 0000105C Tutorial cpp 42 Program Enable PC H OOOOLOCE Tutorial cpp 53 Break Program Enable PC H 00001772 Breakpoint Figure 5 58 Event Window Breakpoint Sheet 281 RENESAS Select Add or the PC breakpoint displayed in this window and then select Edit from the popup menu to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakp
183. also removed if all of the edited changes are undone in the current window Z FERH K KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK JE JE JE JE KKK JE JE JE JE JE JE JE KKK KKK KKK JE JE JE JE KKK JE JE JE JE JE E ME JE E E E E E FILE dbsct c DATE Thu Jun 26 2003 DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section z CPU TYPE This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 Z EEHEEHE EEEE E E E JE JE JE IE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE E E E E E EE pragma section DSEC static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data se char rom_e End address of the initialized data sect char ram_s 7 Start address of the initialized data se DTBL v b ct fesetprg c 4 gt dbsct c Figure 4 1 Editor Window 69 RENESAS 4 2 Working with Multiple Files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under the Window menu e Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each window visible e Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows
184. alue Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the popup menu The Edit Value dialog box opens Edit Value 2 xI Expression 0 Current H 00000ff6 Ox00ffef80 New Value Cancel Figure 5 56 Edit Value Dialog Box Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value 276 RENESAS Deleting a Watch Item To delete a watch item select it and choose Delete from the popup menu The item is deleted and the Watch window is updated To delete all watch items choose Delete All from the popup menu All items are deleted and the Watch window is updated Specifying Realtime Update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time When an R mark is displayed in bold face the value of the corresponding variable will be updated in realtime during user program execution A popup menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window e Auto Update Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time e Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time e Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update e Delete Auto Update All
185. an be acquired when you need to check the trace information during execution of the user program This is useful for checking time stamping or probe input signals To acquire a snapshot of trace information select Snapshot from the popup menu Trace acquisition is temporarily stopped to display a record of the latest trace information and then restarted A snapshot of trace information is only acquired during execution of the user program 5 16 10 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition To temporarily stop trace acquisition during execution of the user program select Halt from the popup menu This stops trace acquisition and updates the trace display Use this method to check the trace information without stopping execution of the user program 5 16 11 Restarting Trace Acquisition To restart trace acquisition being stopped during execution of the user program select Restart from the popup menu 313 RENESAS 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information Use the filtering function to extract the records you need from the acquired trace information The filtering function allows the trace information acquired by hardware to be filtered by software Unlike the settings made in the Trace Acquisition dialog box for acquiring trace information by conditions changing the settings for filtering several times to filter the acquired trace information allows easy extraction of necessary information which is useful for analysis of da
186. and the address to start monitoring When the left of the list is checked the Monitor window is being displayed Selecting items of the Monitor window you want to hide from the monitor setting list displays no Monitor window and removes the check mark at the left of the list To display the Monitor window again select the hidden the Monitor window J Monitor Setting Shift Ctrl E V monitor2 H OOFFB0D8 monitor H OOFFEF80 Windows Select Figure 5 35 Monitor Setting List 5 9 7 Managing the Monitor Window Selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor gt Windows Select displays the Windows Select dialog box In this window the current monitoring condition is checked and the new monitoring condition is added edited and deleted in succession Selecting multiple monitoring conditions enables a temporary stop of update hiding and deletion Address monitor H OOFFBOD8 y monitori H OOFFEF80 Edit Lock Refresh Hide Remove Close Figure 5 36 Selection in the Monitor Window 254 RENESAS Add Adds a new monitoring condition Edit Changes the settings of the selected Monitor window disabled when selecting multiple items Lock Refresh Unlock Refresh Automatically updates or stops updating the display of the selected Monitor window Hide UnHide Displays or hides the selected Monitor window Remove R
187. ar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks View Disassembly Ctrl D Opens the Disassembly window Command Line Ctrl L Opens the Command Line window TCL toolkit Shift gt Opens the Console window Cr L Workspace Alt K 5 Opens the Workspace window Output Alt U fel Opens the Output window Difference Opens the Difference Fd window CPU Registers Ctrl R Opens the Registers window Memory Ctrl M Opens the Memory window IO Ctrl I Ea Opens the IO window Status Ctrl U T Opens the Status window Extended Monitor c Opens the Extended Monitor window Monitor Monitor Shift al Opens the Monitor window Setting Ctrl E Windows Opens the Windows Select Select dialog box to list add or edit the Monitor window Sym Labels Shift E Opens the Labels window bol Ctrl A Watch Ctrl W zl Opens the Watch window Locals Shift a Opens the Locals window Ctrl W Code Eventpoints Ctrl E E Opens the Eventpoints window Trace Ctrl T Opens the Trace window Stack Trace Ctrl K Bl Opens the Stack Trace window 437 RENESAS Table G 1 GUI Menus cont Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Button Remarks View Gra cont phic Image Shift Ctrl G m Opens the Image window Waveform Shift Ctrl V Opens the Waveform window Per Performance form Analysis ance Shift
188. asured The range for the Start Point To End Point Measurement Address to start measurement Address to end measurement The timeout value to finish measurement When the minimum time for measurement is 160 ns 40 ns or 20 ns enter the value as follows Example 1h 2min 3s 123ms 456us 789ns If the CPU operating mode is target enter a hexadecimal number in 10 digits Example 123456789A A break occurs every time a value measured in the specified range exceeds the timeout value not the total time This is only available for channel 1 The count up value used in measurement of the execution count A break occurs every time the execution count exceeds the count up value This is only available for channel 1 Measures the execution time and the execution count in the range between start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch at the start address and then stops with a detected program prefetch at the end address The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured includes the time spent while being called from the specified range When either from one to four points is selected the maximum and minimum time in the specified range can be measured 341 RENESAS Notes 1 When Time Out is selected in the Start Point To End Point Measurement mode the execution time will not be measured correctly 2 When T
189. at has been set for the monitoring function and the data is not readable by using the monitoring function Black R A value has been updated by reading the normal data Notes 1 This function can be set per variable or per element or body for structures of data 2 The color of an R in the Name column changes according to the trace and monitoring settings 3 A variable that is allocated to a register cannot be selected for monitoring 273 RENESAS Adding a Watch Item Use the Add Watch dialog box in the Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window gt To use Add Watch from a Watch window Open the Watch window Choose Add Watch from the popup menu The Add Watch dialog box opens ET 2 Variable or expression OK Cancel Figure 5 54 Add Watch Dialog Box Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the Source window and dropped into the Watch window Note Ifthe variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be Not available now 274 RENESAS Expanding a Watch Item Tf a watch item is a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item double click on it T
190. atdesbees 267 S182 C CE EXPRESSIONS 1 3 cssseccesessevestonsccenienauedsdoeswvonseasnecessodesurduodecasacedesnssnedeouesto tenes 267 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 13 4 Debugging an Overlay Program Viewing the Variables ceeeeeee 271 5 14 1 Tooltip Watch 271 5 14 2 Instant Watch RAA 5 14 3 Watch Window adda 5 14 4 Locals Window Using the Event Points 5 15 1 PC Breakpoints Pe 5 15 2 Event Points 0 0 279 5 15 3 Event Detection System 279 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas u 5 15 5 Opening the Event Window 281 5 15 6 Setting PC Breakpoints ie S157 Setting Event Poms cero Ara E Er E E T laces seen 283 5 17 5 20 5 15 89 Setting Trigger Points s sssiceissesccessscacescdabaccvseacatssoassessssoseasateassacseaseceurvadeness asst 291 15 9 Hditing Event Poms ssieessscycerssveccevassvecsssicaccss pac T oases agit 292 15 10 Modifying Event POIs iver ccccscnceseccehessnscsicssvectuessvecdicstcacdeosecasieosessshcoreasdhenseasse 292 5 19 11 Enabling an Event Pots saveccstsccovssesecsccocsssevecessoensctsnsevonvsesssovcsesivoueseowecelavedens 292 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Point 5 15 13 Deleting an Event Point 5 15 14 Deleting All Event Points 0 00 5 15 15 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point ee eee creeeeeeeeeeeeeee 292 Viewing the Trace Information cece esses eseeeeeecse
191. ates that the counter has overflowed Enable read and write on the fly When this box is checked it is possible to access the target system memory while the user program is running Do not check this check box if you require realtime emulation Break on access error When this box is checked a break the user program stops occurs if your program accesses a guarded memory area or writes to a write protected area Enable internal ROM area write When this box is checked writing to the internal ROM area is enabled For the result of writing see the Extended Monitor window User VCC Threshold Sets the voltage level for the user system User Signals When this box is checked the reset NMI standby and bus request signals from the user system are enabled Driver Displays the E6000 driver that is currently installed Change driver in start up When this box is checked selection of a driver will be available next time the emulator is connected Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 220 RENESAS 5 1 2 Selecting an MCU Not Included in the List Selecting Custom in Device of the Configuration Properties dialog box adds the Custom Device page to the dialog box E6000 Configuration Properties 2 x General Custom Device
192. atistic information 86 TRIGGER_CLEAR TGC Deletes the trigger output condition for EXT 2 87 TRIGGER_DISPLAY TGD Displays the trigger output condition for EXT 2 88 TRIGGER_SET TGS Sets the trigger output condition for EXT 2 89 UPDATE_ALL_ UD Updates the dependencies for the current project DEPENDENCIES 90 USER_SIGNALS US Enables or disables the user signal information For the syntax of each command refer to the online help RENESAS 443 444 RENESAS Appendix I Diagnostic Test Procedure This section describes the diagnostic test procedure using the E6000 test program I 1 System Set Up for Test Program Execution To execute the test program use the following hardware do not connect the user system interface cable and user system ee eee E6000 emulator HS2612EPI61H Host computer The E6000 PC interface board Select one interface board or card from the following depending on the PC interface specifications PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EICO2H PCMCIA interface card HS6000EIPO1H Install the E6000 PC interface board in the host computer and connect the supplied PC interface cable to the board Connect the PC interface cable to the emulator Connect the supplied AC adapter to the emulator Initiate the host computer to make it enter DOS prompt command input wait state Turn on the emulator power switch 445 RENESAS 1 2 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using Test Program Insert the CD R
193. aving Babels nto a Files ss sissscsscssssssccevssseeces saszecs tesncswsageates oabtacensabsecpeasvncpiasives 259 Sc10 8 Searching fOr a Label ss ssccesssssssepsbseasassates seveaacaceviadeucssagnendesoatentsneasencenestedderoiiotee 259 5 10 9 Searching forthe Next abel w i csseccccccsecccscosessssestuscsncsesecshesssacstecssassensstevsietsvecdes 260 5 10 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label eee eeeeeeeeeereeeeeee 260 Executing Your Programi ccccsessccosiveoctostseessossiveesndevessotentes esondenensovesnesdoneetonsbseneednodevarde 261 SLUT Running from Reset c scecccsssescesvecnsteonssveseosaesseusancscestencssovdeasseoussaevessosasncavoneests 261 Sel lt Contimming RUD eaaa en Eoee erT EAEE AEE PESEN AEI AKEE 261 SIII Rinne to he Cursor po sea eenen E EEEN E AA Ra 261 5 11 4 Running from a Specified Address eceeesees ese ceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaes 262 LSD ASINGIS SUE o E E T EE 263 SIG Maltiple Steps ienen oeeie reins Sea EE EEEN Va ES KEE Eh 264 StOPPIN GY OUlPLOSTAM 501 ccctosvencccoussnscsoussecueonsansseessureseasneedeestoncstosdecssrensqasdenusescnsonvecercs 265 5 12 1 Stopping the Program by the Stop Toolbar Button eens 265 5 12 2 Standard Breakpoints PC Breakpoints 0 cece ects cseeeeseeeeeeteeeseteeeeeaee 265 EIf Dwart2 Supports iresi or ynein rnain NE NEES EE NEEE TEI I EE EEEE E 267 TIIN C C RR Operators ics ssts lt atesenvceclecscescndenccts szcesutenseasucedediestenssaeshsesescabvassantone
194. aving Labels into a File Choose Save As from the popup menu to open the Save Symbols dialog box The Save Symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save File As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files is sym See appendix E Symbol File Format for the symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the popup menu 5 10 8 Searching for a Label Choose Find from the popup menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label 27 x Kat TT A Cancel Figure 5 43 Find Label Dialog Box Enter all or part of the label name that you wish to find into the edit box and click OK or press the Enter key The HEW searches the label list for a label name containing the text that you entered 259 RENESAS Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less Labels are case sensitive 5 10 9 Searching for the Next Label Choose Find Next from the popup menu to find the next occurrence of the label containing the text that you entered 5 10 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label Select a label and choose View Source from the popup menu to open the S
195. bar Buttons T Define Template Specify template text for subsequent insertion Tr Insert Template Insert the template selected in the drop down list at the current cursor position 72 RENESAS 4 3 Standard File Operations 4 3 1 Creating a New File gt To create a new editing window Select File gt New or click the new file toolbar button CT or press CTRL N The window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 3 2 Saving a File gt To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save or click the save file toolbar button GJ or press CTRL S 3 If the file has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed gt To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select File gt Save As 3 A file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 4 3 3 Saving all Files gt To save the contents of every open editor win
196. build configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each of the phases compile and assemble are set to their standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each of the files are being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each of the files are being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default MyDebug MyOptimized Configuration Configuration Configuration oc co co Debug ON Debug ON Debug OFF POptimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON List File YES jH List File NO H List File NO Cc Source Files r r r A Debug OFF Debug ON Debug OFF Optimize OFF Optimize OFF Optimize ON H List File YES H List File NO U List File NO H Assembler Source Files C MyProject Default C MyProject MyDebug C MyProject MyOptimized Figure 2 14 Configurations and File Options 23 RENESAS 2 5 1 Selecting a Configuration The current configuration can be select in two ways Either 1 Select it from the drop down list box figure 2 15 in the toolbar 2 T
197. c Figure 5 73 Range Trace Setting Point to Point Start Address Address where trace acquisition starts Stop Address Address where trace acquisition stops Cyclic When this box is checked the event sequencing is configured so that the events reset themselves which causes tracing to be restarted when the start event occurs after the stop event Sets the event points that are required to start or stop trace acquisition when the start or end address is accessed respectively Point to Point mode is an easy method to set up the event mode The event to start or sop trace acquisition is an access to a single address Select Cyclic to continue acquisition of the trace information only in the specified address range Note This function automatically configures a sequence of event points Note however that an unexpected result may arise In such cases modify the setting of the sequence in the Event Sequencing dialog box 300 RENESAS e Range Only acquires the trace information that satisfies the specified condition Trace Acquisition Figure 5 74 Range Trace Setting Range Range Event Selects an event point for which a trace acquisition condition has been set Edit Changes the setting for the selected event point Only acquires trace information from all bus cycles that matches the condition set in the selected event This mode uses one event channel or range channel 301 RE
198. ch build to file then invoke the Customize dialog by selecting Tools gt Customize and select the Log tab figure 3 19 Set the Generate log file check box and then enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Customize BIGWSE Figure 3 19 Tools Customize Dialog Log Tab 58 RENESAS 3 8 Changing Toolchain Version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog shown in Figure To invoke the dialog select Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Choose one of the versions from the Toolchain versions drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice Change Toolchain ersion s i 2 xi Toolchain name Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Current version 71 1 0 Cancel OPU Family SuperH RISC engine Information Toolchain Hitachi SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain version 801 0 id Toolchain build phases OptLinker 8 0 02 SH Assembler 6 0 00 SH C C Compiler 8 0 01 SH C C Library Generator 3 0 01 Figure 3 20 Change Toolchain Version Dialog To show information of toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phases list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog and click the Information button Then a too
199. collect trace information on the function calls 1 Make the setting such that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function 2 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays trace information 3 Select Function Call from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Function Call Display r Setting Enable to display trace information with function call only C Enable Figure 6 58 Function Call Display Dialog Box 4 Click the Enable radio button and then the OK button Only the information on function calls is now displayed in the Trace window the Label column s right side boundary has been moved to the left in the Trace window to show the function calls Generic Trace E 10 xj Label PTR Add Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes MI IRQ7 0 Power0N_Reset 09108 000400 MOV L H OOFFEFCO ER 7807 RD ROM PROG l 1111 1 qu nain 03582 001034 BSR Gtutorial 8 5502 RD ROM PROG 1 ql 1 lu tutorial 03578 001038 MOV L ER3 Q ER7 0100 RD ROM PROG 1 1111 1 qu Sample Sanple 03558 002000 MOV L ERZ ER7 0
200. components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process gt To load or unload an on demand component manually 1 Click the Project gt Components menu item 2 The component gallery dialog is displayed This is displayed in figure 5 14 3 Select the component you wish to load Click the load button The components image should change to the loaded state 4 If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state 5 Click OK to verify the changes Component Gallery xi Project Application Extensions ITRON component Ec ma Loaded component e OSEK component Cancel Custom memory view component Pin view component Unloaded component Intermediate state component Loa d il Figure 5 14 Component Gallery Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Multiple projects and All projects items to change a components load status over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 105 RENESAS 5 9 Custom Project Types The Project gt Create Project Type menu
201. cutable This must be version HDI 4 0 or greater otherwise its behavior is not guaranteed 2 Sets the location of the session file This tells the HDI which session to load when it is launched 3 Sets the location of the download module Customize eix Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Leg Help External debugger selected Hitachi Debugger Interface sion 4 x or greater g m Debugger settings HDI location gt Browse Session file eee Download module Do O H Browse Cancel Figure 3 22a External debugger selected HDI 60 RENESAS gt To use the PD debugger 1 2 Sets the location of the PD debugger executable Sets the location of the PD profile file This tells the PD debugger which session to load when it is launched Sets the command line option This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger Sets the location of the download module Customize Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help External debugger selected Mitsubishi PD debugger r Debugger settings PD debugger location Po Browse PD profile file location OO Command line options Po Download module Pf Browse Cancel Figure 3 22b External debugger selected PD debugger 61 RENESAS gt To use the other externa
202. d Cancel Administration Figure 2 12 Welcome Dialog Box To use a workspace for the tutorial select the Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button When the Open Workspace dialog box is opened specify the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 xxxx Tutorial After the directory has been specified select the following file and click the Open button Open Worksp Lookin YTuoial EK EB Debug_H8S_2237_E6000_Emulator_CP Source File name Tutorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws h Cancel 4 Figure 2 13 Open Workspace Dialog Box RENESAS 191 When no compiler package or that of a different version is installed the following message box will be displayed High performance Embedded Workshop Tutorial A Tool Chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain version xxxx is missing From the Following project s there is no compatible toolchain available Figure 2 14 Message Box 6 The E6000 Driver Details dialog box is displayed This dialog box is only displayed at the first initiation When only one of interface drivers is selected this dialog box is not displayed E6000 Driver Details Driver Emulator PCI Gard Driver 7 Details Interface PCI be Channel Emulator PCI Card Interface 7 Gontieuratio
203. d in the Help tab of the Customize dialog gt To add anew help file 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Help tab see figure 6 7 Customize 2 xI Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Help files Description File Name Add C C Standard Library Help d hew3 tools renesa Default help file C C Standard Library Help 7 Figure 6 7 Customize Dialog Help Tab 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog will be displayed figure 6 8 3 Enter a description of the help file into the Title field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking on the Browse button 5 Click OK to define the new help file Add Help File x Title OK Programming in ANSI C x Cancel Path fe fles help ansi hip Figure 6 8 Add Help File Dialog 118 RENESAS To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default help file drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file when F1 is pressed 6 4 Specifying Workspace Options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Options dialog figure 6 9 To invoke it select Tools gt Options and select the Wor
204. d phases via the Build Phases dialog It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order And then you can click OK button 45 RENESAS 3 3 1 Build Phase Order The Build Order tab figure 3 6 displays the current order in which phases will be executed when the build currently enabled By clicking this box the phase can be toggled on or off Build Phases x Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Build phase order SH C C Library Generator SH C C Compiler SH Assembler Modify OptLinker Add lt K K K Remove Mavewp Move Down gt Import Figure 3 6 Build Phases Dialog Build Order Tab In addition the following operations can be performed gt To remove a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Yes button if a confirmation dialog box gt To view the properties of a system phase 1 Select the system phase that you would like to examine 2 Click the Modify button 3 System properties are shown as dialog box Click the OK button gt To move a phase 1 Select the phase that you would like to move 2 Click the Move Up or Move Down button gt To import a phase 1 Click the import button A dialog is displayed which allows the user to browse to an existing project to
205. d the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display start and end addresses 237 RENESAS Figure 5 19 Memory Window Note Each item in the n column is called as the memory unit There are three display columns Address First address of the memory data displayed on this row n Memory data read from Address and n means the offset value from the first address of the row Data is read from the debugging platform s physical memory in the access width and then converted to the display width Value Data displayed in an alternative format 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats If you want to change the display format of the Memory window select Format from the popup menu The dialog box shown in figure 5 20 is displayed H 000000FF Format Byte x1 ba Display Value As ANSI character Bytes Count For One Line 16 Byte Figure 5 20 Format Dialog Box To display and edit memory in different widths use the Display Data As combo box For example choose the Byte option and the display will be updated to show the memory area as individual bytes 238 RENESAS The data can be converted into different formats as shown in the Value column The list of formats depends on the data selection To change the number of bytes displayed on one line use the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list For example choos
206. de single chip IV User NMI enable User Standby enable R Single chip mode F User Standby enable IV User Bus Request enable Clock Main 1 OMHz Sub 32kHz Timer Resolution 125ns Flash Memory Control z IV Enable read and write on the fly IV Break on access error J Enable internal ROM area write User VOC Threshold 4 0v 4 p gt Device Driver E6000 USB Driver J Change driver in start up Figure 5 1 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page This dialog allows the user to set conditions for the target MCU before downloading a program to the emulator 219 RENESAS General page Device Selects the MCU to be emulated To use an MCU not included in the list select CUSTOM to specify the functions required for this MCU See the hardware manual for details Mode Selects the MCU s operating mode Clock Selects the speed of the MCU s clock and sub clock Timer Resolution Selects the resolution of the timer for use in execution time measurement The value 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us or 16 us can be selected The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16 us the maximum time is about 200 days When the counter overflows the maximum time possible for measurement will be displayed with prompt gt that indic
207. de to change the icon for the project type at this stage The default icon is shown but you can choose to use your own custom icon and this will be displayed on the new workspace dialog 10 When you are happy with the setup of the generator click finish If you click Next button Step 3 dialog box is shown 107 RENESAS What text would you like displayed on the generator dialog Displaying project information Approx size of generator lt Back Newt gt C Enin Cancel Figure 5 17 New project type wizard Step 3 Dialog 11 You can enter project information It will be shown Project information in Project information dialog box 12 You can click Finish button Now the generator will be created in the HEW system pgc directory in your HEW installation It will also automatically appear in the new workspace dialog 108 RENESAS You can see a new project type In this example Current Project Name after creating by custom project generator New Proje P C on SuperH RISC engine ha Hitachi SuperH Standard E Figure 5 18 New Project Workspace Dialog 109 RENESAS You can select a project type and enter workspace and project name then click OK This dialog contents come from Project type wizard Step 2 and step 3 setting Project information Project information Displaying project information Figure 5 19 Project i
208. debugged e Select Download module from the popupmenu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on Tutorial abs of Download modules Tutorial Tutorial ac C source file dbsct c sbrk c source file fesetprg cpp sort cpp tutorial cpp ownload modules pendencies Download module gala Download module debug data only sort h Unload module stacksct F mm m g o Lig 9 mre Q LLE Configure View iv Allow Docking Hide Figure 6 2 Downloading the Tutorial Program 349 RENESAS 6 3 2 Displaying the Source Program The HEW allows the user to debug a user program at the source level e Double click Tutorial cpp under C source file x z E e Tutor 7 ry Tutorial void main void B Tutorial 000001036 while 1 3 C source file 0x00001034 tutorial L dbsct c E sbrk c Ely C source file 0x00001038 void tutorial void B resetprg cpp 0x00001044 2 sort cpp long a 10 DEE long i E Download modules class Sample p_sam L Tutorial abs E S E Dependencies 0x00001046 p_sam nev Sample E sbrk h 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i th 0x00001050 j rand sor 0x00001058 if j lt 0y E stacksct h Ox0000105a j j F 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 Pp_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a p_sam gt change a 000001082 p_sam gt sO a 0 0x0000108a p_sam
209. defined then the value of the local variable will be incorrect until another value is assigned to the local variable The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window 278 RENESAS 5 15 Using the Event Points The emulator has the event point function that performs breaking tracing and execution time measurement by specifying higher level conditions along with the PC breakpoints standard for the HEW 5 15 1 PC Breakpoints When the instruction of the specified address is fetched the user program is stopped Up to 256 points can be set Note that however only one PC breakpoint can be set in the ROM area of the user system This particular breakpoint is called the on chip breakpoint which stops the user program after executing the instruction of the specified address When it is necessary to set two or more PC breakpoints to the external ROM area of the user system allocate this area to the emulation memory copy the code and then set the PC breakpoints 5 15 2 Event Points Event points can be used for higher level conditions such as the data condition as well as specification of the single address Up to 12 event points can be set by using event channels and range channels in the event detection system When the condition is satisfied event points are also used as the start end conditions for execution time measurement or trace acquisition in additio
210. directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder i e execute the command from the same directory as the file 4 Set the Executable return code options as described in the following section 5 Click OK to define the new command 8 2 1 Executable return code If the return code of the command s can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is option and set the two fields to the right as required If the Command has failed if the return code is option is selected then the HEW will check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If so no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed Tf the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each Consequently all commands will execute regardless 139 RENESAS 8 3 Specifying Arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments
211. dirl dir2 SETENV set VAR1 valuel set VAR2 value2 set VAR3 value3 It does not matter that CHANGEDIR and SETENV are not file names They will be treated as files that do not exist and so the commands will always be executed 433 RENESAS F 3 3 Sub command files If you wish hmake to generate a sub command file for you then the command part of the description block should be specified as follows this replaces lt commandn gt above lt command start gt lt lt lt sub commandl gt 5 gt lt sub command2 gt lt sub commandn gt lt lt lt command end gt This will generate a sub command file in the windows temporary directory which will contain the lines lt sub command1 gt lt sub command2 gt etc This command file will be deleted once the make process has completed The name of the command file will be substituted for all the text between the two lt lt s You do not have to worry about the name of the sub command file This is generated by hmake For example e dirl filel obj c dirl filel c c dirl filel h gce lt gt c o dirl filel obj c dirl filel c ne If the sub command file generated has the name c temp hmk111 cmd then the following would be executed by hmake assuming c dirl file1 obj is out of date gcc c temp hmk111 cmd The command file c temp hmk111 cmd would contain o cr dirl filel obj c diri filel c It is possib
212. dow 1 Select File gt Save All or click the save all files toolbar button Gb 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a file save dialog box will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click OK to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 3 If any of the files have been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog box will be displayed 73 RENESAS 4 3 4 Opening a File gt To open a file 1 Select File gt Open or click the open file toolbar button F or press CTRL O 2 An open file dialog box will be displayed Use the directory browser on the right to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last four files that you have opened and adds them to the file menu under the Recent Files sub menu This gives you a shortcut to opening files which you have used recently gt To open a recently used file Select the File gt Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file You can also open a file via the Projects tab of the Workspace window Either double click the file you want to open or select it click the
213. e FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyF FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonl FeedTheShark void GetClassName void sa m_nDangerous e m_nlaws E m_nSea E m_strName Globals theap_area _siptr be bs brk Navigation Project Templates Workspace amp INT Yectors he i a el wf C navigation category title Project name Class name Class Member functions Protected member variable Private member variable Global variables and functions folder Figure 13 4 C Navigation information The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are listed in the table below RENESAS 171 Figure 13 5 C Navigation Icons The navigation view allows you to move around your source code quickly and efficiently Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items definition Normally the definition is found in the source file and the declaration is found in the header file This default behavior can be modified for this action This can be achieved via the configure view dialog The configure view dialog modifies the way data in the Navigation view is displayed gt To configure the C navigation views data 1 Right click on a C navigation item in the navigation window The pop up menu displayed in figure
214. e Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located components list Select a component and click Register to register an individual component or click Register All to register all located components 6 Click Close to exit the dialog 97 RENESAS 5 3 2 Registering a Single Component The HEW allows you to navigate directly to a single component in order to register it The HEW Registration File HRF is located in the root directory of a component s installation gt To register a component 1 Click the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog A standard file open dialog will be launched with its file filter set to HEW Registration Files hrf 2 Navigate to the HRF file of the component you would like to register select it and then click Select 3 A dialog will be invoked which displays information regarding the selected tool Click Register to confirm that you want to register the tool or click Close to abort the operation 5 4 Unregistering Components The components which are registered with the HEW affect the way in which it behaves For example every compatible system tool which is registered will be added to the tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If so open the Tools Administration
215. e character as special denoting the beginning of an escape sequence embedded in the C source code In data files or text controls in dialog boxes however the double backslash is not necessary Indicates that a regular expression or subexpression is anchored at the beginning of the input string For example ab matches ab and abc but not cab Recall that is treated differently in bracket expressions 417 RENESAS Table B 1 Regular Expression Characters cont Character Meaning Indicates that a regular expression or subexpression is anchored at the end of the input string For example ab matches ab and cab but not abc Denotes alternation or the creation of a set of equally valid alternate expressions or subexpressions each of which can be matched For example ab cd matches ab or cd Matches any code unit except for those which indicate the logical end of a line 418 RENESAS Appendix C Placeholders This appendix describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the HEW components C 1 What is a Placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which is replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can take the file to edit as a parameter When invoking the editor the following s
216. e Go toolbar button E or choose Debug gt Go e Change the PC value in the Register window Refer to section 5 4 3 Modifying Register Contents e Place the text cursor not the mouse cursor to a target line in the Source or Disassembly window and choose Set PC Here from the popup menu 5 11 3 Running to the Cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may want to run only a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute You can do this using the Go To Cursor feature How to use the Go To Cursor 1 Make sure that a Source or Disassembly window is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the text cursor on the address at which you wish to stop by either clicking in the Address field or using the cursor keys 3 Choose Go To Cursor from the popup menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes 1 If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens code execution can be stopped by pressing the Esc key choosing Debug gt Halt or clicking on the Stop toolbar button 2 The Go To Cursor feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 261 RENESAS 5 11 4 Running from a Specified Address The Run Program dialog box a
217. e extensions and file groups which are defined within the current workspace File Extensions Extension Group abs Absolute file B ine Assembly include file Cancel i Assembly list file Assembly source file au C header file Hamoa C list file C source file Open with C header file C list file C so il CPU information file Fynandad ascamblhy comes fila D E M Figure 2 7 File Extensions Dialog The File Extensions list shown in figure 2 7 is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions themselves whilst on the right are the file groups Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc as shown in figure 2 8 Assembler source files C source files Library files Figure 2 8 File Extensions and Groups When creating a new extension you should consider whether the extension belongs to a group which is already defined or whether you need to create a new file group If you are adding a completely new type of file then you will want to create a new file group This process is described below 17 RENESAS To create a new file extension in a new file group Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dial
218. e group Extension belongs to an existing group Absolute file Extension belongs to a new group Text Associated application Open Text with Windows default x Add Modify Remove Figure 2 9 Add File Extension Dialog New Group RENESAS If you want to create a new extension because your project uses a different extension from those accepted by the HEW For example a phase might by default use the extension asm but the HEW only recognizes src Then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below gt To create a new file extension in an existing file group 1 Select Project gt File Extensions from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed figure 2 7 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed figure 2 10 3 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the period character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select which group you would like to add this new extension 5 Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list Add File
219. e the 8 Byte option and the display will be updated to show the 8 byte data on one line 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the popup menu and move the split up bar 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area To change the memory area displayed in the Memory window use the scroll bars To quickly look at a new address use the Format dialog box This can be opened by choosing Format from the popup menu Enter the new address value and click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the Memory window display is updated with the data at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Contents The memory contents can be modified via the Edit Memory dialog box Move the cursor on the memory unit according to the Memory window display choice that you wish to change Either double click on the memory unit or press the Enter key The dialog box shown in figure 5 21 is displayed Edit Memory Current Value FFF Cancel New Value pen Figure 5 21 Edit Memory Dialog Box A number or C C expression can be entered in the New Value field After you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key Then the dialog box closes and the new value is written i
220. eSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users gt To check in edits made to a file or files in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check In Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check In menu option 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone To undo a check out of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option 154 RENESAS 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File Although files
221. ea Memory area being accessed ROM RAM 8 or 16 bit I O 8 or 16 bit EXT external or DTC RAM not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Bus status during this cycle DTC operation PROG prefetch Data CPU data access cycle Refresh refresh cycle or DMAC DMAC cycle not available when a time stamp is acquired Clock Number of clock cycles in bus cycle as 1 to 8 To indicate more clock cycles OVR is displayed not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes A 4 bit binary number showing the four probe pins in the order of Probe 4 Probe 3 Probe 2 and Probe 1 from the left not available when a time stamp is acquired NMI Status of the NMI input not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ5 0 Status of six IRQ inputs not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Time stamp of the record Time stamps start from zero each time the user program is executed The timer resolution depends on the time stamp clock rate selected in the trace acquisition only available when a time stamp is acquired Source Source program Label Label information that corresponds to the address if defined Timestamp Difference from the timestamp value shown on the previous line only Difference available when a time stamp is acquired 410 RENESAS 8 1 12 Searching for a Trace Record While using the emulator the Trace Find dialog box has the following pages Table 8 9 Trace Find Dialog Box Pag
222. ea to be 64 kbytes H 000000 to H OOFFFF 96kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 96 kbytes H 000000 to H 017FFF 128kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 128 kbytes H 000000 to H 01FFFF 192kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 192 kbytes H 000000 to H 02FFFF 256kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 256 kbytes H 000000 to H O3FFFF 384kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 384 kbytes H 000000 to H O5FFFF 512kB Sets the internal ROM area to be 512 kbytes H 000000 to H 07FFFF RAM Specify the internal RAM area size 2kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 2 kbytes H FFE800 to H7FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 4kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 4 kbytes H FFEO00 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 6kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 6 kbytes H FFD800 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 8kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 8 kbytes H FFDO00 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 12kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 12 kbytes H FFCO000 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 16kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 16 kbytes H FFBOO0 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 24kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 24 kbytes H FF9000 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF 32kB Sets the internal RAM area to be 32 kbytes H FF7000 to H FFEFBF and H FFFFCO to H FFFFFF Pin Specify the product pack
223. eates a new workspace Open a recent project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace and displays the history of the opened workspace Browse to another project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace this radio button is used when the history of the opened workspace does not remain In this section we describe the following three ways to start up the HEW e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is not in use e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is in use e Browse to another project workspace The method to create a new workspace depends on whether a toolchain is or is not in use Note that this emulator product does not include a toolchain Use of a toolchain is available in an environment where the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package has been installed For details on this refer to the manual attached to the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package 200 RENESAS 4 2 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button fe Open a recent project work Figure 4 3 Welcome Dialog Box 201 RENESAS 2 Creation of a new workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed Ad New Project Workspace Projects Debugger only E6000 Emul Workspace Name sample Proj
224. ecimal numbers After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image View window Even after the Image View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the popup menu Figure 5 100 Image View Window The memory content is displayed as an image 5 18 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 331 RENESAS 5 18 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 5 18 4 Displaying the Pixel Information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Color mode Index Color Pixel Index No 195 Position TERE Buffer Size Width CT Height aa 10 ef Image Size Width Height Figure 5 101 Pixel Information Dialog Box This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Displays the format of the image Pixel Displays color information on the pixel under the cursor in decimal notation Position Displays the cursor location as X and Y coordinates in decimal notation X X coordinate of the cursor
225. ect Name sample Directory CAH ew3 sample Browse CPU family H85 H8 300 he Tool chain None v Properties Figure 4 4 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered Directory edit box Displays the directory in which the workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory name or enter a directory name in the Directory edit box Other list boxes are used for setting the toolchain the fixed information is displayed when the toolchain has not been installed 202 RENESAS 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed 2x Mi yyyy E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Micox E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 Target type fal Targets x lt Back Finish Cancel Figure 4 5 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target for the session file used when the HEW is activated must be selected here Check the box against the target platform and then click the Next button For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debug Sessions 203 RENESAS 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator Target name y E6000 Emulator CP
226. ect by controlling revisions to its source files Figure 7 1 illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all use the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files NETWORK Figure 7 1 Version Control 129 RENESAS 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System Initially the version control sub menu will appear as shown in figure 7 2 At this time only the Version Control gt Select option is available because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace Tools Window Help Administration wie Change Toolchain Version wild version Control Select Gonfiqure ite Add File s ai E Remove File s PE A E 3a Get File s J Launch External Debugger Check Out File s 29 Launch Slave HEW amp check In File s p tat p pen Status of File s Hitachi Mapview Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface Hitachi Call Walker Figure 7 2 Version Control Sub Menu gt To select a version control system 1 Select Version Control gt Select The dialog shown in figure 7 3 will be displayed This dialog lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the desired version control system fr
227. ection describes general usage examples for the emulator For the specifications of particular products refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help The operation address of Tutorial abs attached to each product differs according to products Replace the address used in this section with the relevant address in each product after checking that it is placed on the corresponding line of the source program In this tutorial the H8S 2633 E6000 emulator is taken as an example File paths or the appearance of figures differs according to products 347 RENESAS 6 2 Running the HEW Open a workspace by following the procedure listed in section 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace Select the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2633 Tutorial Note The file path differs depending on the product Refer to section 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program Then select the file indicated below Open Workspace Look in Tuoi ss EK EB Debug_H85_2237_E6000_Emulator_cP Tutorial hws File name Tutorial hws Files of type Workspaces hws z Cancel 4 Figure 6 1 Open Workspace Dialog Box Opening this workspace automatically connects the emulator 348 RENESAS 6 3 Downloading the Tutorial Program 6 3 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program Download the object program to be
228. ed 2 Click the Add button The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field 4 Commands are added to the menu option via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information Close the Add Menu Option dialog by clicking OK 6 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK n Add Menu Option a x Option OK M yOption Cancel Commands Modify ie a Henmoye Move up sored Moye down Figure 8 4 Add Menu Option Dialog 137 RENESAS gt To remove an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and then click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK gt To modify an existing version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button beside the list The dialog shown in figure 8 4 will be displayed The title of the dialog is Modify Menu Option 3 Modify the commands as necessary and then click OK
229. ed in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp by various means including the Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corp semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a de
230. edsesdecsdresdeceseotsaaedeasssouteanesteses 197 Dee A TNE sos cs 053 sascn es ssncesesaaxccoysabedivseseassandvia tases sacssdsteetes S 197 Oo Hatdware Features viesssisycces taenu IET e EE E EEVEE EES 197 e I E LE o0 a E A S A 197 2A COCKS area en E E NEEE E EE TE 198 Dad PIODES ooreis EEE EEEE EE E EEE 198 3 4 Stack Trace Function 198 39 Online Helps erronee sasccen ssseaesshasvecssassvasacaiss A AEV adios eta taetee 198 Section 4 Preparation before Use 199 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files 199 4 2 Method for Activating HEW ccceseeceseeseeneeeeeeeeeseeaee 200 4 2 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 201 4 2 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used 205 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace 209 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 210 4 4 Debug Sessions 00 ee 212 4 4 1 Selecting a Session 212 44 2 Adding and Removing Sessions 213 4 4 3 Saving Session Information 215 4 5 Connecting the Fail ator ssie eneee r Eeo EEE KEE OE aie 216 vii 4 6 Reconnecting the Emulator jiccscccccsscss cicssescscssvets cevatess covesssvscusseancovaeatvtevesvancongdevaiesdocanciavatvs 217 4 7 Ending the Bimal ators sccciesccsssscscatvaiseccessacavorsvssacevsadas carevsivteveadaacstovasoievedascesaciseaieaaaascesaanss 217 SECHOM DS DEDUS SINE i 5 c sccssescsscsstsscsisess ssdsepiaesisszebeodsondbssdoepstosisosezagiseseossdsenseess 219 5 1 Setting the Environment for Emulatio
231. een MCU and Emulator 7 3 1 A D Converter and D A Converter s ssssessseseseseseseseseseesersrsrsrsrnrresesesssrersrerse 398 Section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product 399 8 1 Software Specifications of the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator 399 8 1 1 Target Hardware 00 eee eee sees eseteeteeeeeees 399 8 1 2 Selectable Platform sccsccsccssecsssessnessecssecsssesesees 399 8 1 3 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page 8 1 4 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Page 8 1 5 Memory Mapping Function 0 eects 406 8 1 6 Status Window os 8 1 7 Extended Monitor Function eirese ries reris ne EEEE TOE EEEE TIRE 408 xi 8 1 8 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas cece eee eects cseeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeas 409 8 1 9 Monitoring Function sss ssesiescesesissicevarse cess yack ccravssncesesieasosondsa A DEAS 409 8 1 10 Trigger Points oreore orr Kere riitaa EA EAA VEEE REER RETEA 409 8 1 11 Trace Informations oeenn is a eii 410 8 1 12 Searching for a Trace Rec rd encnscoicunnsonasnnnsereinnnsnioiei 411 8 1 13 Trace Filtering Function jcc estcnccarseoscenssnsecenosoencsrosesecesvsenscecanasesasvacnssaviasnccanyeees 412 8 2 Notes on Usage of the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator cece cece teeeeeneteeeenee 414 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program eee 414 8 2 2 I O Register Differences between the Actual MCU and the Emulator
232. efault Debug Format lt none gt v Download Modules Form Add Offset Address Remove Modify Down Cancel i Figure 4 13 Debug Settings Dialog Box Target Page 2 Select the product name to be connected in the Target combo box 3 Select the format of the load module to be downloaded in the Default Debug Format combo box then register the corresponding download module in the Download Modules list box 4 Click the Options tab 210 RENESAS Debug Settings DetautSession Target Options ie sample Command batch file load timing Jat target connection Command Line Batch Processing emoyE us us Eoo I Connect up to target on debug go V Download modules after build T Reset CPU after download module Cancel Figure 4 14 Debug Settings Dialog Box Options Page The command chain that is automatically executed at the specified timing is registered The following three timings are available e At connecting the emulator e Immediately before downloading e Immediately after downloading Specify the timing for executing the command chain in the Command batch file load timing combo box In addition register the command chain file that is executed at the specified timing in the Command Line Batch Processing list box 214 RENESAS 4 4 Debug Sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a simi
233. egories you are not interested in seeing definitions for Click OK moe po p Go to Declaration Go to Definition Configure View Select Categories lv Allow Docking Hide Figure 13 2 C Navigation pop up menu Select Categories Ea Please select the categories to scan for C Defines C Functions Cancel C Classes lt Figure 13 3 C Navigation select categories dialog Note The navigation items are displayed gradually as the files are scanned This means it may take some time if there are many files to fully complete the Navigation view update Files are rescanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved 170 RENESAS 13 1 C Navigation component The C navigation component is the most complicated of the three supported navigation components It supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below in figure 13 4 ANIMAL 3 C Classes demo CPerson ga CCrocodile CCrocodileShark CHorse CMammal CReptile CGreatWhite amp CGreatWhitef FeedTheShark CCrocodile myGoat FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood FeedTheShark char pszOtherT yp
234. elect Save from the popup menu to open the Save As file dialog box which allows the user to save the information displayed in the Trace window as a text file A range can be specified based on the PTR number saving the complete buffer may take several minutes Note that this file cannot be reloaded into the Trace window Note In filtering of trace information the range to be saved cannot be selected All the trace information displayed in the Trace window after filtering will be saved Select a filtering range on the General page in the Trace Filter dialog box if you want to save the selected range For details on the filtering function refer to section 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information 312 RENESAS 5 16 7 Viewing the Source Window The Source window corresponding to the selected trace record can be displayed in the following two ways e Select a trace record and choose View Source from the popup menu e Double click a trace record The Source or Disassembly window opens and the selected line is marked with a cursor 5 16 8 Trimming the Source Choose Trim Source from the popup menu to remove the white space from the left side of the source When the white space is removed a check mark is shown to the left of the Trim Source menu To restore the white space choose Trim Source while the check mark is shown 5 16 9 Acquiring a Snapshot of the Trace Information A snapshot c
235. elected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line 233 RENESAS 5 4 Viewing the Registers If you are debugging at assembly language level then you will find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this by using the Register window 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window To open the Register window choose View gt CPU gt Registers or click the Register toolbar button The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general registers and the values displayed in hexadecimal 15 x ERO H 00000000 ER1 H 00000000 ERZ H 00000000 ER3 H 00000000 ER4 H 00000000 ERS H 00000000 ER6 H 00000000 ER H 00000010 PC H 000000 CER H 80 I0 IEXR H 07 lt lll Figure 5 14 Register Window 5 4 2 Expanding a Bit Register If a register is used as a set of flags at the bit level for the control of state its one character symbol rather than its state indicate each bit Double click on the register s name to display the Register dialog box and switch each bit on or off Checking the box for any bit specifies it as holding a 1 while removing the check specifies it as a 0 Register CCR Imask User Imask Half carry User Figure 5 15 Expanding a Bit Register 234 RENESAS 5 4 3 Choosing a Register to be Displayed To choose a register t
236. electing an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window gt To execute a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select whichever items you would like to apply the version control command to from the Workspace window This may include a workspace project s folder s and file s When the command is selected all of the files will be extracted from the selected items and passed in turn to the version control command For example if you select the workspace icon then all of the files in all of the projects will be passed in turn to the version control command This will include any system files For example if you select the project item then 2 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the most flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed figure 8 1 133 RENESAS ersion Control Setup Modify Remove Figure 8 1 Version Control Setup Dialog Commands Tab 134 RENESAS The Commands tab c
237. emonstration demonstrati simsessionsh 2 hsf c hew3 demonstration demonstrati Cancel Figure 6 11 HEW Workspace Auto Recovery Dialog 6 4 8 Default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Workspace dialog One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the HEW installation directory However if you would like to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces then enter the desired directory into the field or browse to it graphically via the Browse button 122 RENESAS 6 5 Using an External Editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed e Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the Output window e Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the Output window e Selecting the Open lt file gt option from the Workspace windows pop up menu e Clicking the Launch Editor toolbar button gt To specify an external editor 1 Select Tools gt Options The
238. emory Control l JV Enable read and write on the fly JV Break on access error I Enable internal ROM area write User VOC Threshold 350V 4 a gt Driver Emulator PCI Card Driver I Change driver in start up Device Figure 8 1 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page 400 RENESAS General page Device Selects the MCU to be emulated To use an MCU not included in the list select Custom to specify the functions required for this MCU See the hardware manual for details Mode Selects the MCU s operating mode Clock Selects the speed of the MCU s clock Timer Resolution Selects the resolution of the timer for use in execution time measurement The value 20 ns 125 ns 250 ns 500 ns 1 us 2 us 4 us 8 us or 16 us can be selected The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 16 us the maximum time is about 200 days When the counter overflows the maximum time possible for measurement will be displayed with prompt gt that indicates that the counter has overflowed Enable read and write on the fly When this box is checked it is possible to access the target system memory while the user program is running Do not check this box if you require realtime emulation When accessing the internal ROM internal RAM or emulation memory HEW access
239. emory addresses as byte word longword single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values However registers of different sizes are allocated to non continuous memory addresses in the I O memory To handle this memory the HEW has the IO window to facilitate checking and setting up of these kinds of registers 5 6 1 Opening the IO Window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View IO toolbar button Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed LE o Name Address Value Access l g System Control cr OOFFEDE H 8 E syscr OOFFEDES H 01 Interrupt_Controller Bus_Controller Data_Transfer_Control 1 0_Port_1 I 70 Port_3 I o_Port_4 G I 0_Port_ I 0_Port_9 I O_Port_A I 0_Port_B I 0_Port_C A TiN Dort N F gt Figure 5 29 IO Window ka HHHH HAMMAM 5 6 2 Expanding the I O Register Display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers click the mark at the left of the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the gt key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Clicking the
240. emoves the selected monitoring conditions Close Closes this dialog box 255 RENESAS 5 10 Viewing the Labels When the user program that includes the debugging information is loaded the labels are registered at that time The Disassembly window shows the first eight characters of each label instead of the corresponding address or as a part of an instruction operand Note When a label value matches an operand the corresponding instruction operand is replaced by the label If two or more labels have the same value the one that comes first in alphabetical order is displayed 5 10 1 Listing Labels Choose View gt Symbol gt Labels or click the View Labels toolbar button 2 to list all labels defined in the current debug session ixi BP Address Name H 00001000 _sbrk H 00001034 _main H 00001038 tutorial H 00001104 _abort H 0000110C __INITSCT H 00001122 loopl H o0000112C loop2 H OOOO0112E next_loopZ H 00001132 next_loopl H o00001144 loop3 H 00001152 loop4 H o0001158 next_loop4 H ooo00115C next_loop3 H 00001168 operator newlunsigned long H OOOO11BE _ CALL INIT H 000011E0 __CALL_END H oooo11E4 operator delete void H OOOO11EE _Yand H o00001226 _srand H 00001232 DIVLF3 H 00001232C not_negX v ik Figure 5 37 Label Window You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading Double clicking in t
241. enconsavscesevacencendavs cesebacencensavaseseisacsoasasasenenstacsvaegiaseneassuavedenaa se 2 6 1 Building a Project 2 6 2 Building Individual Piles cc ccssscccsssscvzscvnsceseasessegrovssenseacensedesiaverdesonsseretatons 26 2 6 3 Stopping a Build wld 2 6 4 Building Multiple Projects aot 2 6 5 The Output Window eee 28 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window o oo eee eee eeeeeeee 28 2 6 7 Displaying out of date files in the workspace window ssssssssssesesesesererererers 30 27 Mile DSPenden cies iori ernai beseds Soaesl dees OSESE EEEE ii iiare ENESE 31 2 8 Configuring the Workspace WindoW essssssssssssssrsrsrsrsesesestessressrsrsrsrsrnesenesesesrsrsrsrnt 31 2 8 1 Show Dependencies under Each File ceeeeeceeeseeceeceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeaeeeeaes 31 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes cece cceeeeecseeeesesseeesseeeeeesaeeeeaes 32 283 SHOW File Paths ipres ee aen err eqavacssosssatssoa sasensabysapuanivacpiatiecs 32 284 Sort files by m order v scccsesssseesssecesasdicsdessssedsnscsaeseoacsnecsoacsnecdsassnassenntedvesestes 33 2 9 Setting the Current Project s33 2 10 Inserting a Project into a Workspace ssesssesssesssssssssessstsestseessrensrsrsrsrsrsesenesesesrsrsrsrnt 34 2 11 Specifying Dependencies between Projects cece cseeeeecseeeeeeeseeessetseeesaeteeeeesees 35 2 12 Removing a Project from a Workspace sssesssessssssssssessstssstseesessrsrsrnrssreseseseses
242. ent Performance Analysis Properties 2 x Measurement Method PA1 unt OF Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Access Area Range Start Address H o0000000 H Start Address H o0000000 E End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 Access Type M Don t Care J DMAC F Refresh CPU Prefetch F CPU Data m DIC m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Prefetch Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 111 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Access Area Range The access range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Access Type The bus cycle on the access range to be measured Measures the number of times the range specified as the access range is accessed from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution count in the range is measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode Note Available bus cycle conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 344 RENESAS 5 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Performance Anal Measurement Met
243. enu to enter _main in the Start address edit box and ff in the End address edit box respectively and to select Byte in the Format combo box Format Byte x1 Display Value As ANSI character A Bytes Count For One Line 16 Byte Figure 6 12 Format Dialog Box Click the OK button The Memory window showing the selected area of memory is displayed usTpT Ph E S d pTpm m Figure 6 13 Memory Window RENESAS 357 6 10 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch that the values of variables used in the user program are changed For example set a watch on the long type array a declared at the beginning of the program by using the following procedure e Click the left of displayed array a in the Source window to position the cursor e Select Instant Watch with the right hand mouse button The following dialog box will be displayed Instant Watch a Ox00ffef80 long 10 Figure 6 14 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add button to add a variable to the Watch window Ox00ffefS0 lona 07 Watch3 A Watch4 Figure 6 15 Watch Window Displaying the Array 358 RENESAS The user can also add a variable to the Watch window by specifying its name e Click the Watch window with the right hand mouse button and select Add Watch from the popup
244. enus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For a detailed description of placeholders see appendix C Placeholders To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click OK to add the modified variable to the Environment tab To remove an environment variable select it and then click the Remove button Environment Yariable 24 x Variable OK pm ok Value Placeholder popup menu c dos c mytools c windows c temp Figure 5 7 Environment Variable Dialog 100 RENESAS 5 6 Uninstalling Components The HEW provides a built in uninstaller method which can remove unregistered components gt To uninstall a component 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click on the uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog is invoked figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool o KE Close Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools id hew20 exe win debug Browse IV Include subfolders Start Located Tools which can be uninstalled Component Version Installation Directory Uninstall i pip Search Status Idle Figure 5 8 Uninstall HEW Tool 3 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into
245. er etc e Extension Component a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the HEW system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support 95 RENESAS 5 1 Tool Locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location this is referred to as registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself The remainder of this chapter discusses registration and how it affects you 5 2 HEW Registration Files HRF When a HEW compatible component i e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF figure 5 2 i This file named a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the tools administration dialog figure 5 2 ii i INSTALL ii REGISTER ae C a CA i MyTool a MyTool MYTOOL HRF MYTOOL HPF bin L E bin BEN etc a etc help A help VOU Figure 5 2 HRF File Location and Re
246. er system interface cables e PC interface board e Optional SIMM memory module e Optional board The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emulator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Renesas microcomputer hereinafter referred to as the MCU This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Renesas sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Renesas sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Renesas Technology Corp including its subsidiaries hereafter collectively referred to as Renesas pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Renesas reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentation at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product
247. error is located To quickly locate a specific bug double click on a given error warning to invoke the current editor 2 6 6 Controlling the Content of the Output Window It is often useful to display extra information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Output window during a build build all or build file operation via the Tools Options dialog gt To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab figure 2 19 3 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool is executed 28 RENESAS Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network r Errors and warnings I Stop build if the number of errors exceeds 0 J Stop build if the number of wamings exceeds 0 m Show g IV Initial directory IV Environment JV Mark out of date files m Makefile build Command excluding parameters S HEWDIF hmake exe gt Browse I Use makefile build system Makefile o
248. es Page Description General Sets the range for searching Address Sets an address condition Data Sets a data condition R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Selects the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the status of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ5 0 Selects the status of six IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired The IRQ5 0 page is specific to this emulator The description is given below e IRQ5 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired I x General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ5 0 Setting IRQ5 Don t care 7 IRQ4 Don t care IRQ3 Dont care x IRQ2 Don t care x IRQ1 Dont care 7 IRQO Don t care Cancel Apply Figure 8 3 Trace Find Dialog Box IRQ5 0 Page 411 RENESAS Don t care Detects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ5 to IRQO Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High T
249. es Tab siersssirsrrscisrrerietirerisesinr risette kirE EEEE Ei EEA EE ERR 51 343 Dependent Files Tab scccsssscccsssesacsoessiensveansecesaaaseissosnsecensetinteneaabacenovdousenesesncnvanyes 53 File Mapping Sisaria e a NEENOTNO 55 Controlling the Build eseese reri oroen oaen E Ea AEE EE EER 57 Logging Build Outp tesres eresie iri ti eroien rsa EEE SENKE EEEa 58 Changing Toolchain Version sesirreessiassosseiressereerssziidirissasesiris ivs nive vdes titas r tosi teti Es 59 Using an External Deb gpeT iireerrerirrisiiisiii eitia aane iVE E EEEa 60 Generating a Makefile ss ccsssaisssetscnanaitetetvcissssve caceus asuesiesaeussveane dens nieebeivecen ai tea teense 63 Using a makefile inside the HEW system ee cceecseeeeeeseeesseeeesesaeeesseseeeeee 65 Customizing the HEW linkage order nesosita ieii 67 Using the BQator ss scssscsessesedcossosstbesestonsesseesasesesessoesesvonsesivavspays 69 The Editor WINKOW asccssecec cssnnceovseancarvsenciocstassanchtcedsessnendsasnacessgodesnesossann capudepnnebacnsceesniees 69 Working with Multiple Piles siccccsssscssssstecccsssescesavevceveenavcsssasiatevevsivcessavancevessi ceanvadexcvanavie 70 421 Mhe Editor Toolbars xis sivsss sacs eilacars ts Er EAEE EEAO 70 4 2 2 Editor Toolbar Buttons 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons 4 2 5 Templates Toolbar Buttons Standard File Operations 73 4 3 1 Creating a New File 4 3 2 Saving a File 4 3 3 Saving
250. es in the Projects tab of the Workspace window To update the dependencies select Build gt Update All Dependencies 416 RENESAS Appendix B Regular Expressions The High performance Embedded Workshop editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find or replace operation These characters are listed in table B 1 and are detailed in the following pages Table B 1 Regular Expression Characters Character Meaning Matches one or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches a aa aaa and so on Matches zero or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string a aa and so on Matches zero or one occurrence s of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string and a and and and Specify a cardinality range formed as follows m n This construct matches between m and n occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 3 matches aa and aaa This construct can also be formed using m and m The first matches m or more occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa aaa aaaa and so on The second matches exactly m occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa Create a bracket expression Bracket expressions create a set of items a
251. es the memory directly as the bus mastership is released to the emulator without breaking the user program The MCU waits for approximately 80 us while operating at 20 MHz When accessing the internal I O DTCRAM or user memory Memory is accessed with breaking the user program This pause is approximately 2 ms while operating at 20 MHz When the internal RAM is disabled an access to this area is not available during the user program execution Note When the content of the memory is modified during the user program execution e g modification in the Memory window or by the MEMORY_EDIT command HEW reads the content to update the value HEW also reads the memory content when the content has been updated by operations such as selecting Memory gt Refresh In this case the content of memory is read and then updated in each of the windows To prevent unnecessary reading of the memory content close the window displaying the memory content such as the Memory or Disassembly window or make the settings so that the content will not be updated The Monitor window or the Watch window that satisfies the conditions listed below displays the memory content Note that however opening these windows does not prevent realtime operation because the method of updating the memory content in these windows is different Conditions 1 Registered symbols are only allocated to general purpose registers 2 Registered symbols are
252. escseseeseeaeeeeaseeeseeaseessseeeeesaseetage 293 5 16 1 Opening the Trace Window 000 eee ee eceececeesecseeeesseeesesaeeecseceeeesseeetaaee 293 5 16 2 Acquiring Trace Information sessesseserserseriserisrssssrisossvissvinsvosisssssenssnsisss viesis 293 5 16 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions 0 cece eeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 295 5 16 4 Searching for a Trace Record cece eee ccescececsecseeeeseeeesesaeeecseseeeesseeeeagee 303 5 16 5 Clearing the Trace Information cece cece cece is eE 312 5 16 6 Saving the Trace Information in a File ce eee cece eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 312 5 16 7 Viewing the Source Window S 16 8 Trimming the SOGE x ccscsicsyssscccs sioesveonseciwseesshauscezcasnedezessnonsseessonesvoseoueseosesteatewess 5 16 9 Acquiring a Snapshot of the Trace Information cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeee 313 5 16 10 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition cece eee eee eeee eee ceeeeeeeeeeees 313 5 16 11 Restarting Trace Acquisition eesesesesesesesesesesresesesereseseresesesrsrsrsesrseesseesesesereses 313 5 16 12 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information 0 cece eee eect 314 5 16 13 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping eee ere eeeeeeeeeeeeee 324 5 16 14 Analyzing Statistical Information 5 16 15 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information 00 326 Viewing the Function Call History 0 c cece esiri svotasa dvorce tsr r EVE s IENA E e 327 5 17 1 Opening
253. esidential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense VI tENESAS Introduction The E6000 emulator is an advanced realtime in circuit emulator which allows programs to be developed and debugged for the H8S family microcomputers The E6000 emulator can either be used without a user system for developing and debugging software or connected via a user system interface cable to a user system for debugging user hardware High performance Embedded Workshop hereafter referred to as HEW is a Graphical User Interface intended to ease the development and debugging of applications written in C C programming language and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Its aim is to provide a powerful yet intuitive way of accessing observing and modifying the debugging platform in which the application is running HEW is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas microcontrollers The main features are e A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options via an easy to use interface e An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability e A configurable environment to run your own tools e An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application e Version control support HEW has been designed wit
254. esrsrsrsrnt 36 2 13 Loading unloading a Project into from a Workspace s ssssssssssssssssssssrssrresesesesesressesese 36 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace ssssesssssssesssssesessrsrsrsrsssrrrrnrsrnrnrnrerererererereret 37 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 User folders im the workspaces icisiccccskatissascasercdavaccsseaeatsveresassweuies tot edssecsrendencstoaerecsvossss 38 Advanced Build Features ceeceesessesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeaeenees 39 The Build Process Revisted aliissivscosssvcssiuecccssetoescscrieseonendonedtsadecsveondvesseocdvacsecedeasneeddvesten 39 Seed What isa Build ccccsscesssscscszesccsersosseronsccsnseesiasueensvosnedrssseonrsnadesvestoteouesenaesccurovesd 39 Creating a Custom Build Phase ccecssseseecseeeseeseeeceeceeceeceseeaesaeeaeeaeceeseaeeaeeaeeateaeeaees 41 Ordering Buld Phases x seceiecssecce stscateosascasepssbenacvcaacaccss paced nosasasseeasentsterdencssaasencetoasstisvaas 45 Sock Build Phase Order oiera eni a races AEEY ENEE EUNE 46 3 3 22 B ild File Phase Orders cssccsoccssrcovssecteosvnestelsvectacsveccsnecssassnedpsscsantsrectsasosdetess eases 49 Setting Custom Build Phase Options 00 cece eee cece ceeeesecseeetseeeesetaeeeesesaeeeeseeeeeaee 50 EP I OPMONS Lab 2otesscicceceszsdeoveaseccsssdevswesndeasncecssasweedussneslducsvoneseessevcyessvoueseosectlavedees 51 3 4 2 O tpit Pil
255. etting the administrator user s password ssssesesssessssssesssessstsssrersrereesssesrees 158 10 1 3 Adding new users to the system 160 10 1 4 Changing your password cccecceceeseeseseeceeceseeseeseseceeeseeaeeaeceseseeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeaeeas 161 10 1 5 Using the network HEW Service cece ccc ese eeceecseeeeeseseeessseaseesseseseeeaeeaee 161 11 Difference WiC Wiaan E RE EEEE 163 12 Technical SUPPOLt scssscstsscsaseiessdesesatsesedasesasesededesesatebesadaedageedadeseda 167 13 Navigation Tacilities cssssssesssssesesssesgsscessessessoossscossossonsdocsssondensdnese 169 13 1 C Navigation component seesererereseresesesererererererrrtsrtsreresereseseseseresererereseresesesereseree 171 13 2 C Function and defines navigation COMPONENES 0 0 0 ee eee eee cee cee caeeeeeeeeeeteeeeae 174 14 Smart EA GIGOM eraoro keea aan E U EE eE IE EEEE EI NEE EEE 175 Emulator Debugger Part Section L OVervieW goroconr ieee EA EERROR 179 1a OR Ee iE E A A E E A 179 h2 Wanit Sanonta a ENE EEE E A E NOEN L3 Environmental Conditions cscccsscsssesssccssccssccessecssccssecsseessecssecsnessseeeseesseeseeeseneseaes 1 4 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Section 2 Preparation before Use 21 Em latot Preparation cscisccsesiscsscvesssncensaisaccveusceconsaiesccvotsinconeadasscsanesadeneabecssnonssa det onbencevaaans 2 2 Installing Emulator s Software csscsssresssssseessscssressvssssecsecse
256. eveasencssavatoseveesandseaaveace Editor Column management as EBriable tooltip wateh 0s2cc3syeccccsssscseessencsstasviceees eccticsivasteaieccascasveitssinicisceiveiabiacdnevaee Tools Administration 0 eee eeeeseeseeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeesecseeeneeesesseeeneeees 95 Tool Locations onssas ins EEE EA 96 HEW Registration Files HRE 0 0 ccc cece ceceeseseeseceecseceesesseeessseeseesaseesseeeeeeeaes 96 Registern Components oreen ae rnini a a EE EEN AEN 97 5 3 1 Searching Drives for Components ssessssssssssssissssersrsrsrerersrnrsrersrnrernrnrsrsrsreret 97 5 3 2 Registering a Single Component sseseseeeseesrsesesesesesesesesesvoreroresesosesesesesesesesrsese 98 Unregistering Components Viewing and Editing Component Properties Uninstalling Components Technical Support ISSUES s 4ssscs ssisxcstsvisecsvoessxcseonesecasssan hop bessateassancssovadnetsonsnnccsnoedensscsesbors 103 On Demand COMpPONENts 45s csccccvesceavaccdeacseacsaccvassssessrscsncisuscdaessedcgtossesecesvededieosscnstenreuest s 105 Custom Project Ty Pes waveisicsesiccccassesescseideccescovsczesevasacensoveszesendeasesevevesssendsuapietaveuedeceenaeseenye 106 Customizing the Environment 00 ccc eee eee eee eee eee teeeeeeeeaeel 113 Customizing th TOO DAL gies ssscecs sae speaterts sees devsrsaviotareisnccadiesn aeeie ene ai As 113 Customizing the Tools Memu irriteer aies EEEN E E EES 116 Configuring the Help Systemes sci cvscosic
257. fic to This Product 2 6 3 Clock Oscillator The oscillator circuit has been implemented on the user system interface cable head For details on the oscillator circuit refer to the user s manual for each user system interface cable 2 6 4 External Probe 1 EXT1 Trigger Output An 8 pin connector marked EXT1 on the right under the user system interface cable connector on the emulator case accommodates four external probe inputs and two trigger outputs The pin assignment of this connector is shown in figure 2 7 OOOOQOO0OO ext GND GND bere s Tuvec Tsv Probe Trigger output Figure 2 7 External Probe Connector 1 187 RENESAS The interface circuit for the external probe 1 is shown in figure 2 8 Vcc 10 kQ O External probe 1 2 3 4 HD151015 Figure 2 8 Interface Circuit for External Probe 1 22 Q The trigger output is controlled by event channel 8 and is an active low signal The trigger output is available as either T5V within the range from 2 5 V to 5 V does not depend on the user V level or TUV the user Voc level 2 6 5 External Probe 2 EXT2 Trigger Output A 6 pin connector marked EXT2 on the left under the user system interface cable connector on the emulator case accommodates four trigger outputs The pin assignment of this connector is shown in figure 2 9 O00000 EXT2 1 2 3 4 Trigger output Figure 2 9 External Probe 2 Connector The trigger o
258. field has a placeholder button refer to appendix C Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of available placeholders figure 8 6 An explanation of each placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders User login name User login password Version control directory Comment File path name Filename File leaf File extension File directory Configuration directory Project directory Workspace directory Temp directory Command directory Windows directory Windows system directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Figure 8 6 Arguments Field Placeholder Pop up Menu 140 RENESAS Table 8 2 Arguments Field Placeholders Placeholder Value and How its Determined User login name Current user login General tab User login password Current user password General tab Version control directory Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment Comment specified before command execution File path name Full path and name of file involved in operation Filename Filename including extension of file involved File leaf Filename excluding extension of file involved File extension Extension of file involved in operation File directory Directory of file involved in operation Configuration directory Current conf
259. fies a single time stamp not available when Don t care has been checked Range Specifies a time stamp range not available when Don t care has been checked From Enter a single time stamp value or the minimum value of the time stamp range The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Not available when Don t care has been checked To Enter the maximum value of the time stamp range The format is as follows hour h minute min second s millisecond ms microsecond us nanosecond ns Only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the time stamp range the minimum and maximum time stamp values can be set in the From and To options respectively 323 RENESAS 5 16 13 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping Select Timestamp Difference from the popup menu to calculate the time difference between the two points selected by the result of tracing in acquisition of time stamp information Timestamp Difference 2 x Select 2 line First PTR 32764 Second PTR fo Timestamp difference information Timestamp Difference 0000h 000min 000s O03ms 897us 875ns Clear u x Figure 5 94 Timestamp Difference Dialog Box Select 2 line Select trace records to calculate the time stamp difference First PTR Specifies the first pointer to measure the difference The pointer of
260. file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase New Build Phase Step 1 of 4 Figure 3 3a New Build Phase Dialog Step 1 41 RENESAS The second step figure 3 3b asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build New Build Phase Step 2 of 4 21x YW What type of phase would you like to create Multiple phase The command is applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group Single phase The command is only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool is a linker lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 3b New Build Phase Dialog Step 2 The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list Selecting this list entry displays the dialog in
261. fixed by the character e g R1 PC ROL or ER3 when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory windows Available register names depend on the target MCU being emulated 5 4 7 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 236 RENESAS 5 5 Operating Memory This section describes how to control memory contents such as viewing a memory area in different formats filling and moving a memory block and loading and verifying a load module file 5 5 1 Viewing a Memory Area To look at a memory area choose View gt CPU gt Memory or click the View Memory toolbar button to open the Memory window This will open the Format dialog box shown in figure 5 18 H 000000FF Format Byte x1 Display Value As ansi character bi Bytes Count For One Line 16 Byte x Figure 5 18 Format Dialog Box Enter the range you want to display as an address value or an equivalent symbol in the Begin and End fields Select the data size and format for the display from the Display Value As and Format drop down lists respectively Select the number of bytes displayed in one line from the Bytes Count For One Line drop down list Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes an
262. four external probes e Delay cycles after an event The complex event system can be used to control the following functions of the emulator 196 RENESAS 3 2 3 Breaks Use breaks to interrupt program execution when a specified event or sequence of events is activated For example you can set up a break to halt execution when the program reads from one address and then writes to another address The break can also optionally be delayed by up to 65535 bus cycles 3 2 4 Timing You can set up two events and then measure the execution time of the program between the activation of the first event and second event 3 3 Hardware Features 3 3 1 Memory The emulator provides standard emulation memory as the substitute for on chip ROM memory and on chip RAM memory When a device type or device mode without an on chip ROM or on chip RAM is selected the standard emulation memory is disabled When debugging with only the emulator and the user program and data are stored in an external address space an optional SIMM memory module must be used The optional SIMM memory modules can be separately purchased The emulation memory can be mapped in 64 byte units to any number of separate memory blocks in the MCU address space Each memory block can be specified using the memory mapping function as user Target or emulator SIMM memory module and in each case the access can be specified as read write read only or guarded The definition of e
263. fy a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click Modify The Modify Dependent File dialog which is the same as figure 3 15 except the title will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required and then click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 54 RENESAS 3 5 File Mappings By default the files input to a phase are only taken from the project i e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog figure 3 3b If you would like a phase to take files output from a previous phase i e intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog figure 3 16 Build Phases Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Intermediate file mappings for build Source Destination _ SH Assembler OptLinker Object file SH C C Compiler SH Assembler Assembly source file SH C C Compiler OptLinker Object file SH C C Library Generator OptLinker Library file Cancel Figure 3 16 Build Phases Dialog File Mappings Tab 55 RENESAS A file mapping states that you would like the HEW to pass output files of a certain type produced by one phase referred to as the source phase to another
264. fying the conditions under which such problems arise 394 RENESAS Section 7 Hardware Specifications Specific to This Product This section describes the hardware specifications on the H8S 2612 E6000 emulator 7 1 H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator Specifications The H8S 2612 E6000 emulator supports the system development using the following microcomputers e H8S 2612 group TAA Supported MCUs and User System Interface Cables See the development support tool catalog for the MCU type names and packages supported by the E6000 emulator and for the combination of the E6000 user system interface cables and optional boards 7 1 2 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications Table 7 1 shows examples of the MCU operating voltage and frequency specifications supported by the E6000 emulator If the emulator is used in an environment that exceeds the operating voltage range and operating frequency range guaranteed for the MCU operation normal emulator operation is not guaranteed Table 7 1 Operating Voltage and Frequency Specifications Operating Frequency MCU Types Operating Voltage V o MHz H8S 2612 group 4 5 5 5 4 20 NOTE For details on the operating voltage and frequency specifications refer to the MCU s hardware manual 395 RENESAS 7 2 User System Interface All user system interface signals are directly connected to the MCU in the emulator with no buffering except for those listed below which are connected to the MCU t
265. g Box 241 RENESAS The source start address and end address selected in the Memory window will be displayed in the Begin and End fields Checking the Verify check box enables copying while comparing the copy source and copy destination The copy unit can be selected in the Format combo box Enter the destination start address in the Destination field and click the OK button or press the Enter key This will close the dialog box and copy the memory block to the new address 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area A memory area in the address space can be saved into a disk file using the memory save function Open the Save Memory As dialog box by choosing File gt Save memory e Memory As 2 xi Binary m File name A Start address H oo000000 End Address HIDOOFFFFF Cancel Access size fi Figure 5 25 Save Memory As Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the memory block that you wish to save and a name and format for the file The File name combo box contains the previous four file names used for saving memory Clicking the button can open the standard File Save As dialog box On clicking the OK button or pressing the Enter key the dialog box closes and the memory block will be saved into the disk as a file of the specified format type The access size for saving data can be selected from the Access Size drop down list When the data is saved in memory
266. g the Initial Value r Color Change Indicator Change T Foreground ME Background Cc IV Mayfly m Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED m History Figure 5 33 Monitor Setting Dialog Box 251 RENESAS Name Decides the name of the monitor window Options Sets monitor conditions Address Sets the start address for monitoring Size Sets the range for monitoring Access Sets the access size to be displayed in the monitor window Auto Refresh at rate ms Sets the interval for acquisition by monitoring 500 ms at minimum Reading the Initial Value Selects reading of the values in the monitored area when the monitor window is opened Color Sets the method to update monitoring and the attribute of colors Change Indicator Selects how to display the values that have changed during monitoring available when Reading the Initial Value has been selected No change No color change Change Color is changed according to the Foreground and Background options Gray Those data with values that have not been changed are displayed in gray Appear A value is only displayed after changed Foreground Sets the color used for display available when Change has been selected Background Sets the background color available when Change has been selected Mayfly A check in this box selects restoration of the color of those data which have not been u
267. gistration In order to use a component with HEW it must first be registered The Tools Administration dialog figure 5 1 shows all currently registered components To access it ensure no workspaces are open and then select Tools gt Administration If you attempt to access tools administration when there is a workspace open the tools administration dialog is opened but cannot be modified When HEW is installed by default any new tools are automatically registered HEW stores tool information in a tool database file By default this is created in the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location gt To change the tools location 1 Select Tools gt Administration 2 Click the Modify button for the Current HEW tools database location field 3 Select the directory under which the new tool is located then click OK 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location this is achieved by using the scan disk or register tool functionality 96 RENESAS 5 3 Registering Components The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last time it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself 5 3 1
268. gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 P_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010se p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt sS a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de P_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 Ox000010f6 delete p_sam Ox000010fc Figure 6 8 Source Window Break Status 353 RENESAS The user can see the cause of the break that occurred last time in the Status window e Select Status from the CPU submenu of the View menu After the Status window is displayed open the Platform sheet and check the Status of Cause of last break H88 2237 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Emulator PCI Card Driver CPU H8572237 Mode z Clock source Main 10MHz Sub 32kHz Run status Break Cause of last break PC Break Event Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms O00us 000ns Run Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms 9329us 625ns Figure 6 9 Status Window Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 354 RENESAS 6 7 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Event window e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu The Event window is displayed Select the Breakpoint sheet x Program Enable PC H 00001070 Tutorial cpp 44 Break A
269. guration Configure J Change driver in start up Figure 5 3 Driver Details Dialog Box Driver Selects the driver that connects the HEW and the emulator Details Sets the details of the driver being connected Interface The name of the interface to be connected This should not be changed in this emulator Channel Channel for the selected interface This should not be changed in this emulator Configuration Driver setting Configure A dialog box for setting will be displayed when the driver supports the configuration dialog Note that this item is not available with this emulator Change driver in start up Checking this box selects the driver when the emulator is connected the next time 222 RENESAS 5 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box Selecting Options gt Emulator gt Memory Resource or clicking the Emulator Memory Resource toolbar button opens the Memory Mapping dialog box Memory Mapping System Memory Resources Erm To Mapping Add SIMM Module ST OTE eo aes 1MB SIMM fitted ser Guarde Modity Ram Bases QOFFBO00 OOFFEFBF On Chip Read write Moai D not used OOFFEFCO OOFFF FF User Guarded 1 not used OOFFF800 OOFFFFFF On Chip Read write Reset 2 not used 3 not used Close Target Device Configuration 00000000 OOO3FFFF Internal ROM OOFFBOO0 OOFFEFBF Internal RAM OOFFFS800 OOFFFF3F
270. gure 5 108 Time Of Specified Range Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Address to start measurement End Address Address to end measurement Measures the execution time and the execution count in the range between the start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch in the range specified between the start and end addresses and then stops with a detected program prefetch out of the specified range Measurement can be restarted with a detected program prefetch in the specified range The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured does not include the time spent while being called from the specified range 340 RENESAS 2 Start Point To End Point Measurement Point Performance An Count m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Measurement Method PA1 Start Point To End Point Measurement Range Name PA1 Start Address H 00000000 End Address JH o0000000 Time Out ooh OOmin 00s O00ms OO0us O00ns m Cancel Figure 5 109 Start Point To End Point Measurement Settings Range Name Point Start Address End Address Time Out Count The name of the range to be me
271. h two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use RENESAS About This Manual This manual is comprised of two parts HEW Part and Emulator Debugger Part HEW Part Information on the basic look and feel of the HEW and customizing the HEW environment and detail of the HEW s build function Emulator Debugger Part Preparation before use E6000 emulator functions debugging function tutorial and hardware and software specifications of the E6000 emulator This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Table 1 Typographic Conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option Bold text with gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C U
272. hases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 49 RENESAS 3 4 Setting Custom Build Phase Options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a menu option on the Options menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be invoked depends upon whether the custom phase selected was a multiple or single phase according to the selection of phase type in figure 3 3b LA rx Debug x Options Output Files Dependent Files hewtest aj Command ag C source file P _hew files Dostiwindows executables CMDLINE EXE E hewtest c initsct c Options ia FULLFILE vecttbl c _ Default Options E hewtest1 E hewtest2 B ie hewtest3 Bae ma de Placeholder hewtest3 c E initsct c S Fie path name x Insert B intprg c sbrk c 7 ET Figure 3 10 Custom Options Dialog The dialog in figure 3 10 is a custom phase options dialog The implementation of which is slightly different depending on whether you are using a multiple or single shot phase On the left hand side is the project and file list It is possible to select multiple projects and files in the same way as
273. he Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Add Files from the pop up menu see figure 2 3 or press INS when the Workspace window is selected Open dbsct c Build dbsct c Build Options gt Add Files INS Remove Files Exclude Build dbsct c version Control gt Configure View Show Differences iv Allow Docking Hide Properties Figure 2 3 Projects Tab Pop up Menu 2 The Add dialog will be displayed 3 Select the file s that you want to add and then click Add 13 RENESAS There are a number of other ways to add new files to the project These are described below e Clicking right button on an open file in the editor window displays a pop up menu option figure 2 4 If the file is already in the project then the Add File to Project menu option is disabled Selecting the Add File to Project then adds the file to the current project Build File dbsct c Instant Watch Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Gir Add File To Project Find Ctrl F Find In Files F4 Replace Ctrl H Goto Line Ctrl G Match Braces Shift Ctrl M Bookmarks gt Templates Toggle Breakpoint F9 p Enable Disable Breakpoint GHI FS Define Column Format Columns Li Go To Cursor Set PC Here Display PC Go To Disassembly Figure 2 4 Editor Window Pop up Menu e In
274. he BP column can set or clear a software breakpoint at the start of the function 256 RENESAS 5 10 2 Adding a Label Choose Add from the popup menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label Add Label 2x i Address fHoooo0000 x Cancel Figure 5 38 Add Label Dialog Box Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 5 10 3 Editing a Label Choose Edit from the popup menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label _main MEI we pn OOOO Address fHo00007 01 2 7 Cancel Figure 5 39 Edit Label Dialog Box Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 257 RENESAS 5 10 4 Deleting a Label To delete a label select the label and choose Delete from the pop
275. he configuration is selected l Release Release Figure 2 15 Toolbar Selection or 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations This will invoke the Build Configurations Dialog figure 2 16 Build Configurations 24 xi Build configurations Current configuration Debug 7 Figure 2 16 Build Configurations Dialog 2 Select the configuration that you want to use from the Current configuration drop down list 3 Click OK to set the configuration 24 RENESAS 2 5 2 Adding and Deleting Configurations You can add a new configuration by copying settings from another configuration or delete a configuration These three tasks are described below gt To add a new configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog will be invoked figure 2 17 Add Configuration x Configuration name MyContfig Cancel Based on configuration Debug 7 Configuration directory c hew demo demo MyContig Figure 2 17 Add Configuration Dialog 3 Enter the new configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of existing configurations from which you want to copy a configura
276. he file s which you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder then the system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file to the file list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project 2 Click the Add Files toolbar button ies or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add Files menu option When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only To check that the add files operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project 1 Select the project folder whose files you want to check 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Status of Files menu option 3 The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project if the file is checked out and if it is checked out who did so 152 RENESAS 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following 8 operations are available e Add a file to version control e Remove a file from version control e Get a
277. he item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes to a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them Expansion Watch loj x indicator EA a i OxOOffef80 Eee wath R 0 H OOOOOHE OxO0ffefS0 long R 0 H 000015fb OxO0ffefd long R 2 H 0000167e 0x00ffef88 long R 3 H 00001 cfb OxO0ffefSe long R 4 H 00002781 0x00ffef30 long R I H OO003654 OxOOffef34 long R 8 H 000041c6 Ox00ffef93 long R 7 H 0000446b Ox00ffefSc long R 8 H 000059e2 0x00ffefa0 long R 9 H 0000794b Ox00ffefad long Collapsed watch R a Ox0Offef80 long 10 Figure 5 55 Expanding a Watch Item To collapse an expanded watch item double click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign The watch item can be expanded for the number of levels when a numerical key from to 9 is pressed while a watch item is selected 275 RENESAS Editing a Watch Item s Value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function gt Editing a watch item s v
278. he status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 8 1 13 Trace Filtering Function While using the emulator the Trace Filter dialog box has the following pages Table 8 10 Trace Filter Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the range for filtering Address Sets address conditions Data Sets data conditions R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is not acquired Status Sets the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is not acquired Probes Selects the states of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is not acquired IRQ5 0 Selects the states of six IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is not acquired Timestamp Specifies the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired The IRQS5 0 page is specific to this emulator The description is given below 412 RENESAS e IRQ5 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes IRQ5 0 m Setting IRQ5 Don t care IRO4 Don t care 7 IRQS Don t care 7 IRQ2 Don t care 7 IRQ1 Don t care 7 IRGO Dont care x Cancel Apply Figure 8 4 Trace Filter Dialog Box IRQ5 0 Page Don t care De
279. hide any column not necessary in the Trace window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again 294 RENESAS 5 16 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions The capacity of the trace buffer is limited When the buffer becomes full the oldest trace information is overwritten Setting the trace acquisition condition allows acquisition of useful trace information and effective use of the trace buffer The condition is enabled by the event point to control starting stopping and ending the trace acquisition For event points refer to section 5 15 Using the Event Points The trace acquisition condition is set in the Trace Acquisition dialog box that is displayed by selecting Acquisition from the popup menu The Trace Acquisition dialog box has the following pages Table 5 4 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Pages Page Item General Sets trace acquisition conditions Stop Sets trace stop conditions without a delay Delayed Stop Sets trace stop conditions with a delay 1 to 4 Sets the range trace only available when the free trace mode is disabled 1 General page Sets trace acquisition conditions Trace Acquisition 2 x General Stop DelayedStop 1 2 3 4 m Suppress Time Stamp F I
280. hod PA1 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Call Range Start Address H o0000000 E Start Address H o0000000 El End Address H ooo00000 End Address fH ooo00000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 112 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Call Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected subroutine Start Address Start address End Address End address Measures the number of times the range specified as the call range is called from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution time in the specified range can be measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected subroutine 345 RENESAS 5 20 3 Selecting the Address Detection Mode and Resolution In measurement of hardware performance there are two types of address detection modes prefetch address detection mode and PC address detection mode Select the appropriate address detection mode according to the measurement mode in use The resolutio
281. hortcut could be made e g c myedit myeditor exe c files file1 c if you wanted to open FILE1 C from the directory c files However what happens if you want the HEW to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open the file that I have chosen at that time To do this you can replace the specific name of the file for a general placeholder i e c myedit myeditor exe FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file it knows that it has to replace FULLFILE with the file you have selected C 2 Inserting a Placeholder Placeholders can only be entered into three specific edit fields within the HEW figures C 1 C 2 and C 3 There are four ways a placeholder can be entered In the first example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder and then select the required placeholder from the popup menu to the right of the edit field File fe project mpyproject ouput file out gt Figure C 1 Placeholder Popup Menu In the second example select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the combo box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder If you select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field Relative to Configuratio
282. hrough control circuits e NMI e RESET e MD2 MD1 MDO e XTAL e EXTAL e STBY e WAIT 7 2 1 Signal Protection All user system interface signals are protected from over or under voltage by use of diode arrays except for the AVcc and Vref The Vcc pins except for the AVcc pin at the head of the user system interface cable are connected together The emulator monitors the voltage level of the Vcc pins and displays the power supply status in the Extended Monitor window 7 2 2 User System Interface Circuits The interface circuit between the MCU in the emulator and the user system has a signal delay of about 8 ns due to the user system interface cable And high impedance signals will be pulled up to the high level by pull up resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware to compensate for propagation delays Default O User system interface cable Figure 7 1 Default User System Interface Circuit 396 RENESAS Mode Pins MD2 MD1 and MD0 NMI WAIT and STBY The NMI signal is input to the MCU through the emulator control circuit The rising falling time of the NMI signal must be 8 ns V or less The mode pins are only monitored The CPU mode depends on the configuration settings of the HEW Emulator User system control k interface cable circuit Figure 7 2 User System Interface Circuit for MD2 MD1 MD0 NMI WAIT and STBY
283. ht information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 6 0 1 0 Properties 2 xi General Information Environment Information High performance Embedded Workshop SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain Ver 8 0 1 0 SuperH RISC engine C C Library Generator Ver 3 0 01 SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler Ver 8 0 02 Cancel Figure 5 5 Properties Dialog Information Tab Note that if the tool has a compatibility issue the problem may be reported in this information edit field 99 RENESAS Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings figure 5 6 This dialog is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 8 0 1 0 Properties General Information Environment Environment variables PATH D Hew3 T ools Renesas Sh 8_0_1 bin SHC_INC D Hew3 T ools Renesas Sh 8_0_1 include SHC_LIB D Hew3 T ools Renesas Sh 8_0_1 bin Modif SHC_TMP C DOCUME 1 ADMINI 1SLOCALS 14 Temp EA Figure 5 6 Properties Dialog Environment Tab To add a new environment variable click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 5 7 will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment tab Placeholder pop up m
284. iaht Size Pixel Top Width 0 0 Bottom Height Figure 5 99 Image Properties Dialog Box The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image View window 329 RENESAS The following items are to be specified Color Information Mode Bit Pixel Sampling Format Buffer Information Data Address Palette Address Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Specifies the format MONOCHROME Black and white RGB BGR YCbCr R red G green and B blue B blue G green and R red Y luminance Cb color difference for blue and Cr color difference for red Specifies bits pixel valid when RGB or BGR is selected Specifies the format of sampling valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies chunky planar valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Specifies the first address in memory of the area for display as image data in hexadecimal notation Specifies the first address in memory of the color palette data in hexadecimal notation valid when 8Bit has been selected for RGB or BGR Width Height Size Specifies the width and height of the image View Information View Mode Start Position Position 330 Width Pixel Height Pixel Buffer Size Specifies the width
285. ialog Font Tab 86 RENESAS 4 11 Syntax Coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings i e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for a C source files text files map files or even your own files gt To change existing colors 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the item underneath the icon in the tree you wish to modify the colour for This should be the file type e g C source file and correct keyword group e g identifier or pre processor 3 Select the Colour tab Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The color SYSTEM refers to the current window foreground and background settings in control panel 5 Click OK for the new colors to take effect gt To create new keyword groups 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the file type in the tree to which you wish to add the new keyword group 3 Click Add underneath the tree The Add Category dialog box will be displayed figure 4 11 Enter the name of the keyword group in the Category Title field then click OK to create
286. ick the clear all bookmarks toolbar button Ind Printing a File To print a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window 2 Select File gt Print or click the print toolbar button or press CTRL P RENESAS 4 8 Configuring Text Layout The following sections detail how to set up the layout of the text within the editor windows 4 8 1 Page Set up When you print a file from the High performance Embedded Workshop editor the settings in the print dialog box affect the way in which the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the page set up option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder gt To set up the page margins 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked figure 4 6 2 Enter into the edit fields the margins required set the inch or mm radio buttons to set the measurements 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect TT 2x Margins Let E Bight jo Top p Bottom p Inch C mm Header fi Footer gt IV Wrap Text Cancel
287. iew 91 RENESAS 4 12 4 Brace Matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within an if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a match brace feature which highlights text between braces of type and gt To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Click the match braces toolbar button press SHIFT CTRL M select Edit gt Match Braces or select Match Braces from the local menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more to match 92 RENESAS 4 13 Editor Column management The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by debugger feature You can choose the column to display undisplay A include lt no_float h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt math h gt include lt stdlib h gt void main void void sort long a void change long a extern void srand unsigned int 0x00000a0c void main void 0x00000a16 lt long a 16 min max long j int i 0x00000a18 srand 1 0x00000a20 gt I printf
288. iguration directory Project directory Current project directory Workspace directory Current workspace directory Temp directory Temporary directory Command directory Version control executable directory Windows directory Directory where Windows is installed Windows system directory Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name Current workspace name Project name Current project name Configuration name Current configuration name 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever get the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings The latter tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map to which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 7 141 RENESAS ersion Control Setup 21x Commands Projects General Show details
289. igure 2 21 ii If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies figure 2 21 i Workspace EER E E Demo E E Demo B amp B amp B Assembly source file B Assembly source file E lowlvl ste E lowlvisre Gg C source file Sa C source file 2 dbsct c E dbset c Demo c Demo c E intprg c 2 intpra c 2 lowsre c B vecth resetpra c a E lowsre c 2 sbrk c E lowsre h E vecttbl c E resetprg c Dependencies stacksct h E lowsre h E E sbrk c E sbrk h E sbrk h stacksct h E E vecttblc vect h E vecth niee erie tn Figure 2 21 Dependencies under Each File 31 RENESAS 2 8 2 Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown figure 2 22 i For example in C code if you write an include statement such as include lt stdio h gt then stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes option figure 2 22 ii Devote BBE i ewan RGIED 3 Assembly source file 3 6 Assembly source file 2 cO ste 2 cO ste 3 6 C source file 3 6 C source file E hwefg c E hweta c 2 inty c inty c 2 mainc main c E sbrk c sbrk c Dependencies ependencies stddef h E stdio h Gy Projects
290. ild tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file then the error will be displayed in the build tab along with the source file name and line number To quickly locate a problem double click on the error to jump to the source file and line Lex Build A Debug A Find in Files A Version Control 7 Figure 1 19 Output Window The Debug tab shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window RENESAS The Find in Files tab displays the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit gt Find in Files menu option the toolbar button For further details on how to use find in files refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor The Version Control tab displays the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control refer to chapter 7 Version Control 1 2 7 The Status Bar The status bar displays information as to the current state of the HEW Figure 1 20 shows the eight sections of the status bar Displays HEW status messages Virtual desktop Read only status Line number Insertion mode Num Lock Column number Caps Lock E Default1 desktop Read write 62 87 4 ins NUM 4 Figure 1 20
291. ime Out and Count are selected satisfaction of either of these options stops execution of the user program performance break 3 Only channel can be used for Time Out and Count Use other channels if you do not want to select Time Out or Count in the Start Point To End Point Measurement mode 342 RENESAS 3 Start Range To End Range Measurement Performance Analysis Properties Measurement Method PA1 Start Range To End Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Start Range End Range Start Address H o0000000 E Start Address H o0000000 al End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 5 110 Start Range To End Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Start Range The start range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address End Range The end range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Starts measurement with a detected prefetch cycle in the specified start address range and then stops with a detected prefetch cycle in the specified end address range The execution count is incremented every time the program passes the end address range 343 RENESAS 4 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurem
292. in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test and marching test for the dual port RAM in the E6000 normal completion 447 03 Testing Firmware RAM A Decode Test page H 700 H 71f B Marching test page H 700 H 71f 04 Testing Trace memory A Decode Test page H 000 H 04f Lower 32K B Marching test page H 000 H 04f Lower 32K C Decode Test page H 000 H 04f Upper 32K D Marching test page H 000 H 04f Upper 32K 05 Testing Map control memory A Decode Test page H 200 H 27f B Marching test page H 200 H 27f 06 Testing Internal ROM and RAM A Decode Test Internal ROM 0 3 32323 4 4 5 4 44 8 4044 4 B Marching test Internal ROM C Decode Test Internal RAM ccc2 5 2s 00 449 D Marching Test Internal RAM 07 Testing Option RAM No option memory board fitted test skipped 08 Testing Emulation RAM STEP Operation Ay SESS Operation EEEE EEEE EEE EE EEE EEEE noes eS 448 RENESAS OK OK OK OK Shows the results of decoding test for the firmware RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the firmware RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test for the trace RAM first half in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the trace RAM first half i
293. incorrectly First click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups 21x Address Section Name OOFFB800 OOFFBSDB Cancel Figure 5 50 Overlay Dialog Box Highest Priority Section Group Selected After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 270 RENESAS 5 14 Viewing the Variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 5 14 1 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch feature gt To use Tooltip Watch Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine a tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable amp P_sam nev Sample gt for i 0 i lt 1
294. intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Renesas Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Renesas cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk Ill RENESAS SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS A This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate inj
295. is Close Closes this dialog box All the results displayed in the Result list will be cleared 325 RENESAS This dialog box allows the user to analyze statistical information concerning the trace information Set the target of analysis in Item and the input value or character string by Start and End Click the Result button after setting a condition by pressing the New or Add button to analyze the statistical information and display its result in the Result list Note In this emulator only PTR can be set as a range Each of other items must be specified as a character string In analysis of statistical information character strings are compared with those displayed in the Trace window Only those that completely match are counted Note however that this test is not case sensitive The number of blanks will not be cared either 5 16 15 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information To extract function calls from the acquired trace information select Function Call from the popup menu The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Function Call Display Setting Enable to display trace information with function call only amp i C Disable OK Cancel Figure 5 96 Function Call Display Dialog Box Setting Selects whether or not to extract function calls Enable Extracts function calls Disable Does not extract function calls When
296. is not detected Probe2 Detects the status of the input probe signal 2 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected 287 RENESAS Probe Detects the status of the input probe signal 1 High Detects the high level of the input probe signal Low Detects the low level of the input probe signal Don t care The status of the input probe signal is not detected 4 Action page Use this page to decide what action the emulator takes when the defined event occurs Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action Actions Vv T Start Timer I Stop Timer Delay after detection before break occurs oo bus cycles Required number of event occurrences ee Configure Sequence T Enable Sequencing Figure 5 64 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Action Page Action Selects an action that occurs when the event is satisfied This cannot be used for an event point being used as the trace acquisition condition Break Causes a break stop in the user program when the event occurs This is the default action Start Timer Starts the run timer the run timer value is displayed in the Status window Stop Timer Stops the run timer the run timer value is displayed in the Status window Delay after detection before b
297. ister F F LELY F C Project Generators C Project Generators Custom E Version Control System a j kh E f Custom VCS 2 0 gt Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 3 0 Search disk Toolchain Support Bp Hes H8 300 Tooichan n Supporter 25 Tool information Uninstaller V Show all components Current HEW tools database location Hew Modify Figure 5 11 All Components Shown puree E When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The properties dialog that will be invoked behaves in the same way as discussed previously in this chapter with the exception that there is no Environment tab The HEW also has a feature which outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information on the entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW gt To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A standard windows file save dialog is displayed 3 Choose the file location and click OK 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the HEW
298. itable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Then choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR New Custom Placeholder x Placeholder Cancel Description Directory Figure 6 15 New Custom Placeholder Dialog 126 RENESAS 6 8 Using the workspace and project log facilities The HEW 3 0 has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Tools customize dialog This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names and changes are logged to this file This dialog is shown in figure 6 16 When the workspace log is clicked any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same name as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the generate log for projects log is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file is updated when the workspace is saved 2x Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help I Generate workspace log
299. item in HEW allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and style of the project generation wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog and are initially hidden in the system components part of the tools administration tree To export one of the custom project generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog The execution environments of the custom project generators are packaged on the execution file that can be installed When this file is executed on the target user s machine the custom project generator is installed Once created custom project type will then appear in the New workspace dialog and can be used to create identical copies of your project gt To create custom project generator 1 Open the workspace that contains the project you wish to convert into a custom project generator 2 Set the project you wish to convert as the current project 3 Click the Project gt Create project type menu item 4 The following dialog is displayed What title would you like to be used for the new project type CuntentProjectName Projects generated using the new type will include all of the files in the project directory and below Would you like to include the contents of the configuration directories
300. ition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified bus condition String Select a bus condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available bus conditions vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 309 RENESAS 7 Probes page Select the status of four probe signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired CT xi General Address Data RAW Area Status Probes Razo TD r Setting Probe4 Dont care 7 Probe3 Don t care Probe2 Dont care 7 Probel Dont care x Cancel Apply Figure 5 82 Trace Find Dialog Box Probes Page Don t care Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified probe signal condition Probe4 to Probe Select probe conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The status of the probe signal is low 310 RENESAS 8 IRQ7 0 page Select the status of IRQ signals The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter General Address Data RAw Area Status Probes IRQ7 0 IRQ Dontcare Ings Dontcare z IRQ5 Don t care IRQ4 Don t care IRG3 Don t care IRG2 Don t care IRQ1 Don t care
301. kspace tab Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network IV Restore files on opening workspace I Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace Save workspace before executing any tools J Prompt before saving workspace IV Prompt before saving session IV Save Auto Recovery info every fio minutes Default directory for new workspaces D Hews Browse Figure 6 9 Options Dialog Workspace Tab The following sections explain the options available on this tab 119 RENESAS 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up Set this check box if you would like the High performance Embedded Workshop to automatically open the last workspace you opened when it is launched 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores which files were open When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when you open a workspace then set this check box 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what was contained within each workspace To help resolve this the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace gt To enter a workspace descrip
302. kspace radio button and click the OK button m Options OK BX C Create a new project workspace Dom lkt 2 Open a recent project workspace Administration z Figure 4 11 Welcome Dialog Box 2 The Open Workspace dialog box is displayed Select a directory in which you have created a workspace After that select the workspace file hws and press the Open button Open Workspace Lookin S sme deag sample File name sample hws Files of type Workspaces hws z Cancel 4 Figure 4 12 Open Workspace Dialog Box 3 This activates the HEW and recovers the state of the selected workspace at the time it was saved When the saved state information of the selected workspace includes connection to the emulator the emulator will automatically be connected To connect the emulator when the saved state information does not include connection to the emulator refer to section 4 5 Connecting the Emulator 209 RENESAS 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation When the emulator is activated the command chain can automatically be executed It is also possible to register multiple load modules to be downloaded The registered load modules are displayed on the workspace window 1 Select Debug Settings from the Options menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box Debug Settings Detauks ession ba Target Options amp sample Target i D
303. kspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace a project named project is located at c hew workspace project a configuration named debug has a configuration directory located at c hew workspace project debug HEW EXE is installed in c hew a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located at c hew toolchain hitachi sh 5 11 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the option setting dialogs of the Options menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog the Windows operating system is installed in c Windows and the Windows system directory is c Windows System a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable and c project is mapped to x vc project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 422 RENESAS Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placeholder has no meaning when specifying a dependent files location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version co
304. l 157 RENESAS 10 1 1 Enabling network access gt To use network access 1 Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed 2 Select the network tab This is displayed in figure 10 2 3 Click the enable network access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrator has the highest level of access 4 Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog until this is completed This is described below 10 1 2 Setting the administrator user s password gt To set the password 1 Continue from the previous sections steps Click the password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled The password dialog is displayed This is shown in figure 10 3 The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin Type the new password into both of the fields and click OK This should set the user and password on the Tools gt Options network tab It is now possible to leave the Tools gt Options dialog la Oy A a a When the dialog is closed you are asked if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost 9 When
305. l be put on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build 2 2 4 Including a Project File in Build An excluded file can be included in the project again To include a file which has been excluded from build 1 Push the right mouse button on a file which has been excluded from build on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select Include Build file where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu Then a red cross will be removed from the file s icon and the file will be included in build RENESAS 2 3 File Extensions and File Groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools which are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and be used as input to the compiler phase figure 2 1 Typical Build Process Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog figure 2 7 This is invoked by selecting Project gt File Extensions This dialog displays all of th
306. l debugger except on the HDI or the PD debugger 1 Sets the location of the external debugger executable 2 Sets the command line option This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behavior of the external debugger 3 Sets the location of the download module Customize 2 x Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Leg Help External debugger selected termal debugger m Debugger settings External debugger location ee Command line options gt Download module Po Browse Cancel Figure 3 22c External debugger selected External debugger except on the HDI or the PD debugger Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button to invoke the external debugger Al After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to the debugger to enable immediate debugging Whilst using the debugger double clicking in any source window will switch back to the HEW with the source file open at the line which was double clicked This operation is not possible with the Other external debugger 62 RENESAS 3 10 Generating a Makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile which can be used to build parts of your workspace without HEW This is particularly useful of you want to send a project to a user who does not have the HEW or if you want to version control an entire build including the make components
307. l information dialog figure 3 21 will show you the information of the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog SH C C Compiler Information 2 x Information High performance Embedded Workshop SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler Ver 8 0 01 c 1992 2002 Renesas Technology Corp c 1992 2002 Hitachi Software Engineering Co Ltd Figure 3 21 Toolchain Information Dialog 59 RENESAS 3 9 Using an External Debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Customize dialog figure 3 22a figure 3 22b figure 3 22c is where the external debugger related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting Tools gt Customize and then selecting the Debugger tab The first choice to make is which debug tool you would like to use from the External debugger selected drop down list Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 x or greater Use the HDI Mitsubishi PD debugger Use the PD debugger Other external debugger Use the other debugger Non selected Not use the external debugger Once this has been selected the external debugger must be configured 2 To use the HDI 1 Sets the location of the HDI exe
308. lar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each target platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary program rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project Debug sessions are described in detail below 4 4 1 Selecting a Session The current session can be selected in the following two ways e From the toolbar Select a session from the combo box figure 4 15 in the toolbar e bes os al A Figure 4 15 Toolbar Selection e From the dialog box 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions This will open the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 x Debug sessions oo DefaultSession Sessionyyyy_E6000_Emulator_CP Cancel Sessiomoox_E6000_Emulator_CP Add Remove VE as Properties Current session DefaultSession Figure 4 16 Debug Sessions Dialog Box 2 Select the session you want to use from the Current session combo box 3 Click the OK button to set the session 212 RENESAS 4 4 2 Adding and Removing Sessions A new session can be added by copying settings from another session or removing a session e To add anew empty session Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display
309. le Smart edit for C files should be checked 4 Click OK 2x Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network m Spacing Tab size 4 IV Enable auto indentation r General IV Save files before executing any tools IV Show files in notebook J Prompt before saving files I Enable syntax coloring IV Enable Smart edit for C files I Enable tooltip watch m External editor Tl Use extemal editor Modify Figure 14 1 Options Dialog Editor Tab With this option switched on if you are working on a C file the smart edit capability should be enabled Note If the C Class navigation category has been switched off the Smart edit capability of HEW will not be active During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible gt If you are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press 175 RENESAS return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure 14 2 If you are trying to use a C function then the dialog in Figure 14 3 is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This dia
310. le to include more than one command in the description block and to use combinations of the standard and sub command file commands 434 RENESAS F 4 Comments A character signifies a comment When this character appears as the first character on a line the rest of the line up until the next new line character is ignored There follows examples of valid comments My hmake file Variable declaration OUTPUT c dirl filel obj Descriptor OUTPUT c dirl filel c c dirl filel h set VARI1 valuel gt gcc c dirl filel c A comment must occupy its own line in the hmake file It is not possible to put comments on the end of other statements F 5 Message commands The message command is used to output a line of text to standard out whilst a make file is executing These text lines will be output in the order they appear in the make file in amongst output from any executables being executed as appropriate No buffering of output text will take place A message command has the following syntax MESSAGE lt text to output gt A new line character is assumed to come after the last character in lt text to output gt Any white space between MESSAGE and lt text to output gt will be ignored There follows an example of a valid message command MESSAGE Executing C Compiler 435 RENESAS 436 RENESAS Appendix G Menus Table G 1 shows GUI menus Table G 1 GUI Menus Toolb
311. lect the user you wish to remove in the users list 2 3 4 Click the access rights button The dialog displayed in Figure 10 4 is displayed 5 6 Press the remove button 7 Then click OK to save the access rights changes 160 RENESAS 10 1 4 User access rights Admin Access Administrator Full read write access Read write file access only C Read only access Figure 10 4 User access rights dialog Changing your password To change your password 1 DAE a 10 1 5 Log into the HEW network database you are changing your password for Select Tools gt Options The HEW tools options dialog is displayed Select the network tab This is displayed in Figure 10 2 Click the password button Enter your new password and confirm it in the second edit box Click OK Then click OK to save the password change Using the network HEW service When you connect to a networked project for the first time the HEW automatically connects you to the correct network HEW service This is defined using machine name If the service cannot be found using the machine name in the workspace then the dialog displayed in figure 10 5 is shown Simply type or browse to the machine where the service is located and click OK If you want to be the server machine then leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine 161 RENESAS Select Server Location 2 xi
312. lick OK to define the editor Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a build file build or build all operation e If debugging the external editor will not be used 6 6 Customizing File Save The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to customize file save on the Editor tab of the Options dialog figure 6 12 To open the tab select Tools gt Options and click the Editor tab The following sections explain the options related to file save 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving edited files before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save files before executing any tools check box 6 6 2 Prompt before saving files In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 124 RENESAS 6 7 Using Custom Placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance
313. lled the complex event system This allows you to define events which depend on the state of a specified combination of the MCU signals The complex event system provides a unified way of controlling the trace break and timing functions of the emulator 3 2 1 Event Channels The event channels allow you to detect when a specified event has occurred The event can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e Address or address range e Address outside range e Read or Write or either e Data with an optional mask e MCU access type e g DMAC and instruction prefetch e MCU access area e g on chip ROM and on chip RAM e A signal state on one or more of the four external probes e A certain number of times that the event must be triggered e Delay cycles after an event Up to eight events can be combined into a sequence in which each event is either activated or deactivated by the occurrence of the previous event in the sequence For example you can cause a break if an I O register is written to after a specified area of RAM has been accessed 3 2 2 Range Channels The range channels can be set up to be triggered on a combination of one or more of the following e Address or address range inside the range e Read or Write or either e Data with an optional mask e MCU access type e g DMAC and instruction prefetch e MCU access area e g on chip ROM and on chip RAM e A signal state on one or more of the
314. llows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program Program Counter H ooo00000 Temporary PC Breakpoints Reset Go ik Cancel Figure 5 44 Run Program Dialog Box The following execution conditions can be specified in this dialog box Program Counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions 262 RENESAS 5 11 5 Single Step To debug your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the Source window then a step operation will step a single source line In the Disassembly window a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not
315. lly if you click the Browse button If you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search sub directories check box If you just want to search the single directory specified in the Directory field then ensure that this check box is not checked If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then check the Match case check box When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match case check box Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window To jump to an instance of the string double click on the desired entry in the Output window 77 RENESAS 4 5 3 Replacing Text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to replace it with other text gt To replace text in a file 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window 2 Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search 3 Select Edit gt Replace press CTRL H or select Replace from the editor window s local menu A replace dialog box will be
316. lock combo box of the Time Stamp group box on the General page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box 6 16 3 Statistics The number of times the internal RAM has been written to can be included in the acquired trace information 1 Make the setting such that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO a 0 within the tutorial function H 00001082 in this example for details on this refer to section 6 15 1 PC Break Function 2 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays trace information 3 Select Statistic from the popup menu that is displayed when you click the right hand mouse button on the Trace window A message box appears indicating that the trace data is being loaded and the Statistic dialog box will be displayed Statistic r Statistic Analysis Result Clear e Result Condition Amount PTR Figure 6 54 Statistic Dialog Box 383 RENESAS 4 Select R W in the Item combo box and enter WR in the Start edit box After that click the New button R W WR is now displayed in the Condition column of the Result list box Statistic r Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem Start Figure 6 55 Statistic Dialog Box New Condition 384 RENESAS 5 Then select Area from the Item combo box a
317. log allows you to see what functions are available for the current object Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite cJaws cJaws m_n sam _nDangerous Bm_nFins Bm_nJaws jm_nlegs m_niveinWater Bm_nlives m_nSea Figure 14 2 Smart edit member selection include greatwhite h void main void void main void CGreatWhite myfish myfish FeedTheShark int FeedTheShark CFish myFishyFood int FeedTheShark CHorse myHorseyFood int FeedTheShark CPerson myPersonFood int FeedTheShark char pszOtherType Figure 14 3 Smart edit function selection 176 RENESAS Note Smart edit auto completion may not pop up for a variety of reasons HEW can only provide help when the file has been scanned by the navigation component For this to work the file must have been saved Another issue is that defines are not considered so this means that redundant areas of code may still be visible Another important consideration is if the syntax of your code is incorrect the smart editor may not be able to parse your code correctly and the smart edit functionality will fail In this case no pop up will be displayed Please note that Smart edit does not support macro usage 177 RENESAS 178 RENESAS Emulator Debugger Part RENESAS RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 1 Features The break
318. log box is closed after setting the Debug Settings dialog box the emulator will automatically be connected b Connecting the emulator without the setting at emulator activation Connect the emulator by simply switching the session file to one in which the setting for the emulator use has been registered sample High perForman dded Workshop ioj xi Ele Edit View Project Options Tools window Help osaa eseeloTaol emi p slieate ws zeae ax ealir T fcc os S prs Z sessoren ym mio IDX S leee 62 imvea gat s FERRO OOo zix E ala DefaultSession E F sample 5 8 C source file E dbscte amp ipige 8 resetprgc E sample c E stike a Projects kis Build Debug AFindin Files Version Control Figure 4 20 Selecting the Session File In the list box that is circled in figure 4 20 select the session name including the character string that has been set in the Target name text box in figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 dialog box The setting for using the emulator has been registered in this session file After the session name is selected the emulator will automatically be connected For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debug Sessions 216 RENESAS 4 6 Reconnecting the Emulator When the emulator is disconnected use the following way for reconnection Select Build gt Debug gt Connect or click the
319. lons Pressing the Ctrl T or Ctrl J keys on the last line displays the command line previously executed 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a command file is hdc Choose Set Batch File from the popup menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without changing the setting 231 RENESAS Set Batch File 27 xi Batch File Play e I gt Browse e Cancel Figure 5 12 Set Batch File Dialog Box 5 3 3 Executing a Command File Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the popup menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution Choose Stop from the popup menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 5 3 5 Specifying a Log File Choose Set Log File from the popup menu to open the Open Log File dialog box in which a log file to store the command execution result
320. ly You can set a user V threshold in the range Vcc max 0 V by using the emulator configuration dialog box If the user V_ drops below this threshold User System Voltage in the Extended Monitor window will display Down otherwise OK is displayed CC er eae ae oa ee ane ees threshold User Vcc level OV ee e eee he ee User Vcc K threshold 2 Down 3 3 V E6000 Vcc level OV The user system interface cable is not connected Figure 2 10 Voltage Level Monitoring Example for Vcc 3 3 V 189 RENESAS 2 7 System Check When the software is executed use the procedure below to check that the emulator is connected correctly Here use the workspace for a tutorial provided on the product Refer to section 2 9 Other Methods for Activating the Emulator for the other activating method to create a new project or use a workspace for the HEW of the old version 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector of the emulator 3 Turn on the emulator 4 Activate the HEW from the Programs in the Start menu figure 2 11 ee gt EA High performance Embedded Workshop Help a High performance Embedded bala Read Me D High performance Embede Figure 2 11 Start Menu Note If LAN Driver is not selected at installation Tools is not displayed 190 RENESAS 5 The Welcome dialog box is displaye
321. m interface connector i lt Power connector External probe gt f Power switch connector Figure 2 2 E6000 Emulator Connectors 2 3 1 Example of Connecting the User System Interface Cable Head to the User System Screw x 4 User system interface cable head Figure 2 3 Example of Connecting User System Interface Cable Head to User System e Ensure that all power is off to the emulator and the user system e Insert the cable head into the socket on the user system Note Depending upon the package it may be possible to orientate this cable head in any position on the socket so care should be taken to correctly identify pin 1 on the emulator and socket when installing 184 RENESAS e Screw the cable head to the socket with the screws provided Progressively tighten the screws in the sequence shown in figure 2 4 until all are finger tight Figure 2 4 Sequence of Screw Tightening Note Be careful not to over tighten the screws as this may result in contact failure on the user system or damage the cable head Where provided use the solder lugs on the QFP socket to provide extra strength to the emulator user system connection 2 3 2 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Emulator Plug the cable body into the emulator taking care to insert it straight and push it firmly into place User system interface cable body User system interface cable head
322. m its original path at the build the source file may not be automatically found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog box to allow you to manually locate the file This path will then be used to update any other source files in this debug project 5 2 1 Downloading a Program A load module to be debugged must be downloaded To download a program select the load module from Debug gt Download or select Download from the popup menu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on the load module in Download modules of the Workspace window Note Before downloading a program it must be registered to the HEW as a load module For registration refer to section 4 3 Setting at Emulator Activation 225 RENESAS 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Code Select a source file name in the Workspace window and click Open in the popup menu to make the HEW open the source file in the integrated editor It is also possible to display your source files by double clicking on their names in the Workspace window I nx 0x00001038 void tutorial void Ox00001044 long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_sam P_sam new Sample for i 0 i lt 10 i j rand 0x00001058 f 3 lt 034 0x0000105a j j F 0x0000105c a i j 000001070 p_sam gt sort a Ox0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt s0 a 0 p_sam gt sl a 1 Figure 5 6 Source Window
323. mand Piles c ccccccsvssscscasssstscstesciscsveccdionteacseossecstebsetssteorouseseavessss 232 5 3 4 Stopping Command Execution e cee eee cece eee ceeeeeseeeeeseeeesseceseesseeeeaees 232 53 Specifying a Log HUES secs sesscssssectivesasecoetedessevecedsoonecssncavenedeasessesteussvesreneetesaerve 232 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging e eseersreesesrsrererereresestsesesertsrererererersressrererererereees 232 5 3 7 Entering Full Path to the Filbussnonsnoneoiciniannaninn n 232 5 3 8 Pasting Placeholder ce isc sesvescacsssasiaseveaseacesstasecevostoasssoanea lexevseaceroaanceneaaenesvaases 233 5 4 Viewing the Registers 234 5 5 5 6 viii 5 4 1 Opening the Register Window 234 5 4 2 Expanding a Bit Register 234 5 4 3 Choosing a Register to be Displayed 235 5 4 4 Splitting Up the Window Display 235 5 4 5 Modifying Register Contents 236 5 4 6 Using Register Contents 0 0 00 236 5 4 7 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents 236 Operating Memory eveneens 237 5 5 1 Viewing a Memory Area 237 5 5 2 Displaying Data in Different Formats 5 5 3 Splitting Up the Window Display 5 5 4 Viewing a Different Memory Area 5 5 5 Modifying the Memory Contents 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range 239 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory 5 5 8 Filling a Memory Area with a Value 5 5 9 Copying a Memory Area 241 5 5 10 Saving and Verifying a Memory Area
324. mation dialog box Sample Information Data Size 8bit Channel Mono x H 00000310 y H 23 Value Figure 5 104 Sample Information Dialog Box Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform View window The following information is displayed Data Size Displays 8bit or 16bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays Y axes for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected RENESAS 335 5 20 Analyzing Performance Use the performance analysis function to measure the rate of execution time The performance analysis function does not affect the realtime operation because it measures the rate of execution time in the specified range by using the circuit for measurement of hardware performance included in the emulator Select either of the following five modes according to the purpose of measurement Table 5 7 Available Measurement Modes Mode Description Purpose Time Of Specified Range Measures the execution time and Measurement of time taken for Measurement execution count in the specified processing of functions except for range that required for child functions called from the functions Start Point To End Point Measurement Measures the execution time and execution count between the specified addresses Measurement of time taken for
325. me of the function is entered to set an address range Entering a function name in the Input Function Range dialog box displayed by clicking the button on the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box automatically enters the address range of the function Input Function Range Function Sample Cancel Figure 5 107 Input Function Range Window Notes 1 Entering the name of an overload function or a class opens the Select Function dialog box Select a function in this dialog box For details on the dialog box refer to section 5 13 3 Supporting Duplicate Labels 2 The addresses figured out are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be different Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered 339 RENESAS 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement Performance Analysis Properties 2x Measurement Method PA1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H 00000000 E End Address H ooo00000 m Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Fi
326. mple Networked_Data_Example __ Debug 1 SimDebug SH 2 Network access Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files on the network The clients cannot f directly communicate with each other either All communication is directed Clients through the server machine Figure 10 1 Network database access structure The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Note Certain operations are locked when other clients are carrying them out This means that if one machine is currently changing the toolchain options all of the other machines can only see read only versions of this data Note The performance of HEW does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version contro
327. mulator to make use of signals on the user system for break or trace The signal for external probe can be set as the condition for the event detection system depending on the low or high level Since the signal for external probe 2 outputs high level when the trigger setting 1 to 4 condition is matched in the bus monitor function the signal can be used for the trigger condition for such as an oscilloscope 3 4 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the stack s information to display the name of the calling function for a function at which the program counter is currently pointing This function can be used only when the load module that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded For the usage of this function refer to section 6 17 Stack Trace Function 3 5 Online Help An online help explains the usage of each function or the command syntax that can be entered from the command line window Select Emulator Help from the Help menu to view the emulator help 198 RENESAS Section 4 Preparation before Use 4 1 Workspaces Projects and Files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents HEW allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a project can be though of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files Figure 4 1 illustrates this graphically
328. n Gontieure Change driver in start up Figure 2 15 E6000 Driver Details Dialog Box e In the Driver combo box select the driver to connect the emulator e Interface displays the name of the interface to be connected e Click the Close button 192 RENESAS 7 Set up the emulator During this process the following dialog box is displayed Attempting to connect the emulator The driver program has been initialized Emulator PCI Card Driver Starting to transfer a firmware file J Change driver in start up Close Figure 2 16 Connecting Dialog Box 8 When Connected is displayed in the Output window of the HEW the emulator initiation is completed tutorial cpp lolx Debug Memory Tools Window Help 8 xj xix ste File Edit View Project Options Bui Be Z FERE IE IE IE IE IEE EEIEIE JEJEJEJE JEFE titi it tt titi JEFE IE FE FEIE FEIE IEEE EEE Tutorial B C source file E dbsct c 2 sbrk c Ey C source file c resetprg cpp sort cpp tutorial cpp Download modules O Tutorial abs 5 6 Dependencies E sbikh sorth stackscth zj E Projects Fy Templates lt J Navigation xi Connected T FILE Tutorial cpp DESCRIPTION Main Program This file is generated by Hitachi Project 2E FEME HE JE EJE JEE JE JEJE IE JEJEJE JEJEJE JE JEE JE JEE JE JEJE JE JEJEJE JEJE JEJE JEE JEJEJEJE JEE
329. n eee eee eeeseeececeecseseesseeeessseeeeeeas 219 5 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog Box cee eeeeeeees 219 5 1 2 Selecting an MCU Not Included in the List eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 221 5 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected 00 0 cece eee eee eee ceeeeceeteeeeeeeeenees 222 5 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box eee eee eeeee tees eeeeeeees 223 5 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting oo cece eeeeee teens cee taeeetseseeeeee 224 5 2 Downloading a Programi seeen scesedesstesiiasbesseieey cues arriari tsis Eni Sesi OS eirese 225 5 2 1 Downloading a Program ccsscccsorsssescossnessconpnesssvnsaescoursacscenasecncerssosasorosesseononess 225 5 2 2 Viewing the Source Code iss cocsiisvcesesssccredsaccssvaseresoanseies EE EEO sossveny oom 226 5 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code cece ceseeeeseeeeeseeeeeetaeeeeseeeeeees 229 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code ieee eeseeeeecseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeees 229 5 2 5 Viewing a Specific Adress cccsiieccssnieassceosssswseessasnocsdnsevensdesstencsesssoueseoseeasseecsen 230 5 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter AddresS ccc eee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 230 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface oe eee eee ceeee cee ceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeas 231 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window eee eee eeeeeceeceeeeeetseeetaeee 231 5 3 2 Specifying a Command File es csscscsssecsseesecssssesesssssesessesessensesseseseeeeee 231 53 3 Executing a Com
330. n the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test for the trace RAM last half in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the trace RAM last half in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test for the mapping RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of marching test for the mapping RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the results of decoding test and marching test for internal ROM and RAM in the E6000 normal completion Shows the check results for the optional SIMM memory module in the E6000 not installed Shows the check results for the step execution controlling circuits in the E6000 normal completion 09 Testing Keybreak A KEY Break 25 55 55 555 5525 2B SRERE REESE SRS AS 10 Testing Emulation RAM Hardware Break A GRD Break EEEE EEE EEEE EFEFEF EEEE BI APT DEAR a A R R SN SID Cy WET ROM DERE iia EEEE EE arae arara 11 Testing Internal ROM Write Protect A Write Protect si iiikikkhkhikkkhki ihi ri ih 12 Testing Hardware Break Ay Break Foint Initialized 34 3446s0040sieeees B Event Detectors CES channel 1 12 C Test Sequencing L 4 5 s5 4 44cseG A DI Check Range Break osc c5 sss cece sissies E Range Break Test for Data 2 F Check Compare Either sc08cccsseecrneeees 13 Testing Emulation RAM Trace A Free Trace BY STRA
331. n can also be selected here To select an address detection mode and resolution click the Settings button on the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box The Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 dialog box will be displayed Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Time Measurement Unit 160ns 7 Cancel Figure 5 113 Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Dialog Box Address Control Mode Select the method to detect addresses for the rate of execution time PC PC address detection mode Prefetch Prefetch address detection mode Time Measurement Unit Select the timer resolution to be used for measurement from 160ns 40ns 20ns or Target The timer for execution time measurement has a 40 bit counter At 20 ns the maximum time that can be measured is about six hours and at 160 us the maximum time is about two days When the counter overflows Timer Overflow is displayed as the result of measurement When Target is selected the counter is incremented by an input clock The result of measurement is displayed as 10 digits in hexadecimal Select the prefetch address detection mode in Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement and PC address detection mode in other measurement modes Otherwise the result of the measurement will be incorrect 5 20 4 Starting Performance Data Acquisition Executing the user program clears the result of previous measurement and automatically starts measuring the
332. n directory 7 Sub Directory pty ooo Figure C 2 Placeholder Combo Box and Sub Directory Field Note The Sub Directory field may be written as the File path field In the third example place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder select the required placeholder from the combo box and then click the Insert button 419 RENESAS Placeholder Configuration directory 7 Insert Figure C 3 Placeholder Combo Box In the fourth example type the placeholder into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by and followed by i e This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect Filedir FILEDIR FILEDIR 420 RENESAS C 3 Available Placeholders Table C 1 lists the placeholders and their meanings Table C 1 Placeholders Placeholder Meaning FULLFILE Filename including full path FILEDIR File directory FILENAME Filename excluding path and including extension FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension EXTENSION File extension WORKSPDIR Workspace directory WORKSPNAME Workspace name PROJDIR Project directory PROJECTNAME Project name CONFIGDIR Configuration directory CONFIGNAME Configuration name HEWDIR HEW installation directory TCINSTALL Toolchain install directory on o
333. n to halting the user program Several event points can be used to set more complex conditions Note Event points acquire the data test conditions and execute an action such as halting the user program by the hardware circuit of the emulator Therefore a delay of several cycles will occur from the satisfaction of the condition to the execution of an action 5 15 3 Event Detection System In addition to the 4 range channels the emulator also has 8 event channels The event channels have more functions such as sequencing or counting than the range channels Event Channels Ch1 to Ch8 The emulator has 8 event channels The event channel can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e An address or an address range e Outside of an address range e A read a write or either e Data with a mask specification e Bus state e Area e The value of four external probe signals e The number of times the event has occurred e The number of delay cycles after the event has occurred A maximum of eight points can be used as a combination in a sequence The program is activated or halted by an occurrence of the previous event in each sequence 279 RENESAS Range Channels Ch9 to Ch12 The emulator has 4 range channels The range channel can be defined as a combination of one or more of the followings e An address or an address range e Outside of an address range e A read a write or either e Data with a
334. n will pass a command to HMAKE to force a re build all operation When using GNUMake this is not supported 66 RENESAS 3 12 Customizing the HEW linkage order Object module are linked as alphabetical order in HEW default You can specify the linkage order if you wish to gt To switch on manual linkage order facilities 1 Click the Build gt Linkage Order menu item 2 On the dialog displayed click the Use custom linkage order check box figure 3 25 3 Then you can move the objects into whichever order you need Simply select the module and click the up and down buttons to position it in the desired location Each module has a different icon depending on where it originated 5 Click OK to verify and save the settings Linkage order 21 xi IV Use custom linkage order Object order Cancel J main obj 9 resetprg obj _Moveup E intprg obj Move down J runtime_library lib EE E projectname lib user_edit_options lib Intermediate file File in project User library from options Current configuration Debug 7 Copy to Figure 3 25 Linkage order Dialog When you are using multiple configurations it is likely that the linkage order will be very similar To do this effectively you can copy the current settings in the dialog to other configurations This is described below gt To copy the linkage order from one configuration to another 1 Click the Build gt Linkage order men
335. nal editor J Use external editor Modify Figure 4 7 Options Dialog Editor Tab When a TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character is usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog To use spaces as tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab figure 4 7 2 Set the Use spaces as tabs check box as appropriate 3 Click OK for the tab setting specified to take effect 83 RENESAS 4 8 3 Auto Indentation When you press return in a standard editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of a window Auto Indentation is a feature which when return is pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non white space character of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself Figure 4 8 illustrates two examples The first i shows the effect of pressing return when the auto indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the line int z 20 is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second example ii shows the effect of
336. nd enter RAM in the Start edit box After that click the Add button the new condition is now added to the R W WR display in the Condition column of the Result list box so that it now shows R W WR amp Area RAM This completes setting of the condition Statistic r Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem fArea 7 Start RAM End Result R W WR amp Area RAM Figure 6 56 Statistic Dialog Box Condition Added 385 RENESAS 6 To start statistical analysis of the specified condition press the Result button The number of write operations that satisfy the condition and the PTR values will be displayed rm Statistic Analysis Default Aange Set ltem Area 7 New Start RAM EMT l Result RAV WA amp Area RAM 1114 09063 09058 0905 Figure 6 57 Statistic Dialog Box Result of Analysis 7 Click the Close button to close the Statistic dialog box 8 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information 386 RENESAS 6 16 4 Function Calls This mechanism is used to only
337. ne RepistetS oeeie errer Eres rN CEES EEE EE OEE EEES Ean EN a SEE 352 6 6 Executing the Program 0 cosssccscsspncscovsnescensicesenviectsesviestcssssnetsasusssncoovsandiersnesssassnsutsanseesde 353 6 7 REVISWINE Break points sinoi onsa E N REEE EE ara Ee E OOE A ODEO OEE ES EEES 355 68 Rererring tO Symbol Sroa EAE NEE SAS 356 6 9 VIE WINE MEMORY srr ereenn aAA EENET Tra Eei EEEE EESE NEEE EEEE 357 6 10 Watching Variables ives issiesoscsecstiues cosines sessares cesscegesesovest cnsonsodcdeosebueivonesasteccebsetoosencavenrsterd 358 6 11 Displaying L cal Variables uc ccsiscscsssancs scsesccssessoeonsstensonesnsisstestoseoneseodevasdasteosetendscestoventes 361 6 12 Stepping Through Program s ccscciesvesceeestessonssasiseavsacscetsssoncervaschderpusescesnacecesvoncdessponccens 362 6 12 1 Executing the Step In Command o oo cece cseceeeeseeeesseeaeeeseeeeees 362 6 12 2 Executing the Step Out Command cece cece ce ceeseseeeseeeeeesaeeeeees 364 6 12 3 Executing the Step Over Command w ieee cee ceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneeaeees 365 6 13 Forced Breaking of Program Executions 0 cece eee cece csecseeessseeeesecseeessenesseeeesees 366 6 14 Resetting the MCU sirensis en a eiia l sanini si iens 366 6 15 Break PUNCHON lt sssccccerssecccerosccctonpncnscorsnessenndenncenonebeceuasesdcenpseedsassacssensiancsenedaespenescengeanuaendes 367 6 15 11 PC Break PUnction scssi yero E EVEEN 367 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points cece
338. nfigure To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for file status check box or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 155 RENESAS 156 RENESAS 10 Network Facilities 10 1 Overview The High performance Embedded Workshop is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system is implemented by making one of the machines attached to the network the server machine All other client machines then use the service this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine is notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This structure is shown below in figure 10 1 Networked workspace and project B Networked_Data_Exa
339. nformation Dialog 110 RENESAS These can then be exported from the HEW system and be given to other users you need to use your project gt To export a custom project generator to another user 1 Click on Tools gt Administration 2 Check the Show all components checkbox 3 Expand the Project Generators Custom folder 4 Select the custom project generator you wish to export 5 Click the Export button Tools Administration 2 x Registered components Component F Toolchains Cancel System Tools Utility Phases Register Debugger Components Extension Components Communication Tools System Extension Components Project Generators QQ Project Generators Custom i CurrentProjectName E Version Control System Toolchain Support E Definition Parser Unregister Properties Expott Search disk Tool information al gt Uninstaller V Show all components Current HEW tools database location DHe Modify e APEERE k Figure 5 20 Tool Administration Dialog 6 You should enter export directory for custom project generator and click Export button HEW creates some files When another HEW uses its project it needs all files under your specified directory Export Custom Project Generator Directory to export to must be empty or not exist
340. ng emulator is connected 4 OK Emulator board information Emulation board ID Main board ID H 5 SUB board ID H 6 01 Testing Register A TONU REGuster 254 22 24022500 ERR ERERR ERS OK B PAGE REGUSHO Re 5 51515 55 54 44454446444464645 5554555 5 5518 OK C TRACE G A Register 2 eee eee eee eee OK D PERFM G A REGIStEr wo cheese eecesceeenenens OK By CHS GO YEGIUSHER Epa OK F INDRI Register 6 555545 5555929899 RFR ERR ERER DER ESD OK Gr IDIA REGUSHEr 5 5 5 4 4 5 5 9 4 4 959 44 549 44 49444 45 9498 OK 02 Testing DPRAM Ay Decode TSS Seisiscscecainecnt nn incense cece eigen OK B Marching Gest gvinissersisger a sgeneageneesuens OK RENESAS Option memory board H 0d None Description Test program start message x x shows the version number Enter 1 and press the Enter key because the SIMM memory module is not installed in this example Shows that driver software has been correctly loaded Shows that driver software has been correctly initialized Shows that the PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Shows that the E6000 is correctly connected to the host computer Shows the ID number of the lower board of the E6000 always 5 and the middle board of the E6000 always d Shows the ID number of the upper board of the E6000 always 6 and whether the SIMM memory board is installed Shows the check results for the registers
341. nge has been selected Outside Range Used to negate the range i e the event will occur when the address is outside the range This is available when Address or Range has been selected 284 RENESAS Data Compare Sets the data condition Compare Checking this box compares data Use Mask Sets a mask condition available when Compare has been selected Value Specifies the data bus value as numerics The size of data for access can also be selected available when Compare has been selected Byte Sets access in bytes as the condition available when Compare has been selected Word Sets access in words as the condition available when Compare has been selected Mask Sets a value to be masked This value will be ANDed with the value of the data bus and data condition The result will be used to compare data available when Use Mask has been selected Direction Selects a condition with read or write cycles Read Sets read cycles as the condition Write Sets write cycles as the condition Either Sets either read or write cycles as the condition 285 RENESAS 2 Bus Area page Use this page to set the bus status and the memory area being accessed Breakpoint Event Properties 21x General Bus Area Signals Action Bus State Area J CPU Prefetch F On chip BOM M CPU Data F On chip F Refresh F On chip l 0 16 bit E DMAC E On chip 1 0 8 ire F Extemal 16
342. now displayed in the Address Control Mode text field of the Common Setting of Performance PA1 8 dialog box Common ings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC Me Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 6 66 Common Setting of Performance PA1 8 Dialog Box 7 Click the OK button to display the content that has been set for line 1 of the No column in the Performance Analysis window This completes the settings for a Time Of Specified Range Measurement Performance Ane l oj x No Name Condition MAX MIN TIME Count a NE S e l sort Range H 00002068 H 000020D4 0 00h OOmin 00s 000ms O00us 000ns 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EE m Figure 6 67 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Setting Completed 8 Set an event point at the address on the line that has p_sam gt change a within the tutorial function H 0000107 in this example so that a break occurs when the specified sort function has been executed three times refer to section 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points 9 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Performance Analysis window then displays the information shown below The value shown in the Count column is 3 which indicates that the sort function has been executed three times and the execution time Performance Analysis Efe o xi No Name Condition MA
343. nsion Dialog 20 RENESAS 3 Select None to remove any association select Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other if you want to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other then you can select from any previously defined application from the drop down list or specify a new application Click Add to define a new application The Add Application dialog will be displayed figure 2 13 Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file in the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location file see appendix C Placeholders for more information on placeholders and their uses Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to create the application Add Application 2 xi Name Cancel Command excluding parameters Doo M Browse Parameters gt Initial directory fe Browse Figure 2 13 Add Application Dialog Click Modify to modify an application The Modify Application dialog will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog described above except that the Name field is re
344. nto memory The memory contents can also be modified by moving the cursor on the memory unit and entering the new value in hexadecimal through the keyboard 5 5 6 Selecting a Memory Range If the memory address range is in the Memory window you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit according to the Memory window display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted 239 RENESAS 5 5 7 Finding a Value in Memory To find a value in memory open the Memory window and select Search from the popup menu or from the Memory drop down menu The Search Memory dialog box shown in figure 5 22 is displayed Data Search Data As Byte amp 1 z IV Search Equal Data I Search Backward Figure 5 22 Search Memory Dialog Box Enter the start and end addresses of the range in which to search and the data value to search for and select the search format If pattern search is selected as the search format a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Search conditions other than pattern search are data match mismatch and search direction Note that only data match and forward direction can be selected with pattern search Click the OK button or press the Enter key The dialog box closes and the HEW searches the range for the
345. ntrol If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you might be informed C 4 Placeholder Tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system e If there is a placeholder popup menu p next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible e If you use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory e Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 423 RENESAS 424 RENESAS Appendix D I O File Format HEW formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file is a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space The following describes two formats of the lt device gt 1O file that supports or not the bi
346. nu The Locals window is displayed The Locals window shows the local variables in the function currently pointed to by the program counter along with their values Note however that the Locals window is initially empty because local variables are yet to be declared Ox 0 long 10 i H OOffef80 ER5 long i H 000a R4 int p_sam Ox00ffbOd8 ERE class Sample Figure 6 19 Locals Window e Click mark at the left side of array a in the Locals window to display the elements e Refer to the elements of array a before and after the execution of the sort function and confirm that random data is sorted in descending order 361 RENESAS 6 12 Stepping Through a Program The HEW provides a range of step menu commands that allow efficient program debugging Table 6 1 Step Option Menu Command Description Step In Executes each statement including statements within functions Step Over Executes a function call in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the statement following the statement in the program that called the function Step Steps the specified times repeatedly at a specified rate 6 12 1 Executing the Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first statement of the called function e To step through the sort function select Step In from the Debug menu or click the
347. ny of which may be matched For example abc matches a or b or c Within a bracket expression all regular expression special characters are treated as normal non special characters except specifies a range of character values based on their bit pattern For example A Za z matches all uppercase and lowercase English characters To indicate as a character in the bracket expression it must be the first or last character in the set for example a z or A Z is special only when placed in the first character position within the bracket set Using in the first position complements the set of items to be matched For example a z matches all characters except for lowercase English letters Finally in order to include a as a character in the bracket set you must include it as the first character in the set as in Jabc or AJabc Group regular expression items into subexpressions which are treated as a single unit For example whereas ab matches a ab abb and so on ab matches the empty string ab abab and so on and are not treated as special characters inside a bracket expression Escapes a regular expression character causing it to be treated as a regular character For example whereas ab indicates a subexpression consisting of ab ab denotes the sequence of characters a b and Note To specify the character in C source code you must specify as the C compiler treats th
348. o 1 and the The mask is set to 1 and the other bits are undefined 7 3 1 A D Converter and D A Converter other bits are undefined Due to the use of a user system interface cable there is a slight degradation in the A D and D A conversion than that quoted in the Hardware Manual for the MCU being emulated 398 RENESAS Section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product This section describes the software specifications of the H8S 2612 E6000 emulator 8 1 Software Specifications of the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator Information specific to this emulator is given below 8 1 1 Target Hardware This emulator software conforms to the H8S 2612 E6000 emulator HS2612EPI61H 8 1 2 Selectable Platform The debugging platform selectable in this emulator is as follows The MCUs that can be emulated vary according to the debugging platform selected Table 8 1 Selectable Target Platform Debugging Platform Remark H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator CPU 2600 For emulation of the MCUs that have the H8S 2600 CPU as the core RENESAS 399 8 1 3 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page Items that can be set in this dialog box are listed below D x Configuration Properties General r User Signals JV User Reset enable Mode i advanced mode single chip 7 M User NMI enable JV Sinele chip mode User Standby enable Glock Main10MHz ne Timer Resolution 125ns 7 Flash M
349. o Source from the popup menu to display in the Source window the source program corresponding to the selected function 327 RENESAS 5 17 3 Specifying the View Choose View Setting from the popup menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings Figure 5 98 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 328 RENESAS 5 18 Displaying Memory Contents as an Image The memory contents can be displayed as an image in the Image View window 5 18 1 Opening the Image View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Image or click the Image toolbar button a to open the Image Properties dialog box shown in figure 5 99 Image Properties r Color Information Mode Bit Pivel 8bit Index Color Sampling 4 4 4 z C BGA YCbCr Format chunky 4 m Buffer Infomation Data Address H o0000000 Palette Address Width Height Size Pixel an i g Buffer Size iid J H 00000000 Byte Height 0 m View Information View Mode p Position Full Size Position 0 Patt Size Y Position 0 m Start Position Wwidth He
350. o This Product or the online help 223 RENESAS 5 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting Clicking the Add button on the Memory Mapping dialog box or clicking the Modify button after selecting the information on the memory map setting you want to change opens the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box Memory Mapping fom Carel To eT Setting On Chip Read write v Figure 5 5 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box Use this dialog box to change the address range and attributes of a memory map From Enter the start address of the map range To Enter the end address of the map range Setting Enter the memory map setting The choices given are listed below The User external memory and Emulator emulation memory attributes can be modified e On chip Read write Cannot be changed e On chip Read only Cannot be changed e On chip Guarded Cannot be changed e User Read write Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected e User Read only Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected e User Guarded e Emulator Read write e Emulator Read only e Emulator Guarded 224 RENESAS 5 2 Downloading a Program This section describes how to download a program and view it as source code or assembly language mnemonics Note After a break occurs the HEW displays the location of the program counter PC on the editor In most cases for example if an Elf Dwarf2 based project is moved fro
351. o be displayed in the Register window choose Settings from the pop up menu This dialog box is shown in figure 5 16 Settings Registers v VIERT JER2 Cancel VIER3 v v v v v v Figure 5 16 Settings Dialog Box 5 4 4 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Register window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar 235 RENESAS 5 4 5 Modifying Register Contents To change a register s content open the Register dialog box in one of the following methods e Double click the register you want to change e Select the register you want to change and choose Edit from the popup menu Register ERO Value H o0000000 Set As Cancel Whole Register x Figure 5 17 Register Dialog Box You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose whether to modify the whole register contents a masked area floating or flag bits by selecting an option from the combo box the contents of this list depend on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press the Enter key the dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 5 4 6 Using Register Contents Use the value contained in a CPU register by specifying the register name pre
352. o get from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Get Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Get Files menu option 153 RENESAS 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user does not already check out the file or files in question gt To check out a writable copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Check Out Files toolbar button S or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Check Out Files menu option 3 When the operation is finished the file has a red tick next to its name This means you as the current user of HEW has checked it out 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual Sourc
353. o the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition a Sp Delyedseo 1 J2 19 e ooo a Ej x a dd en Dete oaa Figure 6 45 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Pages Added 377 RENESAS 6 Select page 1 and click the Range radio button in the Conditions group box This will display the Range Event combo box and the Edit button Trace Acquisition Figure 6 46 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Displaying Page 1 378 RENESAS 7 Select the event you have registered from the Range Event combo box The event is now enabled Click the OK button to complete the trace setting Trace Acquisition 2 x General Stop Delayed Stop 1 2 3 4 Conditions Disabled Point to Point Range C Event Range Event Edit 9 R H 105C address Figure 6 47 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Setting Completed 8 Make the setting such that the break occurs after the instruction at the address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function H 0000105C in this example has been executed five times for details on this refer to section 6 15 2 Breaking Execution at Event Points 9 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Processing stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following content Generic Trace E x PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock
354. og will be displayed figure 2 9 Enter the extension which you want to define into the File extension field It is not necessary to type the dot character The drop list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically Select the Extension belongs to a new group option and enter a description which defines this new file group At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open with drop list These are listed below e Editor e None e Other e Windows default Tf the editor is selected the open file function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If none is selected then the open operation is disabled when the open file function is attempted Selecting Other allows you to configure an another tool for the open file operation See To associate an application with a file group for more details If the Windows default option is selected then the open file function in the workspace window passes the open file to the Windows operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer Click OK to add the extension to the File Extensions list Add File Extensio 21x m File extension oK Itxt v Cancel m Fil
355. oint Event Properties 2 x I General m Type Address C Don tCare Address Range Address Lo en JH 00000000 Address Hi Data Compare Direction 4J F Compare F Use Mask C Read Value Ho Pars Write Either Figure 5 59 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box Setting a PC Break In this dialog box select the address condition to set PC breakpoints Type Select the type of a breakpoint Note that the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is used for setting PC breakpoints and event points Selecting a particular type of breakpoint enables or disables other pages and parts of the dialog according to the options available to that type of breakpoint PC Break Only a single address with a program fetch can be selected Other options are invalid Event Set conditions in detail with other options on this page or on the Bus Areal Signals or Action page Address Set address conditions Adderess Lo Select a single address where a PC breakpoint will be set 282 RENESAS 5 15 7 Setting Event Points On the Event sheet the settings for event points are displayed modified and added Address H O0000106A Tutorial cpp 37 address bus prefetch Trace Enable Address H OO00107E Tutorial cpp 45 address bus prefetch Trace Enable Address H 000010A40 Tutorial cpp 49 address area ROM Trace Enable Address H 00001140 address area ROM Trace Eupty
356. okmark select the line to mark and click this button a green mark will then appear in the blank on the left side of the editor window To remove a bookmark select the line to remove a bookmark and click this button the mark in the blank on the left side of the editor window will disappear For further information on bookmarks refer to the Bookmarks section later in this chapter 71 RENESAS 4 2 3 Search Toolbar Buttons Enn Find in Files To search several files for a text string then click this button All find results are displayed in the Find in Files tab of the Output window For further information refer to the Searching and Navigating Through Files section later in this chapter ay Find Click this button if you want to find a certain text string in the current file It invokes a find dialog box where you can specify the search parameters amp Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the current search string B Find Previous Finds the previous occurrence of the current search string 4 2 4 Bookmarks Toolbar Buttons mm Toggle Bookmarks Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line mal Next Bookmark Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line in Previous Bookmark Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Ima Clear All Bookmarks Clears all bookmarks in the current file 4 2 5 Templates Tool
357. om the Version control systems list and click the Select button The Current version control system is changed to reflect the new selection 3 Click the OK button to confirm the selection 130 RENESAS Select ersion Control System 2 x Version control systems K Microsoft Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 Cancel None Select dt Current version control system None Figure 7 3 Select Version Control System Dialog Note Only those version control systems which have been installed with the HEW will appear in the Select Version Control System dialog figure 7 3 Once a version control tool is selected you will notice that the Version Control gt Configure option has now become available The next chapter discusses the usage of the custom version control system 131 RENESAS 132 RENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system is a configurable addition to the High performance Embedded Workshop which allows you to connect to a version control system already installed on your machine To clarify further the High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide a version control tool itself only a means by which you can integrate the version control system which you use into your workspaces and projects 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options The custom version control system allows you to invoke a version control command either by s
358. om the popup menu to delete all the breakpoints that have been set Click the Event tab Up to 12 event points eight event channels and four range channels can be set up as independent conditions In this example we are setting the condition for event channel 1 Figure 6 35 Event Window Event Channel 1 Ch1 Select the line for Ch1 in the Event window Double click on this line that is highlighted The Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is displayed Make the following settings in the boxes on the General page Select the Event radio button in the Type group box Select the Address radio button in the Address group box Then use the Source window to refer to the address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box In this example enter H 0000105c Enter D 5 as the number of times the event condition is to be satisfied in the Required number of event occurrences edit box on the Action page 370 RENESAS Breakpoint Event Prop General Bus Area Signals Action m Type Address C PCBreak Don tCare Address Range Address Lo fHooon0sc ts G Event H 0000105C Address Hi JH 00000000 F Outside Range m Data Compare Direction I Compare F Use Mask C Read Value ou C White Bute Word Mask fA 0 Either Figure 6 36 General Page Breakpoint Even
359. on is automatically added to the edit box Clicking the show differences menu item displays the dialog shown below in figure 11 1 ioxl c hew projects myproject myproject dbsct c File in version control u u al s 1 16 16 vu pragma section DSEC 1 pragma section DSEC 18 static const struct 12 static const struct 13 char rom_s Start address of tk 3 char rom_s Start address of the 20 char rom_e End address of the char rom_e End address of the in a char ram_s Start address of tk 2 char ram_s Start address of the 22 DTBL b 22 DTBL a __sectop D __secend D _ sectop 2 __sectop D __ secend D __ sectop R a ff __sectop ABS8D _ secend SABS8D __sectop ABS8D _ secend S ABS8D _ a jj __sectop ABS16D _ secend S ABS1 __sectop ABS16D _ secend ABS16D x ye 26 he n pragma section BSEC a pragma section BSEC 2 static const struct 2 static const struct as char b_s Start address of nc char b 3 Start address of non 30 char b e End address of non char bh e End address of non in n BIBL n BIBL n p p 32 all sasha eT srcend RM bla gt ail ine Figure 11 1 Difference view gt To perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive 1 Select Tools gt Show Differences The difference compare files dialog is displayed This is shown in figure
360. on time in 20 state cycles SCI Select Selects the number of SCI channels SCI0 1 Enables SCIO and SCI1 SCI0 2 Enables SCIO to SCI2 SCI0 3 Enables SCIO to SCI3 SCI0 4 Enables SCIO to SCI4 405 RENESAS 8 1 5 Memory Mapping Function This emulator supports four blocks of user memory These can be 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte each depending on the SIMM fitted Each block can be placed in the address space on a 256 kbyte or 1 Mbyte boundary The memory mapping has a granularity of H 40 D 64 bytes Each 64 byte block can be set to the emulation memory or external memory and can be access prohibited write protected or read write Note The minimum unit available for mapping is a block 64 bytes 8 1 6 Status Window Selecting View gt CPU gt Status or clicking the Status Display toolbar button displays the Status window The Status window has three sheets This emulator displays the following items 1 Memory Sheet Selecting the Memory tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 3 Memory Sheet Items Item Column Status Column Target Device Configuration Displays memory mapping System Memory Resources Displays the memory resource of the emulator hardware Program Name Displays the program file name 406 RENESAS 2 Platform Sheet Selecting the Platform tab on the Status window displays this sheet Table 8 4 Platform Sheet Items Item Column Connected To
361. only allocated to the monitor range set by the Monitor function the mark R is colored in blue 3 Registered symbols are comprised of those with the conditions 1 and 2 listed above Break on access error When this box is checked a break the user program stops occurs if your program accesses an access prohibited area or writes to a write protected area 401 RENESAS General page cont Enable internal ROM area write When this box is checked writing to the internal ROM area is enabled For the result of writing see the Extended Monitor window User VCC Threshold Sets the voltage level for the user system Down will be displayed in User System Voltage of the Extended Monitor window when the actual user VCC PVCC when the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator CPU debugging platform is selected of the target system is lower than the specified value User Signals When this box is checked the reset and NMI signals from the user system are enabled Note that the standby signal is always invalid because the hardware standby function is not supported However the status of the signal can be checked in the Extended Monitor window Driver Displays the E6000 driver that is currently installed Change driver in start up When this box is checked selection of a driver will be available next time the emulator is connected The MCUs selectable by the Device option and options that depend on the MCUs
362. ontains two lists of menu options The first list System menu options and toolbar buttons represents those menu options which always appear on the version control sub menu These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the version control toolbar The second list User menu options represents those additional user defined options which are added to the bottom of the version control sub menu Figure 8 2 shows the structure of the version control sub menu Select Configure ity Add File s ies Remove File s System amp Get Filels Defined amp Check Out File s Option B Check In File Status of File s u History of File s Defined Undo Check out of Files Option Figure 8 2 Version Control Sub Menu 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed in table 8 1 Table 8 1 System Menu Option Option Description Add File s Add selected file s to version control system Remove File s Remove selected file s from version control system Get File s Get a read only local copy of the selected file s from version control system Check In File s Put back i e update the selected file s in ver
363. op down list and click OK The recent project workspace list displays the same information as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select Browse to another project workspace and click OK To register a tool to or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button see chapter 5 Tool Administration for details Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 1 5 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting File gt Exit pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu To open the system menu click the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar If a workspace is open then the same workspace closedown procedure is followed as described in the previous section 1 6 Component System Overview The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system
364. op up menu gt To display the Workspace window or the Output window Select View gt Workspace or View gt Output respectively 1 2 5 The Editor Window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style where each text file has a separate tab as shown in figure 1 18 The editor contains a gutter on the left hand side of the window The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the cursor over the column a tool tip is displayed showing its identity RENESAS LHASA JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE HA EAA include lt stddef h gt include lt stdio h gt include sbrk h const size_t _sbrk_size Specifies the minimum unit of the defined heap area ee extern char _slptr static union long dummy Dumny for 4 byte boundary char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed by sbrk theap_area static char b
365. or window If you do not have a source file but wish to view code in the assembly language level either choose View gt Disassembly or click on the Disassembly window s toolbar button ibly i lol x 22 void main void z 23 24 while 1 00001036 40FC BRA _main 8 26 20 28 29 void tutorial void tutorial 01006DF3 MOV L ER3 ER 0000103C 01206DF4 STH L ER4 ER6 SP 00001040 79370028 SUB W H 0028 R7 30 f 00001044 OFF3 MOY L ER ER3 aa long a 10 J2 long j 33 Int 1 34 class Sample p_sam 35 36 p_san new Sample 00001046 1480 SUB L ERO ERO 00001048 SE002000 JSR Sample Sample 24 oo00104C OF86 MOV L ERO ER6 z for i 0 i lt 10 i J OO00104E 1944 SUB W R4 R4 38 j randi 00001050 SEQ011EE JSR _rand 24 z Figure 5 8 Disassembly Window 5 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code You can modify the assembly language code by double clicking on the instruction that you want to change The Assembler dialog box will be opened Assembler i 2x Address Code Mnemonic 00001040 79370028 SUB W H 0028 A7 OK Cancel Figure 5 9 Assembler Dialog Box 229 RENESAS The address instruction code and mnemonic are displayed Enter the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonics field Pressing the Enter key will replace the memory content with the new instruction and move on to the next instruction
366. ore Specifying sequencing Enable Sequencing on the Action page 283 RENESAS 1 General page The address and data conditions are set Breakpoint Event Properties 21x General Bus Area Signals Action Type Address C PCBreak Don tCare Address C Range AddressLo 0000000 Address Hi m Data Compare Direction I Compare F Use Mask Read Value Oo me C Write ce Byte ts Word Mak OD Either Figure 5 61 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog Box General Page Type Select the type of a breakpoint Note that the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box is used for setting PC breakpoints and event points Selecting a particular type of breakpoint enables or disables other pages and parts of the dialog according to the options available to that type of breakpoint PC Break Only a single address with a program fetch can be selected Other options are invalid Event Set conditions in detail with other options on this page or on the Bus Area Signals or Action page Address Sets the address condition Don t care Sets no address condition Address Allows a single address to be selected Range Allows an address range to be selected Adderess Lo Set a single address or the start of an address range available when Address or Range has been selected Adderess Hi Set the end of an address range available when Ra
367. ore executing any tools To force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands set the Save workspace before executing any phases check box 6 4 5 Prompt before saving workspace In addition to the above check box set this to prompt before saving 6 4 6 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk 121 RENESAS 6 4 7 Save auto recovery info When you click this option every ten minutes as default HEW saves workspace project and session temporality Any changes you have made will be saved to temporary files If you open your workspace and the following dialog is displayed it means that the last time the workspace was used problems were encountered To recover the files check the checkbox alongside the filenames you wish to recover and click OK Clicking cancel will discard the auto recovery files and load from the original files HEW Workspace Auto Recovery 2 x HEW failed to shutdown correctly the last time you used this workspace Would you like to recover the following files rather than use the saved versions Filename Director demonstration hws c hew3 demonstration demonstration hwp c hew3 demonstration demonstrati defaultsession hsf c hew3 d
368. orial we describe the Time Of Specified Range Measurement 6 18 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement 1 Select Performance Analysis from the Performance submenu of the View menu to display the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box Select Performance Analysis Type Performance Analysis E6000 Performance Analysis Cancel Figure 6 62 Select Performance Analysis Type Dialog Box 2 Select E6000 Performance Analysis from the Performance Analysis combo box in the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box and click the OK button The Performance Analysis window will be displayed Performance i lo x Condition 0 10 20 MAX MIN TIME DIR BRYN Figure 6 63 Performance Analysis Window 389 RENESAS 3 Select the line of the Performance Analysis window that has 1 in its No column and click the right hand mouse button to display a popup menu Select Set from this popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Performance Analysis Properties 21x Measurement Method PAT Time Of Specified Range Measurement Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H 00000000 End Address H o0000000 Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode Prefetch Settings Time Measurement Unit 160ns Cancel Figure 6 64 Performance Analysis Properties Dialog Box 4
369. osvesshcovessscestvcsuestuscsncssstccheasenceessgsavheodsseshersecesies 118 Specifying Workspace Options 119 6 4 1 Open last workspace at start up o eel ecce eee ce ceeceeeeeetseeesseeeeesaeeeseneeseaes 120 6 4 2 Restore the files on opening workspace 0 c eee eeeeeee ects eeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeeeaee 120 6 4 3 Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace eee 120 6 4 4 Save workspace before executing any tools oo cece eee eeeeceeeteeeeeeteeeeaes 121 6 4 5 Prompt before saving Workspace 0 0 cece eee cee eects cee teeeeeseeeeseeeesesaeeesseeeeeeaes 121 6 4 6 Prompt before saving session 6 4 7 Save auto recovery info 6 4 8 Default directory for new workspaces eee eee eee eeeeeceeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeaeeaeees 122 Wysinp an External ators tsien enn ainen bacsnees canes TE EE TEE ARANES 123 Customizing PIG Saveanu i ECTE EEOAE AAR 124 6 6 1 Save files before executing any tools 124 6 6 2 Prompt before saving Tes jie ccccstssestensescssdetendssssccsssevecedeostonsdecsvenesecstoadstdesovee 124 Using Custom PlacehOldets iecciscseesssessessessseverestonstecssonsnegesswecessasnonrssotsscsnranbvastanveveseserdede 125 Using the workspace and project log facilities cceeeeeeeeeseeteeneeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeeneeeeeeneeas 127 Wisin the virtual desktops orei rinaire nieves ensais EEE eE EE Gsuaadescevensa sas 127 Version Control icsisseacsesncescteicsesctetestesetesonsaeteseascesetessseioseattebedstes 12
370. ource or Disassembly window containing the address corresponding to the label 260 RENESAS 5 11 Executing Your Program This section describes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 5 11 1 Running from Reset To reset your user system and run your program from the reset vector address choose Debug gt Reset Go or click the Go Reset toolbar button E The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually by choosing Debug gt Halt or by clicking the Stop toolbar button Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 5 11 2 Continuing Run When your program is stopped the HEW will display an yellow arrow mark in the gutter of the line in the editor and Disassembly windows that correspond to the CPU s current program counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue running from the current PC address click the Go toolbar button E or choose Debug gt Go To continue running from a specified address which is not the stop address change the PC value in one of the following ways and click th
371. ow ieee eee cece ceeceeeecseeeeeseeeetaseeseesaeeeeaes 251 5 9 2 Changing the Monitor Settings 0 00 cece sees ceceeeecaeeesseseeeesseseseesaeeeeees 253 5 9 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor eee eeeeeeeeeesneeeeeee 253 5 9 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings 0 c ees csececeeceeceeeesseeesseeeseeeseeenees 253 5 9 5 Monitoring Varlables ci cvvcstscosvcsshcesccsstestnasssestuscstcsvenctussteacstesteasdecsSvervenseerckes 253 5 9 6 Hiding the Monitor Window ccececeeseesesseeneeeeceeeeseeaeeseceeceeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeseaeens 254 5 9 7 Managing the Monitor Window 00 cece c ces cececeecseceeeesseeeesesaneeesesaneee 254 Viewing the Labels cc ssvercccestondsconsstacaoneansieonotasessnsesdeasadesdenpsnenresgsesecenastencernsesncaboseses 256 S101 Misting Labels sis cssssccsascusitectossaneinarasicomiscueunvavasacnsiienayieacs 256 DLO Addin gh a Label cc cssssicasssvccsssssesensessacssavia cysestacca edudecssous catstoattacasossdcaseesaencanaaseaed 257 5 103 Editing Label wcscscsccessicstscsassteassossssccvessssessvscsseisnsesiessvachnssssecsnccssasnandssseteetsnactes 257 S104 Deleting Paes ciscis cccsens sssdsalscdessnsvsaedscascvedstonscsswedessodesarsnodeoacaueaes vaseanrereareenedes 258 5 1035 Deleting All abel occ sess ccsssszsseseannd vescdtsleccsssonsvassuccevssesensssesesesoaadvaseanveneaeesehles 258 5 10 6 Loading Labels from a File cece csc ceeeeeseeesaeeeceeseeeesesaseeeseeesseeeseesaseeeaes 259 5 10 7 S
372. ows the structure of the database specified in step 6 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in the Project name field 9 Click OK 10 HEW will require you to repeat steps 7 9 for as many projects as are present in the current workspace SourceSafe Login 2 xi Username Password Cancel Database path Browse Figure 9 1 SourceSafe Login Dialog 151 RENESAS Create SourceSafe Project 2 xi Project name proiect Cancel project Bas agip ariel bp commit def gt Figure 9 2 Create SourceSafe Project dialog The HEW has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and sets up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access However although the Visual SourceSafe projects themselves have been created no files have been added to them 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe The previous section has only established the mappings between the project directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe i e the controlled directory Although the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directly its mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty Firstly you must select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To adda file or files to Visual SourceSafe 1 Select t
373. ox 2 Register the address range for trace acquisition as an event condition Click the Add button in the Trace Events group box on the General page to display the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box see figure 6 42 Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box 3 Click the Range radio button in the Address group box on the General page of the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Use the Locals window to refer to the address on the line where variable a which is defined within the tutorial function is allocated H OOFFEF80 in this example and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box Then enter an address which is H 27 added to that entered in the Address Lo edit box H OOF FEFA7 in this example in the Address Hi edit box This procedure sets the memory range for variable a of the tutorial function 4 Click the Write radio button in the Direction group box to set a write cycle for the specified range This completes the setting of a memory range Click the OK button to close the Breakpoint Event Properties dialog box Breakpoint Event Properties General Bus Area Signals Action m Type Address C PC Break C Don tCare Address Range AddressLo H 00FFEF80 Event Address Hi H Q0FFEFA I Outside Range m Data Compare Direction I Compare F Use Mask C Read Value Ho Figure 6 49 Breakpoint Event Properties Dialog
374. ox This dialog box allows the user to set the items to be displayed in the Extended Monitor window Note The items that can be set in this dialog box vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 250 RENESAS 5 9 Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime Use the Monitor window to monitor the memory contents during user program execution In the Monitor function the realtime operation is retained since the bus monitoring circuit of the emulator sets the read write signal of the MCU as a trigger and holds the address bus and data bus values to update the displayed contents of the memory Up to eight points can be set by using the eight monitoring channels on the bus monitoring circuit 1 to 256 bytes can be monitored at one point It is possible that a part or all of monitoring ranges is overlapped Note Monitoring is impossible for an area such as an internal timer counter where no internal read write signal is generated to update a value 5 9 1 Opening the Monitor Window To open the Monitor window select View gt CPU gt Monitor gt Monitor Setting or click the Monitor toolbar button to display the Monitor Settings dialog box 2x Monitor Setting Name monitort m Options Address H OOFFEFAO Size byte Ho o SY Access Format eyte asen o d V Auto Refresh at rate ms D oo50 IV Readin
375. p Difference Debug Run JKKK Toolbar name Editor Figure 6 1 Customize Dialog Toolbars Tab gt To create a new toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed 2 Click the New button The dialog shown in figure 6 2 will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar name field 4 Click OK to create the new toolbar New Toolbar Toolbar name M yToolbad Figure 6 2 New Toolbar Dialog 113 RENESAS When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty gt To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog onto the toolbar f Customize Figure 6 3 Customize Dialog Commands Tab 114 RENESAS To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select Tools gt Customize The dialog shown in figure 6 1 will be displayed Select the Commands tab see figure 6 3 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select Tools gt
376. p Projecs E Templates lt Navigation Figure 1 15 Workspace Window Navigation Tab To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Click the right mouse button anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed If Allow Docking is checked docking is allowed otherwise docking is not allowed Select Allow Docking to check or uncheck it When Allow Docking is checked you can dock a window to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window Also if Allow Docking is checked you can float them above the other HEW windows or outside the HEW main window Figure 1 16 i shows a docked Workspace window and figure 1 16 ii shows a floating Workspace window zx Workspace OF x E F Demo B B Assembly source file J lowlviste B E C source file 2 dbsct c 2 Demo c intpra c lowsre c resetprg c 4 sbrk c vecttbl c Dependencies i aes Figure 1 16 Workspace Window Docked and Floating intprg c lowsre c ES resetprg c sbrk c ie isis Ig RENESAS When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 17 If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close button ai Figure 1 17 Control
377. p_sam gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 Ox000010 6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Figure 6 38 Source Window at Execution Stop The Status window displays the following contents H8 2237 E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Emulator PCI Card Driver CPU H8S 2237 Mode fa Clock source Main 1lOMHz Sub 32kHz Run status Break Cause of last break Complex Event System Event Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms OO0us O00ns Run Time Count 00h OOmin 00s O00ms 738us 750ns Figure 6 39 Displayed Contents of the Status Window Refer to the Watch window for the value of variable i The value is 4 indicating that the break occurred after the condition had been satisfied five times Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Remove the event point Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Remove All from this menu to remove all event points 372 RENESAS 6 16 Trace Functions The trace functions of the emulator use the realtime trace buffer which is able to store the information on up to 32 768 bus cycles The content of this buffer which is constantly updated during execution is displayed in the Trace window Select Trace from the Code submenu of the View
378. pdated in a specified interval to the color selected in the Background option The specified interval is the interval for monitor acquisition available when Change Gray or Appear has been selected Detail Sets the items specific to the emulator Not used with this emulator History Displays the previous settings Notes 1 In this emulator odd addressees cannot be specified as the start addresses for monitoring 2 Selection of the foreground or background color may not be available depending on the operating system in use After setting clicking the OK button displays the Monitor window 252 RENESAS monitor monitor H OOFFEFAG Address OxOOFFEFAO 00 OO 10 23 00 OO O8 93 OxOOFFEFAS 00 OZ 12 24 00 OO OO OO OxOOFFEFBO 57 70 00 00 OO 0l 80 74 Wp t OxOOFFEFBS 00 OO 10 36 OO OO 04 IE 6 Figure 5 34 Monitor Window During user program execution the display is updated according to the setting value of the auto update interval Note Select Refresh from the popup menu when data is not displayed correctly after changing the address or content of memory 5 9 2 Changing the Monitor Settings Selecting Monitor Setting from the popup menu of the Monitor window displays the Monitor Setting dialog box which allows the settings to be changed Colors the size of accesses and the display format can be easily changed from Color or Access of the pop
379. perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction e Stepping Into a Function If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function either click the Step In toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step In e Stepping Over a Function Call If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function either click the Step Over toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step Over e Stepping Out of a Function There are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function Or alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature To step out of the current function either click the Step Out toolbar button or choose Debug gt Step Out 263 RENESAS 5 11 6 Multiple Steps You can step several instructions at
380. playing Memory Contents in Realtime 2 Read the memory content directly from the HEW to update the values without halting the user program since the bus mastership is owned by the emulator Note While the emulator reserves the bus mastership the realtime operation is disabled because the CPU stops operation This method is only available for accessing the internal ROM internal RAM and emulation memory The area used here or this method may not be available depending on the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or Enable read and write on the fly on the General page of the Configuration Properties dialog box in the online help 3 Temporarily stops the user program and reads the memory contents Note The realtime operation is disabled because the user program is stopped temporarily This method is only available for accessing the areas internal I O DT CRAM and user memory other than those in item 2 mentioned above It is possible to recognize the method for updating the value during user program execution according to the color of the R mark Blue outline R The variable s address is within the range that has been set for the monitoring function and the data is readable by using the monitoring function Blue R An updated value of the data at this location has been read by the monitoring function Black outline R The variable s address is outside the range th
381. point memory map performance and trace can be set through the dialog box Intuitive user interface Online help Common display and operability Supported host interfaces The PCI interface PC card PCMCIA interface USB interface or LAN interface can be used for connecting to the host computer Realtime emulation Realtime emulation of the user system is enabled at the maximum operating frequency of the CPU Excellent operability Using the HEW enables user program debugging using a pointing device such as a mouse The HEW enables high speed downloading of load module files Various debugging functions Various break and trace functions enable efficient debugging Breakpoints and break conditions can be set by the specific window trace information can be displayed on a window and command line functions can be used Memory access during emulation During emulation the memory contents can be read and modified 179 RENESAS 1 2 Warnings CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check all components against the component list after unpacking the emulator AMR Never place heavy objects on the casing Do not place the emulator in places where e The temperature becomes high such as in direct sunlight or near a heater For details refer to section 1 3 Environment
382. ppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key gt When this symbol is used it is always located in the left hand margin It indicates that the text to its immediate right is describing how to The how to symbol do something Components Check all the components described in the component list unpacking If the components are not complete contact a Renesas sales office RENESAS Contents HEW Part 1 OVVIE W neracian tasedapess insesacessscence jase magesoiags eodeensesasseasn iasusemeatess 1 1 1 Workspaces Projects and Files cecececcesessseecceeseseeseeseeaeeeceeeeeeeseeaesaeseeeeseaseaeeaeeaeeanes 1 12 The Man Window ieee ices aE an satis meer aineen ssieavane siento 2 1 21 The TME Bar sos eleeri eoo raa EE EE E NEE E ONE 2 1 22 The Men Baterirununaerino niir oe OEE ERE 2 123 TGS OOMB ALS seses eais oTe eS EEE E REEE EEEE ES 3 1 2 4 The Workspace WindoW sseeesesessessssesrststsesesestsesrsssrssesesentntnenentnenenenenereseent 5 1 25 The Editor Window se c lt ssccccovsensscossesoseorssevsenssassneossnessensonessondeasssecdsaedenesceteerosstes 7 1 2 6 The OUtpUb Wid OW ssa csss cccsenszeccssasavccsnesaocessnaavccs O
383. ption dialog TOOLDIR Tool installation directory Tools Administration TEMPDIR Temp directory WINDIR Windows directory WINSYSDIR Windows system directory EXEDIR Command directory USERNAME User login Version control PASSWORD User password Version control VCDIR Virtual version control directory COMMENT Comment Version control LINE Line number of an error warning RENESAS 421 For example the placeholders will be expanded as shown in table C 2 Table C 2 Placeholder Expansions Example Placeholder Expanded placeholder example FULLFILE c new workspace project file src FILEDIR c new workspace project FILENAME file src FILELEAF file EXTENSION src WORKSPDIR c new workspace WORKSPNAME workspace PROJDIR c new workspace project PROJECTNAME project CONFIGDIR c new workspace project debug CONFIGNAME debug HEWDIR c new TCINSTALL c new toolchains hitachi sh 51 1 TOOLDIR c new toolchains hitachi sh 511 TEMPDIR c Temp WINDIR c Windows WINSYSDIR c Windows System EXEDIR v ve win32 USERNAME JHARK PASSWORD 214436 VCDIR c project is mapped to x vc project COMMENT Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked LINE 12 In table C 2 we are assuming that a file path is c new workspace project file src a wor
384. ptions DI Makefile path WORKSPDIR make PROJECTNAME mak b Browse F Generate makefile before build commences Cancel Figure 2 19 Options Dialog Build Tab RENESAS 29 2 6 7 Displaying out of date files in the workspace window Files updated later than the file generated by the previous build i e out of date files are marked in the workspace window In figure 2 20 below file demo c is out of date When you click build next time this file will be re built This is also displayed for dependent projects of the current project The view of these files is updated whenever something that affects the build occurs e g options changing file addition dependencies changing files modified etc Workspace Eq Bie demo Sie embly source file intprg stc lowlvl sre vecttbl sre vhandler sre ource file dbsct c E demo c 2 lowsre c E resetprg c E sbrk c EY Download modules E demo abs 5 6 Dependencies o isisi F a 7a lowsre h sbrk h stacksct h E vect ine a Projects Templates Navigation Figure 2 20 Displaying out of date files gt To display out of date files in the workspace window 1 Select Tools gt Options The Options dialog will be displayed 2 Select the Build tab figure 2 19 3 Check the Mark out of date files check box 4 Click OK
385. r event point this event point is called the arm event An event point can reset the tested states of conditions of other event points or itself by satisfying the condition This event point is called a reset event A reset event resets event points regardless of their states where the condition is satisfied or not e g resetting the pass count Select an event point from the Event combo box To set an arm event on the selected event point select Is Armed By and check the box corresponding to each event The No occurrence of check box is used to set a condition that the arm event is in the state where its condition is not satisfied To set a reset event on the selected event point select Is Reset By and check the box corresponding to each event At the bottom of the screen is a diagram showing the current sequencing of the events figure 5 65 The S input sets arms an event and the R input resets it The legend S indicates the event is set armed by the non occurrence of the input events Figure 5 65 is an example that Ch1 is the arm event for Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 Ch3 is the arm event for Ch4 Ch2 and Ch4 are the reset events for Ch1 and Ch2 respectively To satisfy the condition of the event point having an arm event the arm event must be in the state where the condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of is selected When multiple arm events exist on one event point one of the arm events must be in the state whe
386. ral page Set the range for searching CT x Status Probes IRQ 0 General l Address Data RAW Area Tr I Upward search Start PTR 32767 End PTR fe Cancel Apply Figure 5 76 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page Trace search range Sets the range for searching Not designation Searches for information that does not match the conditions set in other pages when this box is checked Upward search Searches upwards when this box is checked Start PTR Enters a PTR value to start a search End PTR Enters a PTR value to end a search Note Along with setting the range for searching PTR values to start and end searching can be set in the Start PTR and End PTR options respectively 304 RENESAS 2 Address page Set an address condition Figure 5 77 Trace Find Dialog Box Address Page Don t care Detects no address when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified address Value Enter the address value not available when Don t care has been checked 305 RENESAS 3 Data page Set a data condition Figure 5 78 Trace Find Dialog Box Data Page Don t care Detects no data when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified data Value Enter the data value not available when Don t care has been checked 306 RENESAS 4 R W page Select the type of access cycles I x Sta
387. ram Connect Connects the debugging lt platform Initialize Disconnects the debugging platform and connects it again Disconnect Disconnects the debugging platform Download Modules Downloads the object program Unload Modules Unloads the object program Memory Search Searches for the specified value from the specified memory area Copy e Copies the specified memory fe area to the specified address Compare Compares the specified two memory areas Fill A Fills the specified value in the specified memory area Test Tests the specified memory A area Refresh Forces a manual update of the contents of all the Memory windows open Configure Overlay Selects the target section group when the overlay function is used 440 RENESAS Appendix H Command Lines Table H 1 lists the HEW commands Table H 1 HEW Commands No Command Name Abbreviation Function 1 Comment 2 ADD_FILE AF Adds a file to the current project 3 ANALYSIS AN Enables or disables performance analysis 4 ANALYSIS_RANGE AR Sets or displays a performance analysis range 5 ANALYSIS RANGE_ AD Deletes a performance analysis range DELETE 6 AUTO COMPLETE AC Enables or disables command complement function 7 ASSEMBLE AS Assembles instructions into memory 8 ASSERT Checks if an expression is true or false 9 BREAKPOINT BP Sets a breakpoint at
388. ram stops just before it is about to execute the line or instruction at which you set a program PC breakpoint If you choose Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the line marked with an arrow will be the next instruction to be executed 265 RENESAS To set a PC breakpoint by using the Breakpoints dialog box Selecting Edit gt Source Breakpoint displays the Breakpoints dialog box Mllowsre chLine 12 Cancel Edit Code Remove Remove All Figure 5 46 Breakpoints Dialog Box The Breakpoints dialog box allows the user to view the current breakpoints set Clicking the Edit Code button displays the source where each breakpoint is set The Remove or Remove All button deletes one or all breakpoints respectively The check box of each breakpoint enables or disables the breakpoint To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle the PC Breakpoints setting by either double clicking in the BP column of the line where the PC breakpoint is set or placing the cursor on the line and pressing the F9 key The setting to be toggled depends on the debugging platform 266 RENESAS 5 13 Elf Dwarf2 Support The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Key Features e Source level debugging e C C operators e C C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous
389. re assembled in turn During the linker phase all library files and output files from the compiler and assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module This module can then be downloaded and used by the debugger functionality in HEW The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phase disable a phase delete phases and so forth These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced Build Features In this chapter only the general principles and basic features will be detailed 11 RENESAS 2 2 Project Files In order for the HEW to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the project and how each file should be built figure 2 2 Add Project Files Remove Project Files Debug ON Optimize OFF Set Compiler Options List File YES Source Fil Debug OFF Optimize OFF Set Assembler Options List File YES Assembl Source Fil Debug ON z Silent YES Set Linker options Map File YES Figure 2 2 Editing a Project 12 RENESAS 2 2 1 Adding Files to a Project Before you can build your application you must first inform the High performance Embedded Workshop which files it is composed of gt To add a files to a project 1 Select Project gt Add Files or click the right mouse button on a project icon in t
390. re the condition is satisfied or not when No occurrence of selected to satisfy the condition of the event point As the condition of the arm event on one event point either of the states where the condition is satisfied or not should be set To reset an event point with a reset event the condition of the reset event must be satisfied While the condition of the reset point is satisfied no event point is reset even if the condition of the reset event is satisfied again When multiple reset events exist on one event point the event point is reset when the condition of one of reset events is satisfied 290 RENESAS 5 15 8 Setting Trigger Points The trigger point is an event to output a trigger when the specified address has been accessed Up to four trigger points can be set by using the trigger outputs four channels on the bus monitoring circuit of the emulator The settings of the trigger point are displayed and modified on the Trigger sheet ce 1 Address H OOFFDEEO Trigger output XT 2 2 Enable Address H OOFFD404 Trigger output XT 2 3 Enable Address H 00001140 Trigger output XT 2 4 Enable Address H OOFFEFS8C Trigger output Figure 5 66 Event Window Trigger Sheet Selecting Add or the event point and Edit from the popup menu in this window displays the Set Address For Trigger dialog box Set Addr rigger 2 x Address igner H OOFFDEEO M Triggerd Cancel M
391. read only copy of a file or files e Check out a read write copy of a file or files i e for editing e Check in a previously checked out file or files i e update Visual SourceSafe with the edits made e Undo a previously check out operation on a file or files i e cancel any edits made e View the status of a file e View the history of a file These commands can only be accessed via the Tools gt Version Control sub menu whereas all of the other commands can be accessed from both the toolbar and menu 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them gt To remove a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder a workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Remove Files toolbar button ith or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Remove Files menu option 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file gt To get a read only copy of a file or files from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s which you would like t
392. reak occurs Sets a 16 bit delay in bus cycles after the event has occurred before the action is taken The delay is only applicable to break events and there is only one delay counter in hardware therefore only one breakpoint can have a non zero delay The range of values is D 0 to D 65 535 only available when Break has been selected This cannot be used for an event point being used as the trace acquisition condition 288 RENESAS Required number of event occurrences Allows a 16 bit pass count to be set The event must occur the specified number of times before the action is taken The range of values is D 0 to D 65 535 Enable Sequencing Allows the event to take part in a sequence of events setting this requires the event to use an event detector Configure Sequence Displays the Event Sequencing dialog box to allow the event sequencing to be configured only available when Enable Sequencing has been selected 5 Event Sequencing dialog box This dialog box allows the user to define which events are triggered by other events If this dialog box is accessed directly or indirectly from Trace Acquisition only those events assigned to the trace subsystem are displayed If accessed from the Eventpoint window only the breakpoint or timer events are shown Event Sequencing Event Is Amed By J7 No occurrence of Is Reset By The following events Cancel F 1 E H1038 address P 2 E H
393. reserssssecsaccarsrerensveseaceneess 23 Connecting tothe User Systemic c ccceccstessevesesecvsescssovouoseoncnssdaccevaeteesesseteveubsntonedeendondses vi 2 3 1 Example of Connecting the User System Interface Cable Head tO the WSEt Sy StS dco scccivsssssuwoscsisvesussrosveasaeevevsouestestssenyevensevacea ETTEN S 184 2 3 2 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Emulator 0 00000 185 2 3 3 Plugging the User System Interface Cable Body into the Cable Head 185 2A POWEE SUPPLY ierre EEEO TEE ENEE EE E banyRea ease eo 2 4 1 AC Adapter 24 2 Polarity 2 4 3 Power Supply Monitor Circuit 2 0 0 ceesceceeeecseeeseeeseessseeseeeeeeeaes 186 2 5 SIMM Memory Module s ccsc ssccsesnseesecsaseessensencscenssececerasoonserssesccersnesssensienssenstengsansesncte 186 2 5 1 Optional SIMM Memory Module Configuration cece eee teeeeeee 186 2 6 Hardware Iinterface eniri ise s aA e ENEAN EEE dieses ted 187 2 6 1 Signal Protection on the emulator oo eee cece ce ceceeceeeeeeeseeeesseeeseetaeeeeaes 187 2 6 2 User System Interface Circuits sesscsssscsessssessscsssecssssesscssssesssessessesesseees 187 2 6 3 Clock Oscillator vcs ssstccdseds sesdannlscdeassiveosiersssuconvensssenedessvanssaasseisacssbatsvastaueeceeccsse gt 187 2 6 4 External Probe 1 EXT1 Trigger Output eee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaes 187 2 6 5 External Probe 2 EXT2 Trigger Output cece cee eeseeeeceeeeeeteeeenee 188 2 6 6
394. ress page Set address conditions Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ7 0 General Address Data RAW Area T Don t care Setting Point Range From F To Cancel Apply Don t care Setting Point Range From To Figure 5 86 Trace Filter Dialog Box Address Page Detects no address when this box is checked Detects the specified address Specifies a single address not available when Don t care has been checked Specifies an address range not available when Don t care has been checked Enter a single address or the start of the address range not available when Don t care has been checked Enter a single address or the end of the address range only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the address range the start and end of the address range can be set in the From and To options respectively 316 RENESAS 3 Data page Set a data condition Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data l RAW Area Setting Point Range From F To Cancel Apply Figure 5 87 Trace Filter Dialog Box Data Page Don t care Detects no data when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified data Point Specifies single data not available when Don t care has been checked Range Specifies a data range not available when Don
395. rk char amp heap_area End address of area assigned LHASA AAA AAA AACA JE JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JEJE A JE E JE JE AA AAA AAC BAH JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE APA AHA IAS sbrk Data write Return value Start address of the assigned area Pass 1 Failure LS FHH HE E HE IE IE E JE JE IE JE E JE JE JE JE E JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE IE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE MEME JE EE char sbrk unsigned long size Assigned area size char p if brk size gt heap_area heap HEAPSIZE Empty area size x gt resetprg c dbscte gt sbtk c Figure 1 18 Editor Window The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Format Views menu option This dialog allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Tools gt Option menu option For further details on how to use and configure the editor refer to chapter 4 Using the Editor 1 2 6 The Output Window The Output window by default has four tabs on display The Bu
396. rm and then click the Next button For details on the session file refer to section 4 4 Debug Sessions 207 RENESAS 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of HEW except for the emulator Target name y E6000 Emulator CPU 2000 Configuration name Debue_yyyy E6000_Emu lator_CP Detail options Value Modify Figure 4 10 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platforms were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 4 9 set the name of a configuration file for each of them each time pressing the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Complete the creation of a new workspace according to the instructions on the screen This activates the HEW 5 After the HEW has been activated connect the emulator However it is not necessary to connect the emulator immediately after the HEW has been activated Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation or without the setting at emulator activation For details on the connection of the emulator refer to section 4 5 Connecting the Emulator 208 RENESAS 4 2 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the HEW is activated select Browse to another project wor
397. rogram Counter Address Wherever you can enter an address or value into the HEW you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by the hash character the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you open the Set Address dialog box and enter the expression pc the Source or Disassembly window will display the current PC address It also allows the offset of the current PC to be displayed by entering an expression with the PC register plus an offset e g PC 0x100 230 RENESAS 5 3 Debugging with the Command Line Interface Use the Command Line window to enter text based commands instead of window menus and commands 5 3 1 Opening the Command Line Window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button amp to open the Command Line window Command Line no batch File no log file Figure 5 11 Command Line Window This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands A series of predefined command lines can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt lt on the last line For information on the available commands refer to appendix G Command Lines and the on line help If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by co
398. rward slash as version control directory delimiter 148 RENESAS 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up Each workspace can have a different version control set up The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can import them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces gt To export a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Export button A standard file save dialog will be displayed Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 3 Enter the name of the file and then click OK gt To import a version control set up 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Click the Import button A standard file open dialog will be displayed Browse to the HVC file which you would like to import 3 Select the file and then click OK 149 RENESAS 150 RENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system At the time of writing the HEW can only attach to versions 5 0 and 6 0 of Visual SourceSafe The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a projec
399. s p_sam gt s0 a 0 within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address Lo edit box of the Address group box In this example enter H 00001082 Note This dialog box differs according to the product For the items of each product refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help e Click the OK button The PC breakpoint that has been set is displayed in the Event window iix Program Enable PC H 00001082 Tutorial cpp 47 Break 4 gt Breakpoint Figure 6 32 Event Window PC Breakpoint Setting Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help 368 RENESAS e Close the Event window e To stop the tutorial program at the breakpoint select Reset Go from the Debug menu The program runs until it stops at the breakpoint that has been set 0x00001038 void tutorial void 0x00001044 long a 10 long j ine i class Sample p_sam Ox00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i jf 0x00001050 j rand 0x00001058 1f j lt 0J 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ali j 0x00001070 p_sam gt sort a Ox0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010
400. s Ox0000105c ali j Dependencies E sbrk h 0x00001070 t p_sam gt sort a th Ox0000107a p_sam gt change a Z stackscth Ox00001082 p_sam gt s0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 000001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010ac p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt sS a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_sam gt s7 a 7 O0x000010de p_sam gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_sam gt s9 a 9 0x000010f6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Figure 6 4 Source Window Setting a PC Breakpoint The symbol will appear on the line containing the sort function This shows that a PC breakpoint has been set 351 RENESAS 6 5 Setting Registers Set a value of the program counter before executing the program e Select Registers from the CPU submenu of the View menu The Register window is displayed Register loj x Register Value ERO H 00000000 ER1 H 00000000 ERZ H 00000000 ERS H 00000000 ER4 H 00000000 ERS H 00000000 ER6 H 00000000 ER H 00000010 PC H 000400 CCR H 80 IQ EXR B O Te 111 Figure 6 5 Register Window e To change the value of the program counter PC double click the value area in the Register window with the mouse The following dialog box is then displayed and the value can be changed Set the program counter to H 00000400 in this tutorial program and click the OK button Value pooo
401. s can be specified Open Log File 24x Loe File D Browse m Figure 5 13 Open Log File Dialog Box Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the current log 5 3 6 Starting or Stopping Logging Choose Logging from the popup menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 5 3 7 Entering a Full Path to the File It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files 232 RENESAS Choose Browse from the popup menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 5 3 8 Pasting a Placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the popup menu to paste the s
402. s dialog can be toggled via this menu item e Find Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the HEW editor e Find next Finds the next string that meets the find requirements e Find previous Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements e Previous Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference e Next Difference Automatically jumps the view to the next difference e Refresh comparison Refreshs the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison The difference window also allows the colours in the view to be customised This procedure is outlined below gt To change the colors viewed in the difference window 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The format views dialog is displayed 2 Expand the difference view The dialog is shown and looks the same as figure 11 6 3 Select the category you want to change The color display tab is displayed and allows modification The categories available are Left hand side moved lines Left hand side different lines Right hand side moved lines and Right hand side different lines 4 Click OK to keep the changes 165 RENESAS Coverage 10 Register TCL Toolkit Event Watch LHS Different Lines LHS Moved Lines RHS Different Lines RHS Moved Lines Selected Text PY Text Performance Analysis Courier New
403. s displayed that asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 3 If you want to modify an existing template use the Template name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify 4 Enter the desired text into the Template text text area You can copy text from another editor window and then paste it into this dialog using CTRL V 5 There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop list at the bottom of the edit template dialog These range from CTRL 0 to CTRL 9 6 Enter the following placeholder to insert special information when the template is inserted 89 RENESAS Table 4 2 Placeholders Used in Templates Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With File path name FULLFILE Filename including full path File name FILENAME Filename excluding path including extension File leaf FILELEAF Filename excluding path and extension Workspace name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Project name PROJECTNAME Project name Line number LINE First line number of template insertion Time TIME Current time Date text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form Date day month year DATE_DMY Current date in dd mm yy form Date month day year DATE_MDY Current date in mm dd
404. s item is configuration based so you can have a different makefile options for each configuration For further details on HMAKE refer to Appendix F HMAKE User Guide F 1 3 Parameters 8 The final option is the generate make file before build This will launch the default make file creation utility before the makefile is executed This means the makefile will always be up to date with the HEW project system 9 Click OK to save the changes 65 RENESAS i xx Build Editor Workspace Confirmation Network Errors and warnings J Stop build if the number of errors exceeds 0 J Stop build if the number of wamings exceeds 0 m Show I Command line J Initial directory I Environment J Mark out of date files m Makefile build Command excluding parameters sH EWDIR hmake exe gt Browse IV Use makefile build system Makefile options E Makefile path SW ORKSFDIR makeS PR OJECTNAME mak gt Browse Cancel Figure 3 24 Option Dialog Build tab Once this system is setup the build button menu and keyboard shortcuts are linked to the makefile tool execution All output is directed to the output window as in the case of the normal build If you are using a toolchain supported by HEW errors and warnings can be double clicked to jump to the source files The help link should also be supported Note when using the HMAKE exe system the build all butto
405. s not necessary to specify any dependants if you wish the commands to always be executed A description block has the following syntax lt targetl gt lt target2 gt lt dependantl gt lt dependant2 gt gt lt command1i gt gt lt command2 gt gt lt commandn gt Any number of white space characters are allowed between the last target and the character and the first dependant and the character No white space is allowed before the first target Each target and each dependant must be separated by at least one white space character A tab character must be present at the start of a line containing a command Variables may be used in a description block using the syntax specified above under variable declarations There follows some examples of valid description blocks one of which uses the variable specified above under variable declarations e dirl filel obj c dirl filel c c dirl filel h gt gcc c dirl filel c OUTPUT INPUT DEPEND S EXECUTABLE INPUT F 3 2 Special commands There are two special commands which can be used in a description block The cd command changes the current directory and the set command sets an environment variable which will then be in use for the duration of the make file execution Both are used in the same way as the DOS equivalents There follows some examples of valid description blocks which use these commands CHANGEDIR gt ed c
406. s selected 5 15 11 Enabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Enable from the popup menu to enable the selected event point 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Disable from the popup menu to disable the selected event point When an event point is disabled the event point will remain in the list but an event will not occur when the specified conditions have been satisfied 5 15 13 Deleting an Event Point Select an event point and choose Delete from the popup menu to remove the selected event point To retain the event point but not have it cause an event when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 5 15 12 Disabling an Event Point Note No trigger point can be deleted Use the Disable option to clear the settings 5 15 14 Deleting All Event Points Choose Delete All from the popup menu to remove all event points Note No trigger point can be deleted If Delete All is selected the settings of all channels become disabled 5 15 15 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point Select an event point and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to open the Source or Disassembly window at address of event point The Go to Source menu is only available when one event point that has the corresponding source file is selected 292 RENESAS 5 16 Viewing the Trace Information The emulator acquires the results of each instruction execution into the
407. s375ns 0000h000min000s000ms785uss00ns 0000h000min000s000ms805us875ns 0000h000min000s000ms806us000ns 0000h000min0005000ms826us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms826uss00ns 0000h000min000s000ms846us875ns 0000h000min000s000ms847us000ns 0000h000min0005000ms867us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms867usso0ns NONOHOANOmi nANNsAnNomssaIMsA75ns 0000h000min0003000ms000us000ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns 0000h000min0003000ms020us375ns 0000h000min000s000ms000us125ns NONAhANominANNsANomsn7Nns375ns 101 x i Figure 6 53 Trace Window Displaying the Result If you have trouble viewing a column drag the header vertical bars below the title bar to adjust the width of the column 382 RENESAS 12 Remove the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Breakpoints window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to remove all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information To disable time stamping select Disabled in the C
408. se the Debug Sessions dialog box e To remove a session 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to remove 3 Click the Remove button Note that the current session cannot be removed 4 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box e To view the session properties 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for 3 Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 18 n Properties 2 x Name Sessiomoox_E6000_Emulator_CP Location C Hew2 sample sample Sessiomoox _E6000 Last modified 17 37 11 Thursday December 12 2002 Canca I Read only Figure 4 18 Session Properties Dialog Box 214 RENESAS e To make a session read only 1 2 3 4 5 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 Select the session you would like to make read only Click the Properties button to display the Session Properties dialog box figure 4 18 Check the Read only check box to make the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally Click the OK button e To save a session with a different name 1
409. sion control system with the local copy Check Out File s Get a writable local copy of the selected file s from version control system Status of File s View the status of the selected file s 135 RENESAS gt To modify a system menu toolbar option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be displayed 2 Select the option to be modified from the System menu options and toolbar buttons list and then click the Modify button The dialog shown in figure 8 3 will be displayed This figure shows a dialog when Add File s has been selected for example 3 Commands are added via the Add button See the section Defining Version Control Commands later in this chapter for further information 4 Close the Define Command for lt command gt dialog by clicking OK 5 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking OK Define Commands for Add File s BEI Commands Move up Move down Figure 8 3 Modify System Menu Option Example 136 RENESAS 8 1 2 User menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar gt To create a new version control menu option 1 Select Version Control gt Configure The dialog shown in figure 8 1 will be display
410. space Build File Stop Launch Debugger View Output 2 eaa zili delw gt Figure 1 8 Standard Toolbar Template Selection Define Template Ihsert Template ail eas T Templated T Figure 1 9 Templates Toolbar Add File s Check Out File s Remove File s Check h File pte File ts i a Status AlS gA Figure 1 10 Version Control Toolbar Ignore white space Compare files Find next Find previous Find previous difference Find next difference P a t a ATF E Figure 1 11 Difference Toolbar ne Figure 1 12 Map Toolbar RENESAS When the Standard toolbar or a toolbar is docked it has a control bar as shown in figure 1 13 i If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its control bar to the new location Figure 1 13 i shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and figure 1 13 ii shows the Standard toolbar when it is floating i e Debus debug zA EO jin a Standard ix 2 Debus oebus TA ge fra Al Figure 1 13 Standard Toolbar Docked and Floating To dock a toolbar 1 Double click on the title bar of a floating toolbar or 2 Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes To float a toolbar 1
411. t Properties Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Event window is displayed as shown below Event iol x Type state condition ction O Chl E Enable Address H 0000105C Tutorial cpp 42 address count D S Break Ch2 E Empty Ch3 E Empty Ch4 E Empty Ch5 E Empty Ch E Empty Ch E Empty Ch E Empty Cho R Empty Ch10 R Empty Ch11 R Empty Chl2 R Empty ae Breakpomnt Event Trigger Figure 6 37 Event Window Setting Completed Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Select Reset Go from the Debug menu to stop the tutorial program at breakpoints The program runs then stops at the condition specified under Chl 371 RENESAS 0x00001038 void tutorial void 0x00001044 long a 10 long j int i class Sample p_sam 0x00001046 P_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i 0x00001050 j rand 0x00001058 aE x lt 0J 0x0000105a j j 0x0000105c ios a i j J 0x00001070 p_san gt sort a 0x0000107a p_sam gt change a 0x00001082 p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0x0000108a p_sam gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_sam gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 0x000010se p_sam gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_sam gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 P
412. t care has been checked From Enter single data or the minimum value of the data range not available when Don t care has been checked To Enter the maximum value of the data range only available when Range has been selected Note Along with setting the data range the minimum and maximum values can be set in the From and To options respectively 317 RENESAS 4 R W page Select the type of access cycles Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ7 0 General Address Data RAW Area r Setting RD WR Cancel Apply Figure 5 88 Trace Filter Dialog Box R W Page Don t care Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified read write condition RD Detects read cycles when this box is checked not available when Don t care has been checked WR Detects write cycles when this box is checked not available when Don t care has been checked 318 RENESAS 5 Area page Select the area being accessed The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ7 0 General Address Data RAV Area Figure 5 89 Trace Filter Dialog Box Area Page Don t care Detects no area condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified area condition not available when Don t care
413. t field D 1 File format Bit Field Not Supported Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode The Register definition entry is entered in the format lt name gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or longword default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly Comment
414. t inside a Visual SourceSafe database It allows you to quickly invoke the standard commands either by selecting an option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a Workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system gt To use Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 1 Select Tools gt Version Control gt Select The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed figure 7 3 which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version Control Systems list and click the Select button 3 Click OK to confirm the selection The SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed figure 9 1 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe login into Username and password into Password 5 Enter into Database path the full path to the Visual SourceSafe database i e SRCSAFE INI into which you would like to add this project 6 Click OK The Create SourceSafe Project dialog is invoked figure 9 2 7 The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field sh
415. ta The content of the trace buffer will not be changed even when the filtering function is used Acquiring useful information as much as possible by the Trace Acquisition settings improves the efficiency in analysis of data because the capacity of the trace buffer is limited Use the filtering function in the Trace Filter dialog box To open the Trace Filter dialog box select Filter from the popup menu The Trace Filter dialog box has the following pages Table 5 6 Trace Filter Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the range for filtering Address Sets address conditions Data Sets data conditions R W Selects the type of access cycles Area Selects the area being accessed not available when a time stamp is acquired Status Sets the status of a bus not available when a time stamp is acquired Probes Selects the states of four probe signals not available when a time stamp is acquired IRQ7 0 Selects the states of eight IRQ input signals not available when a time stamp is acquired Timestamp Specifies the time stamp value for bus cycles only available when a time stamp is acquired Note Items other than General Address Data R W Area Status Probes and Timestamp vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 8 Software Specifications Specific to This Product or the online help Set filtering conditions and
416. tects no IRQ input condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified IRQ input condition IRQ5 to IRQO Select IRQ input conditions not available when Don t care has been checked Don t care Detects no selected IRQ input condition High The status of the IRQ input is high Low The status of the IRQ input is low 413 RENESAS 8 2 Notes on Usage of the H8S 2612 E6000 Emulator There are the following notes on usage of the emulator 8 2 1 Environment for Execution of the Tutorial Program To execute the tutorial program specify Tutorial hws stored in the following directory HEW installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000 2612 Tutorial 8 2 2 T O Register Differences between the Actual MCU and the Emulator In the E6000 emulator one evaluation chip emulates several types of MCU Therefore there are some differences in I O registers between an actual MCU and the emulator Note these differences when accessing the T O registers T O port is in the input state at default The I O register contents indicate the emulator port status When the user system interface cable is not connected the read value is 1 due to pull up resistors In the emulator accesses to the following registers for controlling the flash memory are invalid e RAM emulation register RAMER H FEDB e Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 H FFA8 e Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 H FFA9 e
417. than the internal HEW system when build is clicked The standard HEW integrated build should be fine for all of your building requirements However in some cases you may feel the need to use makefiles rather than relying on the HEW internal make system The techniques to do this are described below 2 To set up the internal makefile execution 1 Create a base HEW workspace in which to launch your makefile in It makes sense if this is the same toolchain as the one to be used in your makefile Although this is not essential 2 Click on Tools gt Options 3 Click the build tab figure 3 24 Select the makefile command which should be used By default this is set to the Renesas make tool shipped with HEW This is called HMAKE exe and is located in the HEW installation directory HEWDIR 5 Click the Use makefile build system check box This tells the HEW that when the build button is clicked that makefile should be executed rather than the internal build 6 Setup the makefile path This defaults to the location which HEW will generate makefiles to This item is configuration based so you can have a different makefile for each configuration Note You do not need to use a makefile generated by HEW It can be any format as long as your make tool supports it 7 Setup the makefile options HMAKE allows the user to specify project or configuration selection options so that different builds can be launched from the same file Again thi
418. the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list gt To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button 52 RENESAS 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tab The Dependent Files tab figure 3 14 is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input file or files were last modified If not the phase is not executed for the files Options Output Files Dependent Files l ICONFIGDIR SFile5 oby ICONFIGDIR SFile6 obj CONFIGDIR File obj z CONFIGDIR FileS obj Modify c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File1 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File2 obj Remove c SHew Worksp Project D ebug File3 obj c Hew Worksp Project D ebug File4 obj Add if Figure 3 14 Dependent Files Tab in Custom Options 53 RENESAS gt To add a dependent file 1 Click Add The Add Dependent File dialog will be invoked figure 3 15 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click OK to add this output file to the list Placeholder popup menu oo 2 Browse Cancel Figure 3 15 Add Dependent File Dialog gt To modi
419. the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 17 Check the Add new session radio button Enter a name for the session Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box This creates a file with the name entered in step 4 If a file with this name already exists an error is displayed AWRYN SS Add new Figure 4 17 Add new session Dialog Box 213 RENESAS e To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Select Options gt Debug Sessions to display the Debug Sessions dialog box figure 4 16 2 Click the Add button to display the Add new session dialog box figure 4 17 3 Check the Use an existing session file radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 5 Enter the file name of an existing session file that you would like to import into the current project or click the Browse button to select the file location If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is not checked the imported new session file is generated in the project directory If the Open and maintain link to session file check box is checked a new session file is not generated in the project directory but is linked to the current session file Tf the Make session file link read only check box is checked the linked session file is used as read only 6 Click the OK button to clo
420. the HEW it is also possible to Drag and Drop files from Windows Explorer onto the workspace window These files will be automatically added to the project and are displayed in the folder in which they were dragged to Note If you add a file to a project when it is an unrecognized file type then it will still be added to the project Certain functions will be disabled with reference to this file When this file is double clicked in the workspace window instead of opening the file in the editor the open operation is passed to Windows operating system The default open operation is then carried out as if the file was opened in Windows Explorer To view the current defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog see the section on file extensions later in this chapter RENESAS 2 2 2 Removing Files from a Project Files can be individually removed from a project selections of files can be removed or all files can be removed gt To remove files from a project 1 Select Project gt Remove Files or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Remove Files from the pop up menu see figure 2 5 The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed figure 2 6 Open dbsct c Build dbsct c Build Options Add Files INS Remove Files Exclude Build dbsct c version Control gt Configure View
421. the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 filel c If the get command is applied to FILE1 C then 1 x vc sw app project1 is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application project1 2 FILEL C is substituted for FILENAME 143 RENESAS Project File C work application projectl filel c Arguments S VCDIR FILENAME 1 2 Command X vc sw app projectl filel c Figure 8 10 Example of Substitution 8 3 2 Specifying Environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog to view the current settings figure 8 7 To add a new environment variable click the Add button beside the Environment list the dialog shown in Figure will be invoked Enter the variable name into the Variable field the variable s value into the Value field and then click OK to add the new variable to the Environment list Environment Variable 24x Variable Cancel Value p Placeholder popup menu Figure 8 11 Environment Variable Dialog To modify an environment variable select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list and then click the Modify
422. the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Check the Include subfolders check box if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 5 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 6 The results of the search are shown in the Located Tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click Uninstall to uninstall a component 7 Click Exit to exit the dialog A component may only be uninstalled if it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool which is registered then the dialog shown in figure 5 9 will be displayed In such a case you must return to the Tools Administration dialog via Tools gt Administration unregister the tool and then invoke the tool uninstaller again 101 RENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop Figure 5 9 Unable to Uninstall Tool If a tool is not registered with the HEW then the dialog shown in figure 5 10 will be displayed when the Unregister button is clicked This confirmation dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the Yes button To abort the uninstall click the No or Cancel buttons
423. then hmake will exit with code 1 Otherwise hmake will exit with code 0 See below for file syntax and how to specify exit code conditions F 1 3 Parameters The following table shows the available parameters and their function Table F 1 hmake s parameters and functions Parameter Function A Execute all commands regardless of input output file status Equivalent to a Build All N Use status of input output files to calculate what commands need to be executed as normal and then display the commands but do not execute them 1 Display help info 431 RENESAS F 2 File syntax There are four basic types of statement used in a hmake file the variable declaration the description block the comment and the message command These can be combined in any order to produce a hmake file but a variable must be declared in a variable declaration before it is used in a description block or other variable declaration The first all statement used in nmake files is not required in a hmake file Commands are executed in order as they appear in the make file Note the character is used to show were a tab character must be used in order to keep the make file syntactically correct F 2 1 Variable declarations A variable declaration declares a variable which can then be used in any statement throughout the rest of the hmake file A declaration has the following syntax lt variable name gt lt value gt Any number of
424. then press the OK button This starts filtering according to the conditions Clicking the Cancel button closes the Trace Filter dialog box which holds the settings at the time when the dialog box was opened In filtering only the trace information that satisfies one or more filtering conditions set in the above pages will be displayed in the Trace window Filtering conditions can be changed several times to analyze data because the content of the trace buffer is not changed by filtering 314 RENESAS 1 General page Set the range for filtering Trace Filter Status Probes IRQ 0 General l Address Data RAW Area T Enable Filter an Not designation Trace display range Start PTR End PTR maoo Cancel Apply Figure 5 85 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page Don t care other pages Only selects the cycle number when this box is checked Other options become invalid Enable Filter Enables the filter when this box is checked No Filters information that does not match the conditions set in those pages when this box is checked Trace display range Sets the range for filtering Start PTR Enters a PTR value to start filtering End PTR Enters a PTR value to end filtering Note Along with setting the range for filtering PTR values to start and end filtering can be set in the Start PTR and End PTR options respectively 315 RENESAS 2 Add
425. tion 1 Select the workspace icon from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Click the right mouse button to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The dialog shown in figure 6 10 will be displayed 3 Enter the description into the Information field 4 Check the Show workspace information on workspace open check box if you want a workspace properties dialog to be launched on opening a workspace This check box has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace on the Workspace tab of the Options dialog 5 Click OK to save the description on the Information dialog Click the Cancel button not to save the description 120 RENESAS Workspace Properties Name Demo Location C Hew2 Demo Demo hws Last modified 23 06 54 Friday June 20 2003 cne CPU family SuperH RISC engine Tool chain Hitachi SuperH Standard Information No workspace information available IV Show workspace information on workspace open Figure 6 10 Workspace Properties Dialog When a workspace is opened the High performance Embedded Workshop can display this information so that it is possible to determine whether the workspace is the desired workspace To display this information on opening a workspace set the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box 6 4 4 Save workspace bef
426. tion and in the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement mode for measuring the hardware performance Access Type option 8 1 9 Monitoring Function This emulator incorporates the bus monitoring circuit as the standard which thus allows a use of the monitoring function to update the content of memory without affecting the realtime operation 8 1 10 Trigger Points This emulator incorporates the bus monitoring circuit as the standard which thus allows a use of trigger points that can be set on the Trigger sheet in the Event window 409 RENESAS 8 1 11 Trace Information Selecting View gt Code gt Trace or clicking the Trace toolbar button displays the Trace window Trace information that can be acquired by the emulator and trace information items to be displayed are as listed below PTR Cycle number in the trace buffer When the most recent record is record 0 earlier record numbers go backwards 1 2 If a delay count has been set the cycle number where the trace stop condition has been satisfied is record 0 For the cycle during delay executed until the trace has stopped earlier record numbers go forward 1 2 the most recent record Address Address 6 digit hexadecimal Instruction Disassembled code of the executed instruction Data Data bus value displayed as 2 digit or 4 digit hexadecimal R W Whether access was read RD or write WR Ar
427. tion out of the drop down list of the Based on configuration field Click OK on both dialogs to create the new configuration gt To remove a configuration 1 Select Options gt Build Configurations to display the Build Configurations dialog figure 2 16 2 Select the configuration that you want to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Click OK to close the Build Configurations dialog 25 RENESAS 2 6 Building a Project The outline of the build process is shown in figure 2 1 2 6 1 Building a Project The build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file test c include s the file header h and the latter has changed since the last build the file test c will be recompiled gt To perform a build Select Build gt Build or click the build toolbar button project icon in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Build from the pop up menu The build all option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced gt To perform a build all Select Build gt Build All or click the build all toolbar button or click the right mouse button on a project icon in the
428. trace buffer as trace information and displays it in the Trace window The conditions for the trace information acquisition can be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Since trace information in bus cycles is acquired by the hardware circuit and stored in the trace buffer the realtime operation is retained The Trace window displays the content of the trace buffer which records up to 32 768 bus cycles from the last program run and is always updated 5 16 1 Opening the Trace Window To open the Trace window choose View gt Code gt Trace or click the Trace toolbar button 5 16 2 Acquiring Trace Information When the emulator does not set the acquisition condition of the trace information all bus cycles are acquired by default without any condition free trace mode In the free trace mode trace acquisition is started with the execution of the user program and stopped by halting the user program The acquired trace information is displayed in the Trace window alo xj PTR Address Instruction Data R W Area Status Clock Probes NMI IRQ7 0 Timestamp Source Label Timestanp Difterence 4 05550 000000 0000 RD ROM DATA 1 ma r ammm 05549 000002 0400 RD ROM DATA 1 iii i un 05548 000400 MOV L H 00F 7a07 RD ROM PROG 1 iu r puun __entry v Power 05547 000402 OOE RD ROM PROG 1 uuo 1 nuun 05546 000404 efcO RD ROM PROG 1 lull Do quai 05545 000406 ORC B H 80 CCR 0480 RD ROM PROG
429. ts to be used as trace acquisition conditions Adds a new event point Changes the setting for the selected event point Configures an event sequence for the event point being used as a trace acquisition condition To set up the sequence an event must have been set Deletes the selected event point Deletes all event points The bus cycles that can be specified by the Suppress option vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas The trace buffer is used for the time stamp information and some of the trace information Therefore when the time stamp is acquired it is impossible to acquire the trace information other than PTR Address Instruction Data R W Source Label Timestamp and Timestamp Difference disabled If an event that is used for the range trace or trace stop function is deleted that function becomes RENESAS 2 Stop page Sets trace stop conditions It is possible to set trace stop conditions with and without delay with both allowed simultaneously Figure 5 70 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Stop Page Stop Without Delay Defines a trace stop condition Enable Checking this box enables a trace stop Events Lists the event points where trace acquisition conditions have been set If the box that corresponds to an event point is checked trace acquisition will be stopped when that event is satisfied only available
430. tus Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAW Area ro Setting Sting RD Cancel Apply Figure 5 79 Trace Find Dialog Box R W Page Don t care Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified read write condition String Select a read write condition not available when Don t care has been checked RD Read cycle WR Write cycle 307 RENESAS 5 Area page Select the area being accessed The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired CT x Status Probes IRQ 0 General Address Data RAw Area ro Setting String ROM he Cancel Apply Figure 5 80 Trace Find Dialog Box Area Page Don t care Detects no area condition when this box is checked Setting Detects the specified area condition String Select an area condition not available when Don t care has been checked Note Available areas vary according to the emulator in use For details refer to section 5 15 4 Signals to Indicate Bus States and Areas 308 RENESAS 6 Status page Select the status of a bus The selection is not available when a time stamp is acquired CT x General Address Data Rew Area Status Probes Razo O pi Setting String PROG x Cancel Apply Figure 5 81 Trace Find Dialog Box Status Page Don t care Detects no bus cond
431. u 333 RENESAS form View 896 Figure 5 103 Waveform View Window Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis shows the sampling value 5 19 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh in the popup menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops 5 19 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the popup menu immediately updates the window contents 5 19 4 Zoom In Display Selecting Zoom In from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 5 19 5 Zoom Out Display Selecting Zoom Out from the popup menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis reduced 5 19 6 Resetting the Zoom Display Selecting Reset Zoom from the popup menu displays the waveforms in its original size 5 19 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the popup menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 5 19 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale In the XScale submenu of the popup menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 334 RENESAS 5 19 9 Non Display of Cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the popup menu hides the cursor display 5 19 10 Displaying the Sampling Information Selecting Sample Information from the popup menu displays the Sample Infor
432. u item 2 Select the configuration you wish to copy in the current configuration list This defaults to the currently loaded configuration 3 Click the Copy to button this displays a dialog and asks you which one of the configurations in the current project you wish to copy the current linkage order to Select a configuration and click OK 4 Click OK to verify and save the changes 67 RENESAS 68 RENESAS 4 Using the Editor This chapter describes how to use the editor that is provided with the High performance Embedded Workshop 4 1 The Editor Window The editor window figure 4 1 contains the file windows that are being viewed or edited Only one window is active at anytime This window is called the active window or current window and its title bar will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure 4 1 All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window i e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible e Press CTRL TAB to cycle through the windows one after another e Select the window by name from the Window menu e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window When a file has been edited an asterisk is appended to the window s title bar The asterisk remains there until the file is saved The asterisk is
433. under the templates folder The toolchain templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the HEW system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file It is also possible to drag an area of text from the editor into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on this view displays a pop up so that you can quickly add a new template remove the current selection and edit the current selection 4 12 2 Deleting a Template gt To delete a template 1 Select Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates select Templates gt Define Templates from the local menu or click on the define template bookmark toolbar button ole The dialog shown in figure 4 14 will be displayed 2 Use the Template name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking OK saves the template changes and dismisses the dialog 4 12 3 Inserting a Template gt To insert a template 1 Select a template in the toolbar then click the insert template toolbar button ar select Edit gt Templates gt Insert Template or select Templates gt Insert Template from the local menu The dialog is dismissed and the chosen template is added to the current editor window Note It is also possible to use the defined keyboard shortcut or drag the template from the templates v
434. up menu 5 9 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor During user program execution the display of the Monitor window is automatically updated according to the auto update interval Select Lock Refresh from the popup menu of the Monitor window to stop the update of display The characters in the address section are displayed in black and the update of display is stopped Selecting Lock Refresh again from the popup menu cancels the stopped state 5 9 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings Selecting Close from the popup menu of the Monitor window to be deleted closes the Monitor window and deletes the monitor settings 5 9 5 Monitoring Variables Using the Watch window refers to the value of any variables When the address of the variable registered in the Watch window exists within the monitoring range that has been set by the Monitor function the value of the variable can be updated and displayed This function allows checking the content of a variable without affecting the realtime operation For the Watch window refer to section 5 14 3 Watch Window 253 RENESAS 5 9 6 Hiding the Monitor Window When using the Monitor function to monitor the value of a variable from the Watch window hide the Monitor window for the effective use of the screen The current monitoring information is listed as the submenu when selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor The list consists of the Monitor window name
435. up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request Delete Label_BTBL Figure 5 40 Message Box for Confirming Label Deletion If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box 5 10 5 Deleting All Labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the popup menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request Delete All Labels T Don t ask this question again Cancel Figure 5 41 Message Box for Confirming All Label Deletion If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not necessary then check the Don t ask this question again check box 258 RENESAS 5 10 6 Loading Labels from a File A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the popup menu to open the Load Symbols dialog box Load Symbols Look in fareut sis al c tutorial sym File name my_code sym Files of type l Symbol Files syrm 7 Cancel Figure 5 42 Load Symbols Dialog Box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows open file dialog box select the file and click Open to start loading The standard file extension for symbol files is sym 5 10 7 S
436. ure 8 14 Log in Dialog 147 RENESAS 8 4 Controlling Execution The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog figure 8 13 allows you to control the way in which the version control tool is executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file 8 4 1 Prompt before executing command If this check box is set then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed figure 8 15 which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated check box Clicking OK will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking Cancel will abort the operation History 21 x demo c c hew demo demo sbrk c c hew demo demo vecttbl sre c hew demo demo Figure 8 15 Command Prompt Dialog 8 4 2 Run in DOS Window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this check box 8 4 3 Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the placeholder VCDIR it uses the backward slash character V to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then set the Use fo
437. urrent single phase If the builder does not respond after a longer period of time you can select Build gt Terminate Current Tool which will attempt to forcibly terminate the current process Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again I have a text file in the editor but it does not show any syntax coloring Ensure that you have named the file i e saved it and that the Enable syntax coloring check box is set on the Editor tab of the Tools Options dialog which is launched via Tools gt Options HEW checks a file group to which the file s extension belongs and decides whether the file is colored To view the current defined extensions and their file groups use the File Extensions dialog which is launched via Project gt File Extensions To view coloring information use the Format tab of the Tools Options dialog which is launched via Tools gt Options See the Syntax Coloring section in chapter 4 Using the Editor for details I want to change the settings of a tool but the Tools gt Administration menu option cannot be selected Tools gt Administration cannot be selected while a workspace is open To enter the Tool Administration dialog first close the current workspace I did not edit any of the project files But some of files
438. ury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information lt tENESAS AWARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance 2 Always switch OFF the E6000 emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS 3 Always before connecting any CABLES make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned 4 Supply power according to the power specifications and do not apply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided power cable RENESAS CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a r
439. user program from the reset vector address tt Go To Cursor Starts executing the user program at the current PC until the PC reaches the address indicated by the current text cursor position Sets the PC to the address at a5 the row of the text cursor mi me Set PC To Cursor Canl Run Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter the PC or PC breakpoint during executing the user program Display PC Shift Opens the Editor or Ctrl Y Las Disassembly window at the address of the PC Step In F11 nw Executes a block of user program before breaking Step Over F10 7 Executes a block of user o program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Step Out Shift A Executes the user program to F11 O reach the end of the current function Step Launches the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Step Auto Steps only one source line when Mode the Source window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Assembly Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Source Steps only one source line 439 RENESAS Table G 1 GUI Menus cont Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks Debug Halt Program Esc Stops the execution of the user cont prog
440. ut Files PHASE X gt Phase X Input Files Phase X Output Files Figure 3 1 Build Process 39 RENESAS The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog which can be accessed via the Options gt Build Phases figure 3 2 On the left hand side are the phases that are defined in the current project Figure 3 2 shows a standard set of build phases The remainder of this chapter details the various functions that the Build Phases dialog provides Build Phases MISH C C Library Generator H C C Compiler Modip REMOVE Move Up Move Wows Figure 3 2 Build Phases Dialog 40 RENESAS 3 2 Creating a Custom Build Phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase Select Options gt Build Phases to invoke the Build Phases dialog figure 3 2 and then click the Add button This will invoke the new build phase wizard dialog figure 3 3a The first step as shown in figure 3 3a asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g
441. utput is an active high signal which is output during the read or write cycles when a trace condition 1 to 4 of the bus monitor function is satisfied The trigger output is available as user V level Note that however some products do not support the external probe 2 EXT2 188 RENESAS 2 6 6 Voltage Follower Circuit CAUTION 1 Do not connect the user system interface cable to the emulator without user system connection 2 Turn on the user system before starting up the emulator A voltage follower circuit is implemented on the emulator which allows the user system voltage level from the user system to be monitored This monitored voltage level is automatically supplied to the logic on the emulator and is derived from the emulator power supply unit This means that no power is taken from the user system board If no user system interface cable is connected to the emulator the emulator will operate at a specified voltage and all clock frequencies will be available to the user If the user system interface cable is attached the emulator will match the voltage supplied to the user target in all cases i e even when the user V is below the operating voltage for the MCU You must be careful not to select an invalid clock frequency When the emulator is connected to the user system and the user system is turned off the voltage follower circuit output voltage level is 0 V In this case the emulator will not operate correct
442. ve the bar to the new position and then release the button gt To remove the split bar Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 85 RENESAS 4 10 Configuring Text The following sections detail how to change the appearance of the text displayed in the editor windows 4 10 1 Changing the Editor Font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify the font to be used in its internal editor All editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font gt To change the editor font 1 Select Tools gt Format Views The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the Source icon in the tree figure 4 10 2 Select the desired font from the Font list 3 Select the size of the font from the Size list 4 Click OK to confirm the new editor settings 2x f All views Font D Selected Text D Text So D Selected Text D Text E C list file Font E C source file E C header file en E C source file C C header file Paint Size E C list file E Preprocessed C source file fio E 5 Expanded assembly source file E Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Assembly include file Preprocessed C source file HEW Sample Text Assembly list file N 2 2 Remove Figure 4 10 Format Views D
443. vice or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corp for further details on these materials or the products contained therein IMPORTANT INFORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Renesas Technology Corp excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e Us
444. w is sorted in ascending order 364 RENESAS 6 12 3 Executing the Step Over Command The Step Over executes a function call as a single step and stops at the next statement of the main program e To step through all statements in the change function at a single step select Step Over from the Debug menu or click the Step Over button in the toolbar Figure 6 24 Step Over Button Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help 18 x Osada S eel oTrallem in s aoiens 2 e emt im ila as al co ce e E 2 Debua E6000_H85_2237 Sessione 6000 H8s_2237 x At Bl e BESELA m MARATL mae palm a aia le s alla e e m E a an aate rl At xj 0x00001046 p_sam new Sample 0x0000104e for i 0 i lt 10 i 0x00001050 j m rand Ox00001058 ECF lt 0 L Ox0000105a j 3 0x0000105c ali 3 0x00001070 e P_sam gt sort a 0x0000107a P_sam gt change a 0x00001082 gt p_san gt s0 a 0 0x0000108a p_san gt sl a 1 0x00001096 p_san gt s2 a 2 0x000010a2 p_san gt s3 a 3 0x000010ae p_san gt s4 a 4 0x000010ba p_san gt s5 a 5 0x000010c6 p_san gt s6 a 6 0x000010d2 p_san gt s7 a 7 0x000010de p_san gt s8 a 8 0x000010ea p_san gt s9 a 9 0x000010f6 delete p_sam 0x000010fc Tutorial S Tutorial B E C source file dbsetc sbtk c 5 6 C source file resetprg cpp sort cpp p Download modules D Tutorial abs
445. warnings J Stop build if the number of errors exceeds 0 IV Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds 10 Show I Command line I Initial directory Tl Environment I Mark out of date files m Makefile build Command excluding parameters S 1HEWDIF hmake exe gt Browse I Use makefile build system Makefile options SSS Makefile path WORKSPDIR make PROJECT NAME mak F Generate makefile before build commences Figure 3 18 Options Dialog Build Tab Select Tools gt Options to invoke the dialog If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of errors exceed check box and then specify the error count limit in the edit field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of warnings exceed check box and then specify the warning count limit in the edit field to the right Note Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the command line environment and initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary 57 RENESAS 3 7 Logging Build Output If you would like to write the results of ea
446. were built again when I selected Build gt Build A file is built again if any of the following conditions holds 1 The options for the current file have been modified since the last build 2 If any of the output files are missing 3 Any of the source files have a newer date than the phase s output files 4 Any of the dependent files have a newer date than the phase s output files 5 Ina user defined custom build phase the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box is checked To see the status of this check box select Options gt Build Phases select the phase in the Build Phase Order list in the Build Order tab and click the Modify button Then you will see the Don t check for input file s existence before executing check box on the Command tab 6 Asubcommand file is selected in Optimizing Linkage Editor I want to exclude a file in a project from build temporarily Push the right button of your mouse on the file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select Exclude Build lt file gt where lt file gt is the selected file Then the file is excluded from build To include the file in build again push the right button of your mouse on the file and select Include Build lt file gt I opened a workspace from my PC and one of my colleagues opened the same workspace simultaneously from another PC I changed the settings of the worksp
447. which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format Click Close to close this dialog once you have the information you require 173 RENESAS 13 2 C Function and defines navigation components These components simply add the function and define definitions to the Navigation view It is then possible to jump to these definitions by double clicking on the label you wish to view Workspace C define navigation a oer category title agl define FLMAX FLMIN HEAPSIZE INT_OFFSET IOSTREAM amp LF 4 O_RDONLY 4 O_RDWR 4 O_WRONLY amp SR hit 4 STDERR 4 STDIN amp STDOUT he C Functions C function navigation g dno category title sbrk ANSI C function CLOSEALL 4 INIT IOLIB he ft Ef Projects GE Templates lt I Navigation Figure 13 8 C Function and defines navigation information 174 RENESAS 14 Smart Editor Another feature of the High performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the HEW editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completion help when using C classes and member functions gt To view the Smart edit status 1 Click on the Tools gt Options menu item Select the Editor tab of the tools options dialog 2 3 The dialog in figure 14 1 is displayed The Enab
448. white space characters are allowed between the variable name and the sign and the value and the sign The value may be split over several lines using a V character If the value contains V characters within the main text then these are taken literally Only V characters followed by a new line are considered to indicate a value wrapping over more than one line There follows some examples of valid variable declarations EXECUTABLE c dir prog exe OUTPUT c dir2 filel out INPUT e dir2 filel c ce dir2 file2 h e dir2 file3 h e dir2 file4 h DEPEND In order to use a variable later in the hmake file write the variable name with added to the front and added to the back The variable name along with the 0 characters will be substituted with the variables value For examples of this see later under description blocks Only alphanumeric characters and underscore characters are allowed in variable names It is possible to use a variable inside the declaration of a different variable but all variables must be declared before they are used 432 RENESAS F 3 Description blocks F 3 1 Basic outline A description block specifies one or more targets zero or more dependants and a list of commands which should be executed if the newest dependent is newer than the newest target If none of the targets exist and or none of the dependants exist then the commands will always be executed It i
449. will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the debugger component is not installed you will not have the Debug menu in the HEW main window RENESAS 2 Build Basics This chapter explains the general basic functions of the HEW whilst the more advanced features can be found in chapter 3 Advanced Build Features 2 1 The Build Process The typical build process is outlined in figure 2 1 This may not be the exact build process which your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW e g you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each step or phase of the build takes a set of project files and then builds them if all succeeds then the next step or phase is executed Yaa suo Bal COMPILER Cc ource Files J ASSEMBLER Assembler Source Files Project LINKER Object m Files Library Files PEE EET Load Module Figure 2 1 Typical Build Process In the example shown in figure 2 1 the compiler is the first phase the assembler is the second phase and the linker is the third and final phase During the compiler phase the C C source files from the project are compiled in turn during the assembler phase the assembler source files a
450. with little endian the order of data depends on the access size 242 RENESAS A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Open the Verify Memory dialog box by choosing File gt Verify Memory The access size at verification can be selected from the Access Size drop down list Memory i 2 xi Format __ Cancel Binary bl File name Pe Offset address ps oo Cancel Access size Fal Figure 5 26 Verify Memory Dialog Box 5 5 11 Disabling Update of the Window Contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled This is done by checking Lock Refresh in the popup menu The Memory window will be grayed 5 5 12 Updating the Window Contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated This is done by checking Refresh in the popup menu 243 RENESAS 5 5 13 Comparing the Memory Contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Open the Compare Memory dialog box by selecting Memory gt Compare from the main menu or by selecting Compare from the popup menu of the Memory window Compare Mem Start Compare Format Byte amp 1 x Figure 5 27 Compare Memory Dialog Box Enter the comparison format Format the start address Begin and end address End of the source memory area and
451. you wish to add a workspace wide tool Workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have made the choice choose the relevant section of the dialog Customize Toolbars Commands Menu Placeholders Debugger Log Help Application wide tools Name Version Add Modify Remove Workspace wide tools Hitachi Mapview Add 1 0 Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface 11 Modify Hitachi Call Walker 11 Remove yee a 116 Figure 6 4 Customize Dialog Menu Tab Click the Add button the dialog shown in figure 6 5 will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing system tools radio button choose the tool from the drop down list and then click OK Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field Enter an initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial directory field Click OK to add the menu option to the Tools menu RENESAS Add Tool 2 xi Define new user tool OK m Tool details Cancel Name __ Cancel E xplorer Command StWINDIF explorer exe gt Browse Arguments Initial directory s TE

H8S/2612 E6000 Emulator User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents